Nissan 2011 Altima Owners Manual Owner's
2015-09-07
: Nissan Nissan-2011-Altima-Owners-Manual-762732 nissan-2011-altima-owners-manual-762732 nissan pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 446 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
®
2011 ALTIMA
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2011 NISSAN ALTIMA L32-D
L32-D
Printing : November 2010 (16)
Publication No.: OM0E 0L32U2
Printed in U.S.A.
OM1E 0L32U1
Welcome to the growing family of new NISSAN
owners. This vehicle is delivered to you with
confidence. It was produced using the latest
techniques and strict quality control.
This manual was prepared to help you under-
stand the operation and maintenance of your
vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilome-
ters) of driving pleasure. Please read through this
manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet
explains details about the warranties cov-
ering your vehicle. The “NISSAN Service
and Maintenance Guide” explains details
about maintaining and servicing your ve-
hicle. Additionally, a separate Customer
Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will
explain how to resolve any concerns you
may have with your vehicle, as well as
clarify your rights under your state’s lemon
law.
Your NISSAN dealership knows your vehicle
best. When you require any service or have any
questions, they will be glad to assist you with the
extensive resources available to them.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this
Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure famil-
iarity with controls and maintenance require-
ments, assisting you in the safe operation of your
vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION RE-
MINDERS FOR SAFETY!
Follow these important driving rules to
help ensure a safe and comfortable trip
for you and your passengers!
●NEVER drive under the influence of al-
cohol or drugs.
●ALWAYS observe posted speed limits
and never drive too fast for conditions.
●
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving
and avoid using vehicle features or taking
other actions that could distract you.
●
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appro-
priate child restraint systems. Preteen
children should be seated in the rear seat.
●ALWAYS provide information about the
proper use of vehicle safety features to
all occupants of the vehicle.
●ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual
for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified.
Modification could affect its
performance, safety or durability, and
may even violate governmental
regulations. In addition, damage or per-
formance problems resulting from modi-
fications may not be covered under
NISSAN warranties.
FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY
This manual includes information for all options
available on this model. Therefore, you may find
some information that does not apply to your
vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in
this manual are those in effect at the time of
printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change
specifications or design without notice and with-
out obligation.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT
THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They
are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause death or serious
personal injury. To avoid or reduce the
risk, the procedures must be followed
precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a
hazard that could cause minor or moder-
ate personal injury or damage to your ve-
hicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the pro-
cedures must be followed carefully.
If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do this”
or “Do not let this happen.”
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustra-
tion, it means the arrow points to the front of the
vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these
call attention to an item in the illustration.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65
WARNING
WARNING
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents,
and certain vehicle components contain
or emit chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain or emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE
ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batter-
ies, may contain perchlorate material. The
following advisory is provided: “Perchlorate
Material – special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
APD1005
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
BLUETOOTH威is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon and
Clarion.
XM Radio威requires
subscription, sold
separately. Not
available in Alaska,
Hawaii or Guam. For
more information,
visit www.xmradio-
.com.
© 2010 NISSAN NORTH AMERICA, INC.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner’s
Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any
means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of Nissan North America, Inc.
NISSAN CARES...
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are
our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN
dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to
provide NISSAN directly with comments or
questions, please contact the NISSAN Con-
sumer Affairs Department using our toll-free
number:
For U.S. customers
1-800-NISSAN-1
(1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers
1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the
following information:
– Your name, address, and telephone number
– Vehicle identification number (attached to the
top of the instrument panel on the driver’s
side)
– Date of purchase
– Current odometer reading
– Your NISSAN dealer’s name
– Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers
Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canadian customers
Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5
or via e-mail at:
For U.S. customers
nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers
information.centre@nissancanada.com
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
Table of
Contents
Illustrated table of contents
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Instruments and controls
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Starting and driving
In case of emergency
Appearance and care
Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Technical and consumer information
Index
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..............0-2
Exterior front ......................................0-3
Exterior rear.......................................0-5
Passenger compartment ...........................0-7
Instrument panel...................................0-8
Engine compartment check locations . . . ............0-10
Warning/indicator lights ...........................0-12
1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-27)
2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-14)
3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-41)
4. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag (P. 1-41)
5. Head Restraints (P. 1-10)
6. Front seat belts (P. 1-14)
7. Side-impact air bag pressure sensor
(driver’s side shown; passenger’s side
similar) (P. 1-57)
8. Supplemental front-impact air bags
(P. 1-41)
9. Seats (P. 1-2)
10. Occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor) (P. 1-50)
11. Seat belt with pretensioner (P. 1-55)
12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) system (P. 1-25)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII2001
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD
RESTRAINTS
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
Coupe
1. Power windows (P. 2-43)
2. Windshield (P. 8-21)
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-28)
4. Engine hood (P. 3-23)
5. Tie down (P. 6-14)
6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-34)
7. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
9. Tire pressure (P. 8-38)
10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
11. Tire chains (P. 8-46)
12. Mirrors (P. 3-29)
13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ ,
keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2)
LII0114
EXTERIOR FRONT
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
Sedan
1. Power windows (P. 2-43)
2. Windshield (P. 8-21)
3. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-28)
4. Engine hood (P. 3-23)
5. Tie down (P. 6-14)
6. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-34)
7. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-29)
8. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
9. Tire pressure (P. 8-38)
10. Flat tire (P. 6-2)
11. Tire chains (P. 8-46)
12. Mirrors (P. 3-29)
13. Door locks, NISSAN Intelligent Key ™ ,
keys (P. 3-4, 3-6, 3-2)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LII0094
0-4 Illustrated table of contents
Coupe
1. Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
(P. 2-29)
2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)
3. Trunk lid (P. 3-23)
4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)
5. Opener operation (P. 3-23)
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)
WII0125
EXTERIOR REAR
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
Sedan
1. Rear window and outside mirror
(if so equipped) defroster switch
(P. 2-29)
2. Interior trunk lid release (P. 3-24)
3. Trunk lid (P. 3-23)
4. Vehicle loading (P. 9-13)
5. Opener operation (P. 3-23)
6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-28)
7. Fuel-filler cap, fuel recommendation
(P. 3-25, P. 9-3)
8. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-25)
9. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-6)
LII0095
0-6 Illustrated table of contents
1. Interior trunk access (P. 1-8)
2. Moonroof (if so equipped) (P. 2-46)
3. Sun visors (P. 3-28)
4. Interior lights, illuminated entry (P. 2-49)
5. HomeLink姞universal transceiver
(if so equipped) (P. 2-51)
6. Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) (P. 3-29)
7. Glove box (P. 2-41)
8. Front cup holders (P. 2-40)
9. Front console (P. 2-41)
10. Front seat (P. 1-2)
11. Rear seat (P. 1-8)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
WII0126
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
1. Vents (P. 4-18)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-29)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetooth姞Hands-free
Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-95, P. 4-91, P. 4-106)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-41, P. 2-35)
6. Cruise control main/set switch
(P. 5-20)
7. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-28)
8. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
9. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-34)
10. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-51)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-41)
12. Glove box (P. 2-41)
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
14. Covered storage box (P. 2-42)
15. Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(P. 4-26)
16. Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(P. 4-19)
17. Shift selector (P. 5-11)
18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/
Storage (if so equipped)
(P. 4-29, P.2-42)
19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-28)
WIC1598
INSTRUMENT PANEL
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
20. Vehicle information display controls
(P. 2-17)
21. Hood release (P. 3-23)
22. Trunk opener (P. 3-23)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-36)
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 5-7)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
QR25DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-15, 8-15)
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)
5. Fuse block (P. 8-23)
6. Battery (P. 8-16)
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
10. Drive belt location (P. 8-18)
11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-15)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LDI0553
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
VQ35DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir (P. 8-14)
2. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-10)
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model) (P. 8-15, 8-15)
4. Air cleaner (P. 8-20)
5. Fuse block (P. 8-23)
6. Battery (P. 8-16)
7. Fuse/fusible link box (P. 8-23)
8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-10)
9. Radiator cap (P. 8-8)
10. Drive belt location (P. 8-18)
11. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-8)
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-15)
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
LDI0552
Illustrated table of contents 0-11
Warning
light
Name Page
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warn-
ing light
2-11
or
Brake warning light 2-11
Charge warning
light
2-11
Continuously Vari-
able Transmission
(CVT) check warn-
ing light (if so
equipped)
2-12
Engine oil pressure
warning light
2-12
Warning
light
Name Page
Low tire pressure
warning light
2-12
Master warning light 2-13
Seat belt warning
light and chime
2-14
Supplemental air
bag warning light
2-14
Indicator
light
Name Page
Continuously Vari-
able Transmission
(CVT) position indi-
cator light (if so
equipped)
2-14
Cruise main switch
indicator light
2-14
Indicator
light
Name Page
Cruise set switch
indicator light
2-15
Front passenger air
bag status light
2-15
High beam indicator
light (blue)
2-15
Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL)
2-15
Security indicator
light
2-27
Slip indicator light 2-16
Turn signal/hazard
indicator lights
2-16
Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) OFF
indicator light
2-16
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS
0-12 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system
Seats ............................................1-2
Front manual seat adjustment
(if so equipped) ................................1-2
Front power seat adjustment
(if so equipped for driver’s seat) ..................1-4
Folding rear seat ...............................1-8
Head restraints................................1-10
Seat belts .......................................1-14
Precautions on seat belt usage..................1-14
Pregnant women ..............................1-17
Injured persons................................1-17
Three-point type seat belt with retractor..........1-17
Seat belt extenders ............................1-20
Seat belt maintenance .........................1-20
Child safety ......................................1-21
Infants........................................1-22
Small children.................................1-22
Larger children ................................1-22
Child restraints ...................................1-23
Precautions on child restraints ..................1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren) System .............................1-25
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
LATCH.......................................1-27
Rear-facing child restraint installation using
the seat belts .................................1-29
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using LATCH..................................1-32
Forward-facing child restraint installation
using the seat belts ............................1-34
Installing top tether strap .......................1-38
Booster seats .................................1-38
Supplemental restraint system .....................1-41
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system .......................................1-41
Supplemental air bag warning labels.............1-56
Supplemental air bag warning light ..............1-57
WARNING
●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
●For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat properly. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” later in this
section.
●After adjustment, gently rock in the seat
to make sure it is securely locked.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
●The seatback should not be reclined
any more than needed for comfort. Seat
belts are most effective when the pas-
senger sits well back and straight up in
the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the
risk of sliding under the lap belt and
being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be
sure not to contact any moving parts to
avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT
ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)
ARS1152
SEATS
1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Forward and backward
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you
slide the seat forward or backward to the desired
position. Release the bar to lock the seat in
position.
Reclining
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean
back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever
up and lean your body forward. Release the lever
to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit. See “Precautions on seat belt usage”later
in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined
to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is
stopped and the transmission is in P (Park) or N
(Neutral) position with the parking brake fully
applied.
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
seat)
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust
the seat height until the desired position is
achieved.
WRS0738 WRS0739 WRS0740
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT
(if so equipped for driver’s seat)
Operating tips
WARNING
Before driving the vehicle, return the seat-
back to an upright seating position after
manually releasing it. Also, make sure the
seat is locked in place. Failure to do so
may cause the seat to move in a collision
or sudden stop. This may result in damage
to the seat or personal injury.
CAUTION
●Do not operate the power recline switch
when the seatback has been manually
released using the upper seatback re-
lease lever 䊊
1. Doing so can damage
the seat.
●Do not pull on the upper seatback re-
lease lever or the trim to return the
seatback to a normal seating position.
Doing so may damage the seat.
●The power seat motor has an auto-reset
overload protection circuit. If the motor
stops during operation, wait 30 seconds,
then reactivate the switch.
●Do not operate the power seat switch for a
long period of time when the engine is off.
This will discharge the battery.
Coupe
WRS0841
1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
●Pull up on the upper seatback release lever
to release the seatback only. Push the seat-
back forward to allow for access to items
behind the front seat. Push the seatback to
the rear of the vehicle to return the seatback
to the upright and locked position. The up-
per seatback release lever does not need to
be used.
Forward and backward
Moving the switch forward or backward will slide
the seat forward or backward to the desired
position.
Reclining
Move the recline switch backward until the de-
sired angle is obtained. To bring the seatback
forward again, move the switch forward and
move your body forward. The seatback will move
forward.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the
seatback for occupants of different sizes for
added comfort and to help obtain proper seat
belt fit (see “Precautions on seat belt usage” later
in this section). Also, the seatback can be re-
clined to allow occupants to rest when the ve-
hicle is stopped and the transmission is in P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position with the parking
brake fully applied.
Sedan
WRS0751
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Seat lifter (if so equipped for driver’s
seat)
Pull the lever up or push down to adjust the angle
and height of the seat cushion.
Lumbar support (if so equipped for
driver’s seat)
The lumbar support feature provides lower back
support to the driver. Push the switch (Type A)
forward or backward or move the lever (Type B)
up or down to adjust the seat lumbar area.
Coupe shown, Sedan similar
WRS0842
Type A
WRS0743
Type B
WRS0843
1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Entry to the rear seat from outside of
the vehicle (if so equipped for Coupe
models)
Pull the seat recliner lever to the uppermost po-
sition folding the seatback forward, releasing the
seat track.
Slide the entire seat forward for access to the
rear seat.
To return the seat to a locked position:
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-
back and track are locked.
Operating tips:
●The seatback and track will not lock until the
seatback is returned rearward.
●The seatback will return to the first locking
notch when using the seat recliner lever.
Exiting from the rear seat on the
passenger’s side, using the upper
seatback release lever (if so equipped
for Coupe models)
Pull the upper seatback release lever 䊊
1to the
uppermost position, folding the seatback forward
䊊
2, releasing the seat track.
Slide the entire seat forward to exit from the rear
seat.
To return the seat to a locked position:
Push the upper seatback rearward until the seat-
back and track are locked.
WRS0739 WRS0791
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
Operating tips:
●The seatback and track will not lock until the
seat back is returned rearward.
●The seatback will return to an upright seating
position if the upper seatback release lever
is pulled to the uppermost position.
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Interior trunk access
The trunk can be accessed from the passenger
side of the rear seat for loading and unloading, as
shown.
1. Open the access cover on the rear parcel
shelf.
2. Push down on the button on the rear parcel
shelf.
3. Fold down the passenger’s side seatback.
To remove or reinstall the seatback release but-
ton access covers, see “Upper tether anchor/key
cylinder covers” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
WARNING
●Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo
area or on the rear seat when it is in the
fold-down position. Use of these areas
by passengers without proper restraints
could result in serious injury in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
●Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. Do not place cargo higher than
the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or col-
lision, unsecured cargo could cause
personal injury.
WRS0794
1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
●When returning the seatbacks to the
upright position, be certain they are
completely secured in the latched posi-
tion. If they are not completely secured,
passengers may be injured in an acci-
dent or sudden stop.
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
To fold down the driver’s side of the rear seat,
reach through the opening and pull on the strap
䊊
1located behind the seat.
The rear seats can be locked using the mechani-
cal key to prevent unauthorized access. For more
information on keys, refer to “Keys” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section of this
manual.
Center armrest (if so equipped)
Pull the armrest down until it is horizontal.
WRS0745 WRS0167
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING
Head restraints supplement the other ve-
hicle safety systems. They may provide
additional protection against injury in cer-
tain rear end collisions. Adjust the head
restraints properly, as specified in this
section. Check the adjustment after
someone else uses the seat. Do not attach
anything to the head restraint stalks or
remove the head restraint. Do not use the
seat if the head restraint has been re-
moved. If the head restraint was removed,
reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seat-
ing position. Failure to follow these in-
structions can reduce the effectiveness of
the head restraints. This may increase the
risk of serious injury or death in a
collision.
The illustration shows the seating positions
equipped with head restraints. All of the head
restraints are adjustable.
䉱Indicates the seating position is equipped with
a head restraint.
Components
1. Head restraint
2. Adjustment notches
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
5. Release knob
LRS0893 WRS0921
1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Adjustment
Adjust the head restraint so the center is level
with the center of the seat occupant’s ears.
To raise the head restraint, pull it up. To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push
the head restraint down.
WRS0134 LRS0888 LRS0889
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
Removal
Use the following procedure to remove the ad-
justable head restraints.
1. Pull the head restraint up to the highest
position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and release
knob.
3. Remove the head restraint from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint properly so it is not
loose in the vehicle.
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head re-
straint before an occupant uses the seating
position.
Install
1. Align the head restraint stalks with the holes
in the seat. Make sure the head restraint is
facing the correct direction.
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the
head restraint down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint before an
occupant uses the seating position.
WRS0922 LRS2026
1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front-seat Active Head Restraints
The Active Head Restraint moves forward utiliz-
ing the force that the seatback receives from the
occupant in a rear-end collision. The movement
of the head restraint helps support the occu-
pant’s head by reducing its backward movement
and helping absorb some of the forces that may
lead to whiplash-type injuries.
Active Head Restraints are effective for collisions
at low to medium speeds in which it is said that
whiplash injury occurs most.
Active Head Restraints operate only in certain
rear-end collisions. After the collision, the head
restraints return to their original position.
Adjust the Active Head Restraints properly as
described in this section.
SPA1025
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT
USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly ad-
justed and you are sitting upright and well back in
your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances
of being injured or killed in an accident and/or the
severity of injury may be greatly reduced.
NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your
passengers to buckle up every time you drive,
even if your seating position includes a supple-
mental air bag.
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces
or territories specify that seat belts be worn
at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
SSS0136
SEAT BELTS
1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
●Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times. Children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat and, if appro-
priate, in a child restraint.
WARNING
●The seat belt should be properly ad-
justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so may
reduce the effectiveness of the entire
restraint system and increase the
chance or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. Serious injury or death can occur
if the seat belt is not worn properly.
SSS0134 SSS0016
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
WARNING
●Always route the shoulder belt over
your shoulder and across your chest.
Never put the belt behind your back,
under your arm or across your neck. The
belt should be away from your face and
neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
●Position the lap belt as low and snug as
possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE
WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could
increase the risk of internal injuries in
an accident.
●Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely
fastened to the proper buckle.
●Do not wear the seat belt inside out or
twisted. Doing so may reduce its
effectiveness.
●Do not allow more than one person to
use the same seat belt.
●Never carry more people in the vehicle
than there are seat belts.
●If the seat belt warning light glows con-
tinuously while the ignition is turned
ON with all doors closed and all seat
belts fastened, it may indicate a mal-
function in the system. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
●No changes should be made to the seat
belt system. For example, do not modify
the seat belt, add material, or install
devices that may change the seat belt
routing or tension. Doing so may affect
the operation of the seat belt system.
Modifying or tampering with the seat
belt system may result in serious per-
sonal injury.
●Once a seat belt pretensioner has acti-
vated, it cannot be reused and must be
replaced together with the retractor.
See your NISSAN dealer.
●Removal and installation of preten-
sioner system components should be
done by a NISSAN dealer.
●All seat belt assemblies, including re-
tractors and attaching hardware,
should be inspected after any collision
by a NISSAN dealer. NISSAN recom-
mends that all seat belt assemblies in
use during a collision be replaced un-
less the collision was minor and the
belts show no damage and continue to
operate properly. Seat belt assemblies
not in use during a collision should also
be inspected and replaced if either
damage or improper operation is noted.
●All child restraints and attaching hard-
ware should be inspected after any col-
lision. Always follow the restraint
manufacturer’s inspection instructions
and replacement recommendations.
The child restraints should be replaced
if they are damaged.
SSS0014
1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use
seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and
always position the lap belt as low as possible
around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder
belt over your shoulder and across your chest.
Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your ab-
dominal area. Contact your doctor for specific
recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use
seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific
recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT
WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
●Every person who drives or rides in this
vehicle should use a seat belt at all
times.
●Do not ride in a moving vehicle when
the seatback is reclined. This can be
dangerous. The shoulder belt will not
be against your body. In an accident,
you could be thrown into it and receive
neck or other serious injuries. You
could also slide under the lap belt and
receive serious internal injuries.
●For the most effective protection when
the vehicle is in motion, the seat should
be upright. Always sit well back in the
seat with both feet on the floor and
adjust the seat belt properly.
Fastening the seat belts
1. Adjust the seat. See “Seats” earlier in this
section.
Manual front seat shown
WRS0738
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
䊊
2Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor
and insert the tongue into the buckle until
you hear and feel the latch engage.
●The retractor is designed to lock dur-
ing a sudden stop or on impact. A
slow pulling motion permits the seat
belt to move, and allows you some
freedom of movement in the seat.
●If the seat belt cannot be pulled from
its fully retracted position, firmly pull
the belt and release it. Then
smoothly pull the belt out of the re-
tractor.
䊊
3Position the lap belt portion low and snug
on the hips as shown.
䊊
4Pull the shoulder belt portion toward the
retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the
shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder
and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating
positions’ three-point seat belts have two modes
of operation:
●Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
●Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow
the driver and passengers some freedom of
movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt
when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during
certain impacts.
The Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode
(child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child
restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt
cannot be extended again until the seat belt
tongue is detached from the buckle and fully
retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode
after the seat belt fully retracts. See “Child re-
straints” later in this section for more information.
The ALR mode should be used only for
child restraint installation. During normal
seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode
should not be activated. If it is activated, it
may cause uncomfortable seat belt ten-
sion.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain
that the seatbacks are completely se-
cured in the latched position. If they are
not completely secured, passengers may
be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
LRS0594 LRS0595
1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Unfastening the seat belts
䊊
1To unfasten the seat belt, press the button on
the buckle. The seat belt automatically re-
tracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt
movement by two separate methods:
●When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the
retractor.
●When the vehicle slows down rapidly.
To increase your confidence in the seat belts,
check the operation as follows:
●Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward
quickly. The retractor should lock and re-
strict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check or
if you have any questions about seat belt opera-
tion, see a NISSAN dealer.
Shoulder belt height adjustment
(Sedan, front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be ad-
justed to the position best for you. See “Precau-
tions on seat belt usage” earlier in this section. To
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊
1and
move the shoulder belt anchor to the desired
position 䊊
2, so the belt passes over the center of
the shoulder. The belt should be away from your
face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Release the adjustment button to lock the shoul-
der belt anchor into position.
WRS0139 LRS0242
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
WARNING
●After adjustment, release the adjust-
ment button and try to move the shoul-
der belt anchor up and down to make
sure it is securely fixed in position.
●The shoulder belt anchor height should
be adjusted to the position best for you.
Failure to do so may reduce the effec-
tiveness of the entire restraint system
and increase the chance or severity of
injury in an accident.
Shoulder belt guide (Coupe)
The shoulder arm can be adjusted to allow easier
access to the shoulder belt. The arm can also be
folded down to allow rear seat passengers easier
access.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is
not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt
and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with
the installed seat belts is available that can be
purchased. The extender adds approximately 8 in
(200 mm) of length and may be used for either
the driver or front passenger seating position.
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance with pur-
chasing an extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
●Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made
by the same company which made the
original equipment seat belts, should
be used with NISSAN seat belts.
●Adults and children who can use the
standard seat belt should not use an
extender. Such unnecessary use could
result in serious personal injury in the
event of an accident.
●Never use seat belt extenders to install
child restraints. If the child restraint is
not secured properly, the child could be
seriously injured in a collision or a sud-
den stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
●To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a
mild soap solution or any solution recom-
mended for cleaning upholstery or carpet.
Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat
belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the
seat belts to retract until they are completely
dry.
LRS0821
1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
●If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt
guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat
belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder
belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
●Periodically check to see that the seat
belt and the metal components, such as
buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires
and anchors, work properly. If loose parts,
deterioration, cuts or other damage on the
webbing is found, the entire seat belt as-
sembly should be replaced.
Children need adults to help protect them.
They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this
manual, child safety information is available from
many other sources, including doctors, teachers,
government traffic safety offices, and community
organizations. Every child is different, so be sure
to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint
systems:
●Rear-facing child restraint
●Forward-facing child restraint
●Booster seat
The proper restraint depends on the child’s size.
Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less
than 20 lbs (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing
child restraints. Forward-facing child restraints
are available for children who outgrow rear-
facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old.
Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle
lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer
use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protec-
tion. The vehicle’s seat belts may not fit
them properly. The shoulder belt may
come too close to the face or neck. The
lap belt may not fit over their small hip
bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-
ting seat belt could cause serious or fatal
injury. Always use appropriate child
restraints.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or terri-
tories require the use of approved child restraints
for infants and small children. See “Child re-
straints” later in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by
using either the LATCH (Lower Anchor and Teth-
ers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat
belt. See the “Child restraints” section for more
information.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens
and children be restrained in the rear seat.
Studies show that children are safer when
properly restrained in the rear seat than in
the front seat.
CHILD SAFETY
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
This is especially important because your
vehicle has a supplemental restraint sys-
tem (air bag system) for the front passen-
ger. See “Supplemental restraint system”
later in this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed
in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recom-
mends that infants be placed in child restraints
that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards. You should choose a child restraint
that fits your vehicle and always follow the manu-
facturer’s instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over one year old and weigh at
least 20 lbs (9 kg) can be placed in a forward-
facing child restraint. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions for minimum and maximum weight
and height recommendations. NISSAN recom-
mends that small children be placed in child
restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. You should choose a child
restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow
the manufacturer’s instructions for installation
and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children who are too large for child restraints
should be seated and restrained by the seat belts
which are provided. The seat belt may not fit
properly if the child is less than 4 ft 9 in (142.5
cm) tall and weighs between 40 lbs (18 kg) and
80 lbs (36 kg). A booster seat should be used to
obtain proper seat belt fit.
NISSAN recommends that a child be placed in a
commercially available booster seat if the shoul-
der belt fits close to the face or neck or if the lap
portion of the seat belt goes across the abdo-
men. The booster seat should raise the child so
that the shoulder belt is properly positioned
across the top, middle portion of the shoulder
and the lap belt is low on the hips. A booster seat
can only be used in seating positions that have a
three-point type seat belt. The booster seat
should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certi-
fying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards. Once the child has grown so
the shoulder belt is no longer on or near the face
and neck, use the shoulder belt without the
booster seat.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any
seat and do not allow a child in the cargo
area. The child could be seriously injured
or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD
RESTRAINTS WARNING
●Failure to follow the warnings and in-
structions for proper use and installa-
tion of child restraints could result in
serious injury or death of a child or
other passengers in a sudden stop or
collision:
– The child restraint must be used and
installed properly. Always follow all
of the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions for installation and use.
– Infants and children should never be
held on anyone’s lap. Even the stron-
gest adult cannot resist the forces of
a collision.
– Do not put a seat belt around both a
child and another passenger.
– NISSAN recommends that all child
restraints be installed in the rear
seat. Studies show that children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seat than in the front seat. If you
must install a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, see
“Forward-facing child restraint in-
stallation using the seat belts” later
in this section.
– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-
facing child restraint in the front
seat. An inflating air bag could seri-
ously injure or kill a child. A rear-
facing child restraint must only be
used in the rear seat.
– Be sure to purchase a child restraint
that will fit the child and vehicle.
Some child restraints may not fit
properly in your vehicle.
ARS1098 WRS0256
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
– Child restraint anchor points are de-
signed to withstand loads from child
restraints that are properly fitted.
– Never use the anchor points for adult
seat belts or harnesses.
– A child restraint with a top tether
strap should not be used in the front
passenger seat.
– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-
sible after fitting the child restraint.
– Infants and children should always
be placed in an appropriate child re-
straint while in the vehicle.
●When the child restraint is not in use,
keep it secured with the LATCH system
or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, loose objects can injure occu-
pants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can
become very hot. Check the seating sur-
face and buckles before placing a child in
the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child
restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem. Some child restraints include rigid or
webbing-mounted attachments that can be con-
nected to these anchors. For details, see “LATCH
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) sys-
tem” later in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child
restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for
infants and children of various sizes. When se-
lecting any child restraint, keep the following
points in mind:
●Choose only a restraint with a label certifying
that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
●Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
●If the child restraint is compatible with your
vehicle, place your child in the child restraint
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the child restraint is compatible with
your child. Choose a child restraint that is
designed for your child’s height and weight.
Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated. Canadian law requires the
top tether strap on forward-facing child
restraints be secured to the designated an-
chor point on the vehicle.
1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor
points that are used with LATCH (Lower Anchors
and Tethers for CHildren) system compatible
child restraints. This system may also be referred
to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system.
With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle
seat belt to secure the child restraint.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instruc-
tions for proper use and installation of
child restraints could result in serious in-
jury or death of a child or other passen-
gers in a sudden stop or collision:
– Attach LATCH system compatible
child restraints only at the locations
shown in the illustration.
– Do not secure a child restraint in the
center rear seating position using
the LATCH lower anchors. The child
restraint will not be secured properly.
– Inspect the lower anchors by insert-
ing your fingers into the lower anchor
area. Feel to make sure there are no
obstructions over the anchors such
as seat belt webbing or seat cushion
material. The child restraint will not
be secured properly if the lower an-
chors are obstructed.
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located at the rear
of the seat cushion near the seatback. A label is
attached to the seatback to help you locate the
LATCH lower anchors.
LATCH system lower anchor locations
WRS0795
LATCH lower anchor location
WRS0700
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
Installing child restraint LATCH lower
anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two
rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can
be connected to two anchors located at certain
seating positions in your vehicle. With this sys-
tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to
secure the child restraint. Check your child re-
straint for a label stating that it is compatible with
LATCH. This information may also be in the in-
structions provided by the child restraint manu-
facturer.
When installing a child restraint, carefully read
and follow the instructions in this manual and
those supplied with the child restraint.
(if so equipped)
WRS0829
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
LRS0661
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
LRS0662
1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Top tether anchor point locations
The child restraint top tether strap must be used
when installing the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchor attachments or seat belts. See “In-
stalling top tether strap” later in this section.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
Anchor points 䊊
1are located on the rear parcel
shelf.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the LATCH system:
1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap 䊊
1, pull the
flap down to allow access to the anchors 䊊
2.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
WRS0797
(if so equipped)
LRS0824
Rear-facing web-mounted – step 3
WRS0801
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
4. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
5. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint or try installing by
using the vehicle seat belt (if applicable).
Not all child restraints fit in all types of ve-
hicles.
Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 3
WRS0802
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0673
Rear-facing – step 5
LRS0674
1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
6. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 5.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT
INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT
BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
WRS0256
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
safety” and “Child restraints” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child
restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear
seats:
1. Child restraints for infants must be
used in the rear-facing direction and
therefore must not be used in the front
seat. Position the child restraint on the seat.
Always follow the restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
Rear-facing – step 1
WRS0256
Rear-facing – step 2
WRS0761
Rear-facing – step 3
LRS0669
1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint to compress
the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while
pulling up on the seat belt.
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Rear-facing – step 4
LRS0670
Rear-facing – step 5
WRS0762
Rear-facing – step 6
WRS0763
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 1
through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint
mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
LATCH
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. If the rear seat cushion has a flap 䊊
1, pull the
flap down to allow access to the anchors 䊊
2.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
(if so equipped)
LRS0824
1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
3. Secure the child restraint anchor attach-
ments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check
to make sure the LATCH attachment is prop-
erly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point. See “Installing top tether strap” in this
section. Do not install child restraints that
require the use of a top tether strap in seat-
ing positions that do not have a top tether
anchor.
4. The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
Forward-facing web-mounted – step 3
WRS0799
Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 3
WRS0800
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
5. For child restraints that are equipped with
webbing-mounted attachments, remove any
additional slack from the anchor attach-
ments. Press downward and rearward firmly
in the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while tightening the webbing
of the anchor attachments.
6. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
7. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the LATCH attachment path. The child re-
straint should not move more than 1 inch (25
mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward
and check to see if the LATCH attachment
holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is
not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment
as necessary, or put the restraint in another
seat and test it again. You may need to try a
different child restraint. Not all child re-
straints fit in all types of vehicles.
8. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
child restraint is loose, repeat steps 2
through 7.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD
RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING
THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used
when installing a child restraint. Failure to
use the ALR mode will result in the child
restraint not being properly secured. The
restraint could tip over or be loose and
cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or
collision. Also, it can change the opera-
tion of the front passenger air bag. See
“Front passenger air bag and status light”
later in this section.
Forward-facing – step 5
LRS0671
Forward-facing – step 7
WRS0697
1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety” and “Child Restraint” sections before in-
stalling a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a forward-facing
child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the
rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in
the front seat, it should be placed in a
forward-facing direction only. Move
the seat to the rearmost position. Child
restraints for infants must be used in
the rear-facing direction and, there-
fore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Al-
ways follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be
secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct child restraint fit.
If the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the child restraint
is removed. See “Head restraints” in this
section for head restraint adjustment, re-
moval and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper child restraint fit, try another
seating position or a different child restraint.
3. Route the seat belt tongue through the child
restraint and insert it into the buckle until you
hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to
follow the child restraint manufacturer’s in-
structions for belt routing.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top
tether strap, route the top tether strap and
secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point (rear seat installation only). See “In-
stalling top tether strap” in this section. Do
not install child restraints that require the use
of a top tether strap in seating positions that
do not have a top tether anchor.
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –
step 1
WRS0699
Forward-facing – step 3
WRS0680
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully
extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor
is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode
when the seat belt is fully retracted.
5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
6. Remove any additional slack from the seat
belt; press downward and rearward firmly in
the center of the child restraint with your
knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion
and seatback while pulling up on the seat
belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the
manufacturer’s instructions to remove any
slack.
Forward-facing – step 4
LRS0667
Forward-facing – step 5
LRS0668
Forward-facing – step 6
WRS0681
1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
8. After attaching the child restraint, test it be-
fore you place the child in it. Push it from side
to side while holding the child restraint near
the seat belt path. The child restraint should
not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from
side to side. Try to tug it forward and check
to see if the belt holds the restraint in place.
If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat
belt as necessary, or put the restraint in
another seat and test it again. You may need
to try a different child restraint. Not all child
restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2
through 8.
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light should illuminate. If this
light is not illuminated see “Front passenger
air bag and status light” in this section.
Move the child restraint to another
seating position. Have the system
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat
belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child re-
straint mode) is canceled.
Forward-facing – step 8
WRS0698
Forward-facing – step 10
WRS0475
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
INSTALLING TOP TETHER STRAP
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH
lower anchors (rear outboard seat positions only)
or the seat belt, as applicable.
1. Flip up the anchor cover 䊊
1from the anchor
point which is located directly behind the
child seat.
2. Position the top tether strap over the top of
the seatback 䊊
2.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor
point on the rear parcel shelf 䊊
3.
4. Refer to the appropriate child restraint in-
stallation procedure steps in this section
before tightening the tether strap.
To remove or reinstall the tether anchor covers,
see “Upper tether anchor/key cylinder covers” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
If you have any questions when installing a
top tether strap, consult your NISSAN
dealer for details.
BOOSTER SEATS
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used
properly, the risk of a child being injured in a
sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
– Make sure the shoulder portion of
the belt is away from the child’s face
and neck and the lap portion of the
belt does not cross the stomach.
– Make sure the shoulder belt is not
behind the child or under the child’s
arm.
– A booster seat must only be installed
in a seating position that has a
lap/shoulder belt.
LRS0798 LRS0455
1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by
several manufacturers. When selecting any
booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
●Choose only a booster seat with a label
certifying that it complies with Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
●Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be
sure it is compatible with the vehicle’s seat
and seat belt system.
●Make sure the child’s head will be properly
supported by the booster seat or vehicle
seat. The seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. For example, if a
low back booster seat 䊊
1is chosen, the
vehicle seatback must be at or above the
center of the child’s ears. If the seatback is
lower than the center of the child’s ears, a
high back booster seat 䊊
2should be used.
●If the booster seat is compatible with your
vehicle, place the child in the booster seat
and check the various adjustments to be
sure the booster seat is compatible with the
child. Always follow all recommended pro-
cedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or
territories require that infants and small
children be restrained in an approved child
restraint at all times while the vehicle is
being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster
seat installation in the rear seats or the front
passenger seat.
LRS0453 LRS0464
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
Booster seat installation
CAUTION
Do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the
Automatic Locking Retractor mode when
using a booster seat with the seat belts.
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the “Child
Safety”, “Child Restraint” and “Booster Seats”
sections before installing a child restraint.
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the
rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a booster seat in the
front seat, move the seat to the rear-
most position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only
place it in a front-facing direction. Always
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions.
3. The booster seat should be positioned on
the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head re-
straint to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If
the head restraint is removed, store it in a
secure place. Be sure to reinstall the
head restraint when the booster seat is
removed. See “Head restraints” in this sec-
tion for head restraint adjustment, removal
and installation information.
WRS0699
Front passenger position
LRS0454
1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
If the seating position does not have an
adjustable head restraint and it is interfering
with the proper booster seat fit, try another
seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low
and snug on the child’s hips. Be sure to
follow the booster seat manufacturer’s in-
structions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt
toward the retractor to take up extra slack.
Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned
across the top, middle portion of the child’s
shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat
manufacturer’s instructions for adjusting the
seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instruc-
tions for properly fastening a seat belt
shown in “Three-point type seat belt with
retractor” earlier in this section.
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front
passenger seat, place the ignition switch in
the ON position. The front passenger air bag
status light may or may not illuminate,
depending on the size of the child and the
type of booster seat being used. See “Front
passenger air bag and status light” later in
this section.
PRECAUTIONS ON SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
This Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) sec-
tion contains important information concerning
the following systems:
●Driver and passenger supplemental front-
impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag
System)
●Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag
●Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag
●Seat belt with pretensioner
Supplemental front-impact air bag system:
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help
cushion the impact force to the head and chest of
the driver and front passenger in certain frontal
collisions.
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the chest and pelvic
area of the driver and front passenger in certain
side-impact collisions. The side air bags are de-
signed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is
impacted.
WRS0475
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact supple-
mental air bag system: This system can help
cushion the impact force to the head of occu-
pants in front and rear outboard seating positions
in certain side-impact collisions. The curtain air
bags are designed to inflate on the side where
the vehicle is impacted.
These supplemental restraint systems are de-
signed to supplement the crash protection pro-
vided by the driver and front passenger seat belts
and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts
should always be correctly worn and the occu-
pant seated a suitable distance away from the
steering wheel, instrument panel and door finish-
ers. (See “Seat belts” earlier in this section for
instructions and precautions on seat belt usage.)
The supplemental air bags operate only
when the ignition switch is placed in the
ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
●The front air bags ordinarily will not
inflate in the event of a side impact, rear
impact, rollover, or lower severity fron-
tal collision. Always wear your seat
belts to help reduce the risk or severity
of injury in various kinds of accidents.
●The front passenger air bag will not
inflate if the passenger air bag status
light is lit or if the front passenger seat
is unoccupied. See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this
section.
●The seat belts and the front air bags are
most effective when you are sitting well
back and upright in the seat. The front
air bags inflate with great force. Even
with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-
tem, if you are unrestrained, leaning
forward, sitting sideways or out of posi-
tion in any way, you are at greater risk of
injury or death in a crash. You may also
receive serious or fatal injuries from the
front air bag if you are up against it
when it inflates. Always sit back against
the seatback and as far away as practi-
cal from the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel. Always use the seat belts.
WRS0031
1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
●The driver and front passenger seat belt
buckles are equipped with sensors that
detect if the seat belts are fastened. The
Advanced Air Bag System monitors the
severity of a collision and seat belt us-
age then inflates the air bags as
needed. Failure to properly wear seat
belts can increase the risk or severity of
injury in an accident.
●The front passenger seat is equipped
with an occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor) that turns the front
passenger air bag OFF under some
conditions. This sensor is only used in
this seat. Failure to be properly seated
and wearing the seat belt can increase
the risk or severity of injury in an acci-
dent. See “Front passenger air bag and
status light” later in this section.
●Keep hands on the outside of the steer-
ing wheel. Placing them inside the
steering wheel rim could increase the
risk that they are injured when the front
air bag inflates.
ARS1133
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
WARNING
●Never let children ride unrestrained or
extend their hands or face out of the
window. Do not attempt to hold them in
your lap or arms. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
ARS1041 ARS1042 ARS1043
1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
●Children may be severely injured or
killed when the front air bags, side air
bags or curtain air bags inflate if they
are not properly restrained. Pre-teens
and children should be properly re-
strained in the rear seat, if possible.
●Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air
Bag System, never install a rear-facing
child restraint in the front seat. An in-
flating front air bag could seriously in-
jure or kill your child. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for
details.
ARS1044 ARS1045 ARS1046
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bags and roof-mounted curtain
side-impact supplemental air bags:
●The side air bags and curtain air bags
ordinarily will not inflate in the event of
a frontal impact, rear impact, rollover or
lower severity side collision. Always
wear your seat belts to help reduce the
risk or severity of injury in various kinds
of accidents.
WARNING
●The seat belts, the side air bags and
curtain air bags are most effective when
you are sitting well back and upright in
the seat with both feet on the floor. The
side air bag and curtain air bag inflate
with great force. Do not allow anyone to
place their hand, leg or face near the
side air bag on the side of the seatback
of the front seat or near the side roof
rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the
front seats or rear outboard seats to
extend their hand out of the window or
lean against the door. Some examples
of dangerous riding positions are
shown in the previous illustrations. WARNING
●When sitting in the rear seat, do not
hold onto the seatback of the front seat.
If the side air bag inflates, you may be
seriously injured. Be especially careful
with children, who should always be
properly restrained. Some examples of
dangerous riding positions are shown
in the illustrations.
●Do not use seat covers on the front
seatbacks. They may interfere with side
air bag inflation.
SSS0101 WRS0032
1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SSS0159 SSS0162
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
Coupe
LRS2025
1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag inflators
2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bags
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag modules
4. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
5. Side-impact air bag pressure sensor
(driver’s side shown; passenger’s side
similar)
6. Supplemental front-impact air bag
modules
7. Crash zone sensor
8. Seat belt buckle switches on driver’s
and passenger’s side
9. Occupant classification sensor
(pattern sensor)
10. Occupant classification system control
unit
11. Seat belt with pretensioner
12. Side satellite sensor
Sedan
LRS2024
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System
(front seats)
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Ad-
vanced Air Bag System for the driver and front
passenger seats. This system is designed to
meet certification requirements under U.S. regu-
lations. It is also permitted in Canada. However,
all of the information, cautions and warn-
ings in this manual still apply and must be
followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is
located in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is
mounted in the dashboard above the glove box.
The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher
severity frontal collisions, although they may in-
flate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact.
They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper front air bag system opera-
tion.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System has dual
stage air bag inflators. It also monitors informa-
tion from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag
Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and
the occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-
sor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of
a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For
the front passenger, the occupant classification
sensor is also monitored. Based on information
from the sensors, only one front air bag may
inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity
and whether the front occupants are belted or
unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air
bag may be automatically turned OFF under
some conditions, depending on the information
provided by the occupant classification sensor. If
the front passenger air bag is OFF, the passenger
air bag status light will be illuminated (if the seat is
unoccupied, the light will not be illuminated, but
the air bag will be off). See “Front passenger air
bag and status light” later in this section for
further details. One front air bag inflating does not
indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag
system, please contact NISSAN or your NISSAN
dealer. If you are considering modification of your
vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact
NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the
front of this Owner’s Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise
may be heard, followed by the release of smoke.
This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a
fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the face and
chest of the front occupants. They can help save
lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an
inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions
or other injuries. Front air bags do not provide
restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN advanced air bags, seat belts
should be correctly worn and the driver and pas-
senger seated upright as far as practical away
from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The
front air bags inflate quickly in order to help
protect the front occupants. Because of this, the
force of the front air bag inflating can increase the
risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is
against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the
ignition switch is in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front passenger air bag and status light
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to
automatically turn OFF under some con-
ditions. Read this section carefully to
learn how it operates. Proper use of the
seat, seat belt and child restraints is nec-
essary for most effective protection. Fail-
ure to follow all instructions in this
manual concerning the use of seats, seat
belts and child restraints can increase the
risk or severity of injury in an accident.
Status light
The front passenger air bag status light is
located on the instrument panel above the radio
controls. The light operates as follows:
●Unoccupied passenger’s seat: The is
OFF and the front passenger air bag is OFF
and will not inflate in a crash.
●Passenger’s seat occupied by a small adult,
child or child restraint as outlined in this
section: The illuminates to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is OFF and
will not inflate in a crash.
●Occupied passenger seat and the passen-
ger meets the conditions outlined in this
section: The light is OFF to indicate
that the front passenger air bag is opera-
tional.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to auto-
matically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated
under some conditions as described below in
accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front
passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a
crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your
vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce
the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag
to certain front passenger seat occupants, such
as children, by requiring the air bag to be auto-
matically turned OFF.
The occupant classification sensor (pattern sen-
sor) is in the front passenger seat cushion and is
designed to detect an occupant and objects on
the seat. For example, if a child is in the front
passenger seat, the Advanced Air Bag System is
designed to turn the passenger air bag OFF in
accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child
restraint of the type specified in the regulations is
on the seat, the occupant classification sensor
can detect it and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are
properly seated and using the seat belt as out-
lined in this manual should not cause the passen-
ger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For
small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the
occupant does not sit in the seat properly (for
example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an
edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of
position), this could cause the sensor to turn the
air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and
wearing the seat belt properly for the most effec-
tive protection by the seat belt and supplemental
air bag.
WRS0475
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and chil-
dren be properly restrained in a rear seat.
NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child
restraints and booster seats be properly installed
in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant
classification sensor is designed to operate as
described above to turn the front passenger air
bag OFF for specified child restraints as required
by the regulations. Failing to properly secure
child restraints and to use the ALR mode (child
restraint mode) may allow the restraint to tip or
move in an accident or sudden stop. This can
also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a
crash instead of being OFF. See “Child re-
straints” earlier in this section for proper use and
installation.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the
passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a
crash. However, heavy objects placed on the
seat could result in air bag inflation, because of
the object being detected by the occupant clas-
sification sensor. Other conditions could also
result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is
standing on the seat, or if two children are on the
seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual.
Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants
are seated and restrained properly.
Using the passenger air bag status light, you can
monitor when the front passenger air bag is au-
tomatically turned OFF with the seat occupied.
The light will not illuminate when the front pas-
senger seat is unoccupied.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the passen-
ger air bag status light is illuminated (indicating
that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the
person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat
properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat,
the passenger air bag status light may or may not
be illuminated, depending on the size of the child
and the type of child restraint being used. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that
the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be
that the child restraint or seat belt is not being
used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is
installed properly, the seat belt is used properly
and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air
bag status light is not illuminated, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the passenger air bag status light will not illu-
minate even though you believe that the child
restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are
properly positioned, the system may be sensing
an unoccupied seat (in which case the air bag is
OFF). Your NISSAN dealer can check that the
system is OFF by using a special tool. However,
until you have confirmed with your dealer that
your air bag is working properly, reposition the
occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The air bag system and passenger air bag status
light will take a few seconds to register a change
in the passenger seat status. However, if the seat
becomes unoccupied, the air bag status light will
remain off.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passenger air
bag system, the supplemental air bag warning
light , located in the meter and gauges area
in the center of the instrument panel, will blink.
Have the system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag
precautions
WARNING
●Do not place any objects on the steer-
ing wheel pad or on the instrument
panel. Also, do not place any objects
between any occupant and the steering
wheel or instrument panel. Such ob-
jects may become dangerous projec-
tiles and cause injury if the front air
bags inflate.
1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
●Do not place objects with sharp edges
on the seat. Also, do not place heavy
objects on the seat that will leave per-
manent impressions in the seat. Such
objects can damage the seat or occu-
pant classification sensor (pattern sen-
sor). This can affect the operation of the
air bag system and result in serious
personal injury.
●Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the
operation of the air bag system and
result in serious personal injury.
●Immediately after inflation, several
front air bag system components will be
hot. Do not touch them; you may se-
verely burn yourself.
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the supplemental air bag system. This is
to prevent accidental inflation of the
supplemental air bag or damage to the
supplemental air bag system.
●Tampering with the front air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
Tampering includes changes to the
steering wheel and the instrument
panel assembly by placing material
over the steering wheel pad and above
the instrument panel or by installing
additional trim material around the air
bag system.
●Modifying or tampering with the front
passenger seat may result in serious
personal injury. For example, do not
change the front seats by placing mate-
rial on the seat cushion or by installing
additional trim material, such as seat
covers, on the seat that are not specifi-
cally designed to assure proper air bag
operation. Additionally, do not stow any
objects under the front passenger seat
or the seat cushion and seatback. Such
objects may interfere with the proper
operation of the occupant classifica-
tion sensor.
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the seat belt system. This may affect the
front air bag system. Tampering with
the seat belt system may result in seri-
ous personal injury.
●Work on and around the front air bag
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. The Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS) wiring should not be
modified or disconnected. Unauthor-
ized electrical test equipment and prob-
ing devices should not be used on the
air bag system.
●A cracked windshield should be re-
placed immediately by a qualified re-
pair facility. A cracked windshield could
affect the function of the supplemental
air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the front air bag system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
Front seat-mounted side-impact
supplemental air bag and roof-
mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the
seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags
are located in the side roof rails. These systems
are designed to meet voluntary guidelines to help
reduce the risk of injury to out-of-position occu-
pants. However, all of the information, cau-
tions and warnings in this manual still ap-
ply and must be followed. The side air bags
and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in
higher severity side collisions, although they may
inflate if the forces in another type of collision are
similar to those of a higher severity side impact.
They are designed to inflate on the side where the
vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in cer-
tain side collisions.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an
indication of proper side air bag and curtain air
bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags
inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed
by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harm-
ful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be
taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and
choking. Those with a history of a breathing con-
dition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts,
help to cushion the impact force on the chest and
pelvic area of the front occupants. Curtain air
bags help to cushion the impact force to the head
of occupants in the front and rear outboard seat-
ing positions. They can help save lives and re-
duce serious injuries. However, an inflating side
air bag and curtain air bag may cause abrasions
or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air
bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the
driver and passenger seated upright as far as
practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat
passengers should be seated as far away as
practical from the door finishers and side roof
rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate
quickly in order to help protect the occupants.
Because of this, the force of the side air bag and
curtain air bag inflating can increase the risk of
injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against,
these air bag modules during inflation. The side
air bags and curtain air bag will deflate quickly
after the collision is over.
The side air bags and curtain air bags op-
erate only when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON
position, the supplemental air bag warning
light illuminates. The supplemental air bag
warning light will turn off after about 7
seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
●Do not place any objects near the seat-
back of the front seats. Also, do not
place any objects (an umbrella, bag,
etc.) between the front door finisher
and the front seat. Such objects may
become dangerous projectiles and
cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
WRS0816
1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
●Right after inflation, several side air bag
and curtain air bag system components
will be hot. Do not touch them; you may
severely burn yourself.
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the side air bag and curtain air bag
systems. This is to prevent damage to or
accidental inflation of the side air bag
and curtain air bag or damage to the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
●Do not make unauthorized changes to
your vehicle’s electrical system, sus-
pension system or side panel. This
could affect proper operation of the
side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
●Tampering with the side air bag system
may result in serious personal injury.
For example, do not change the front
seats by placing material near the seat-
backs or by installing additional trim
material, such as seat covers, around
the side air bag.
●Work around and on the side air bag
and curtain air bag system should be
done by a NISSAN dealer. Installation
of electrical equipment should also be
done by a NISSAN dealer. The SRS wir-
ing harnesses* should not be modified
or disconnected. Unauthorized electri-
cal test equipment and probing devices
should not be used on the side air bag
or curtain air bag system.
* The SRS wiring harness connectors are
yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the side air bag and
curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to
the appropriate sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Seat belts with pretensioners (Front
seats)
WARNING
●The pretensioners cannot be reused af-
ter activation. They must be replaced
together with the retractor and buckle
as a unit.
●If the vehicle becomes involved in a
frontal collision but a pretensioner is
not activated, be sure to have the pre-
tensioner system checked and, if nec-
essary, replaced by your NISSAN
dealer.
●No unauthorized changes should be
made to any components or wiring of
the pretensioner system. This is to pre-
vent damage to or accidental activation
of the pretensioners. Tampering with
the pretensioner system may result in
serious personal injury.
●Work around and on the pretensioner
system should be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Installation of electrical equip-
ment should also be done by a NISSAN
dealer. Unauthorized electrical test
equipment and probing devices should
not be used on the pretensioner system.
●If you need to dispose of a pretensioner
or scrap the vehicle, contact a NISSAN
dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures
could cause personal injury.
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
The pretensioner system activates in conjunction
with the front air bag system. Working with the
seat belt retractor, it helps tighten the seat belt
when the vehicle becomes involved in certain
types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat
occupants.
The pretensioner is encased with the seat belt
retractor. These seat belts are used the same way
as conventional seat belts.
When a pretensioner activates, smoke is re-
leased and a loud noise may be heard. This
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire.
Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may
cause irritation and choking. Those with a history
of a breathing condition should get fresh air
promptly.
After pretensioner activation, load limiters allow
the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to
reduce forces against the chest.
If any abnormality occurs in the pretensioner sys-
tem, the supplemental air bag warning
light will not come on, will flash intermit-
tently or will turn on for 7 seconds and remain on
after the ignition switch has been placed in the
ON or START position. In this case, the preten-
sioner system may not function properly. It must
be checked and repaired. Take your vehicle to the
nearest NISSAN dealer.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you
inform the buyer about the pretensioner system
and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections
in this Owner’s Manual.
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located
on the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-
impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as
shown in the illustration.
WRS0895
1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG
WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying in the instrument panel, moni-
tors the circuits of the supplemental front-impact
air bag, front seat-mounted side-impact supple-
mental air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag and seat belt pretensioner
systems. The monitored circuits include the Air
bag Control Unit (ACU), crash zone sensor, sat-
ellite sensors, side-impact air bag pressure sen-
sors, occupant classification system, front air bag
modules, side air bag modules, curtain air bag
modules, pretensioners and all related wiring.
When the ignition is placed in the ON position,
the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates
for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This
means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag and curtain air bag and
pretensioner systems need servicing:
●The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
●The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
●The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air
bag and curtain air bag or pretensioner systems
may not operate properly. They must be checked
and repaired. Take your vehicle to the nearest
NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag and/or preten-
sioner systems will not operate in an ac-
cident. To help avoid injury to yourself or
others, have your vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags
and pretensioners are designed to inflate on a
one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is
damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light
remains illuminated after inflation has occurred.
Repair and replacement of these supplemental
air bag systems should be done only by a
NISSAN dealer.
When maintenance work is required on the ve-
hicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air
bags, pretensioners and related parts should be
pointed out to the person performing the mainte-
nance. The ignition should always be in the LOCK
position when working under the hood or inside
the vehicle.
WARNING
●Once a front air bag, side air bag, or
curtain air bag has inflated, the air bag
module will not function again and
must be replaced. Additionally, if any of
the front air bags inflate, the activated
pretensioners must also be replaced.
The air bag module and pretensioners
should be replaced by a NISSAN dealer.
The air bag module and pretensioners
cannot be repaired.
LRS0100
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
●The front air bag, side air bag, curtain
air bag systems and the pretensioner
system should be inspected by a
NISSAN dealer if there is any damage to
the front end or side portion of the
vehicle.
●If you need to dispose of a supplemen-
tal air bag or pretensioners or scrap the
vehicle, contact a NISSAN dealer. Incor-
rect disposal procedures could cause
personal injury.
1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
MEMO
Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel...................................2-2
Meters and gauges ................................2-3
Speedometer and odometer .....................2-4
Tachometer ....................................2-5
Engine coolant temperature gauge ...............2-5
Fuel gauge ....................................2-6
Compass display (if so equipped) ...................2-6
Compass display ...............................2-7
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders ......2-10
Checking bulbs ...............................2-10
Warning lights ................................2-11
Indicator lights ................................2-14
Audible reminders .............................2-16
Vehicle information display.........................2-17
How to use the Vehicle Information Display .......2-17
Security systems .................................2-26
Vehicle security system.........................2-26
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system .............2-27
Windshield wiper and washer switch ...............2-28
Switch operation ..............................2-28
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped)
defroster switch ..................................2-29
Headlight and turn signal switch....................2-29
Xenon headlights (if so equipped) . . . ............2-29
Headlight control switch........................2-31
Daytime running light system (Canada only) ......2-32
Instrument brightness control ...................2-33
Turn signal switch .............................2-33
Fog light switch (if so equipped) ................2-34
Hazard warning flasher switch .....................2-34
Horn ............................................2-35
Heated seat (if so equipped).......................2-35
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) off switch...........2-36
Power outlet .....................................2-36
Storage .........................................2-37
Map pockets..................................2-37
Seatback pockets (if so equipped) ..............2-37
Storage pouch (if so equipped) .................2-38
Sunglasses holder.............................2-38
Cup holders ..................................2-40
Glove box ....................................2-41
Console box ..................................2-41
Storage box (if so equipped)....................2-42
Covered storage box...........................2-42
Grocery hooks ................................2-42
Cargo net (if so equipped)......................2-43
Windows ........................................2-43
Power windows ...............................2-43
Moonroof (if so equipped) .........................2-46
Automatic moonroof ...........................2-46
Interior light ......................................2-49
Console light (if so equipped)...................2-50
Personal Lights...................................2-50
Map lights .......................................2-50
Trunk light .......................................2-51
HomeLink姞universal transceiver (if so equipped).....2-51
Programming HomeLink姞.......................2-52
Programming HomeLink姞for Canadian
customers ....................................2-53
Operating the HomeLink姞universal
transceiver....................................2-53
Programming trouble-diagnosis .................2-53
Clearing the programmed information ............2-53
Rolling code programming......................2-54
Reprogramming a single HomeLink姞button ......2-54
If your vehicle is stolen .........................2-54
1. Vents (P. 4-18)
2. Headlight/fog light (if so equipped)/turn
signal switch (P. 2-29)
3. Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped)/Bluetooth姞Hands-free
Phone System (if so equipped)
(P. 4-95, P. 4-91, P. 4-106)
4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)
5. Driver supplemental air bag/horn
(P. 1-41, P. 2-35)
6. Cruise control main/set switch
(P. 5-20)
7. Windshield wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-28)
8. Ignition switch (P. 5-7)
9. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 2-34)
10. Front passenger air bag status light
(P. 1-51)
11. Front passenger supplemental air bag
(P. 1-41)
12. Glove box (P. 2-41)
13. Navigation system* (if so equipped)
(P. 4-2)
14. Covered storage box (P. 2-42)
15. Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(P. 4-26)
16. Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(P. 4-19)
17. Shift selector (P. 5-11)
18. Audio system controls (if so equipped)/
Storage (if so equipped) (P. 4-29,
P.2-42)
19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel controls
(P. 3-28)
WIC1598
INSTRUMENT PANEL
2-2 Instruments and controls
20. Vehicle information display controls
(P. 2-17)
21. Hood release (P. 3-23)
22. Trunk opener (P. 3-23)
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF
switch (P. 2-36)
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ port (P. 5-7)
*: Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual (if so equipped).
See the page number indicated in paren-
theses for operating details.
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Fuel gauge
4. Engine coolant temperature gauge
5. Odometer/twin trip odometer
6. Twin trip odometer change button
7. Vehicle information display
8. Instrument brightness control
WIC1259
METERS AND GAUGES
Instruments and controls 2-3
1. Speedometer
2. Change button
3. Odometer/twin trip odometer
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
Speedometer
The speedometer 䊊
1indicates vehicle speed in
miles per hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour
(km/h).
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer/twin trip odometer is displayed
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
The odometer records the total distance the ve-
hicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of
individual trips.
Changing the display:
Pushing the change button changes the display
as follows:
Trip →Trip →Trip
Resetting the trip odometer:
Pushing the change button for more than 1 sec-
ond resets the currently displayed trip odometer
to zero.
WIC1418 WIC1261
2-4 Instruments and controls
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in revo-
lutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev engine into
the red zone 䊊
1.
CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red
zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce en-
gine speed. Operating the engine in the
red zone may cause serious engine
damage.
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
The gauge indicates the engine coolant tempera-
ture. The engine coolant temperature is within the
normal range 䊊
1when the gauge needle points
within the zone shown in the illustration.
The engine coolant temperature varies with the
outside air temperature and driving conditions.
CAUTION
If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-
ture near the hot (H) end of the normal
range, reduce vehicle speed to decrease
temperature. If the gauge is over the nor-
mal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible. If the engine is over-
heated, continued operation of the ve-
hicle may seriously damage the engine.
See “If your vehicle overheats” in the “In
case of emergency” section for immediate
action required.
LIC1058 LIC1386
Instruments and controls 2-5
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level
in the tank.
The gauge may move slightly during braking,
turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills.
The gauge needle returns to E (Empty) after the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The low fuel warning light comes on when the
amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
Refill the fuel tank before the gauge regis-
ters E (Empty).
The indicates that the fuel-filler door is
located on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
CAUTION
●If the vehicle runs out of fuel,
the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as
possible. After a few driving trips,
the light should turn off. If the
light remains on after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
●For additional information, see “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” later in
this section.
This unit measures terrestrial magnetism and in-
dicates the direction of the vehicle’s heading.
With the ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
tion, press the button as described in the
chart below to activate various features of the
automatic anti-glare rearview mirror.
Push and hold
the
button for about:
Feature:
(Push button again for about 1 sec-
ond to change settings)
1 second Compass display toggles on/off
5 seconds Compass zone can be changed to
correct false compass readings
9 seconds Compass enters calibration mode
For information about the automatic anti-glare
feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare rearview
mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjust-
ments” section.
LIC1060
COMPASS DISPLAY (if so equipped)
2-6 Instruments and controls
Press the button for about 1 second when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position to
toggle the compass display 䊊
1on or off. The
display will indicate the direction of the vehicle’s
heading.
N: North
E: East
S: South
W: West
If the display reads “C”, calibrate the compass by
driving the vehicle in three complete circles at
less than 5 MPH (8 km/h).
You can also calibrate the compass by driving
your vehicle on your everyday route. The com-
pass will be calibrated once it has tracked three
complete circles.
COMPASS DISPLAY
Press the button when the ignition switch
is placed in the ON position. The direction will be
displayed.
Zone variation change procedure
The difference between magnetic north and geo-
graphical north is known as variance. In some
areas, this difference can sometimes be great
enough to cause false compass readings. Follow
these instructions to set the variance for your
particular location if this happens:
1. Establish your location on the zone map.
Refer to the illustration. Record your zone
number.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Press the button in for 5 seconds until
the current zone entry number is displayed.
4. Press the button repeatedly until the
desired zone entry number is displayed.
Once the desired zone number is displayed, stop
pressing the button and the display will
show compass direction within a few seconds.
NOTE:
Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.
LIC1487
Instruments and controls 2-7
●If a magnet is located near the com-
pass or the vehicle is driven where the
terrestrial magnetism is disturbed, the
compass display may not indicate the
correct direction.
●In places where the terrestrial magne-
tism is disturbed, the correction of the
direction starts automatically.
Inaccurate compass direction:
The compass display is equipped with automatic
correction function. If the correct direction is not
shown, follow this procedure.
1. With the display turned on, press and hold
the switch for about 9 seconds. The
display will read “C.”
2. Calibrate the compass by driving the vehicle
in three complete circles at a maximum
speed of 5 MPH (8 km/h).
3. After completing the circles the display
should return to normal.
●If the compass deviates from the correct
indication soon after repeated adjustment,
have the compass checked at an authorized
NISSAN dealer.
WIC0355
2-8 Instruments and controls
●The compass may not indicate the correct
compass point in tunnels or while driving up
or down a steep hill. (The compass returns
to the correct compass point when the ve-
hicle moves to an area where the geomag-
netism is stabilized.)
CAUTION
●Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,
which are attached to the vehicle by
means of a magnet. They affect the op-
eration of the compass.
●When cleaning the mirror, use a paper
towel or similar material dampened
with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass
cleaner directly on the mirror as it may
cause the liquid cleaner to enter the
mirror housing.
Instruments and controls 2-9
or Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Seat belt warning light and chime Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
or Brake warning light Supplemental air bag warning light Security indicator light
Charge warning light Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
position indicator light (if so equipped)
Slip indicator light
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
check warning light (if so equipped)
Cruise main switch indicator light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Engine oil pressure warning light Cruise set switch indicator light Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator
light
Low tire pressure warning light Front passenger air bag status light
Master warning light High beam indicator light (blue)
CHECKING BULBS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake
and place the ignition switch in the ON position
without starting the engine. The following lights
will come on:
, or , , , ,
The following lights come on briefly and then go
off:
or , , , ,
If any light fails to come on, it may indicate
a burned-out bulb or an open circuit in the
electrical system. Have the system repaired
promptly.
WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
2-10 Instruments and controls
WARNING LIGHTS
or Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light illuminates and then turns off. This
indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the
engine is running, or while driving, it may indicate
the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the
system checked by a NISSAN dealer.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock func-
tion is turned off. The brake system then operates
normally, but without anti-lock assistance. See
⬙Brake system⬙in the ⬙Starting and driving⬙sec-
tion.
or Brake warning light
This light functions for both the parking brake and
the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on when the parking
brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level.
If the light comes on while the engine is running
with the parking brake not applied, stop the ve-
hicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid
as necessary. See “Brake fluid” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the
warning system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
WARNING
●Your brake system may not be working
properly if the warning light is on. Driv-
ing could be dangerous. If you judge it
to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest
service station for repairs. Otherwise,
have your vehicle towed because driv-
ing it could be dangerous.
●Pressing the brake pedal with the en-
gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid
level may increase your stopping dis-
tance and braking will require greater
pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
●If the brake fluid level is below the
MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake
fluid reservoir, do not drive until the
brake system has been checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning
indicator
When the parking brake is released and the
brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake
warning light and the Anti-lock Braking System
(ABS) warning light illuminate, it may indicate the
ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake
system checked, and if necessary, repaired by a
NISSAN dealer promptly. Avoid high-speed driv-
ing and abrupt braking. (See “Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS) warning light” in this section.)
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running,
it may indicate the charging system is not func-
tioning properly. Turn the engine off and check
the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken,
missing, or if the light remains on, see a NISSAN
dealer immediately.
Instruments and controls 2-11
CAUTION
●Do not ground electrical accessories
directly to the battery terminal. Doing
so will bypass the variable control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely. Refer to “Variable
voltage control system” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section later
in this manual.
●Do not continue driving if the generator
belt is loose, broken or missing.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) check
warning light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, the light comes on for about 2 seconds.
If the light comes on at any other time, it may
indicate the CVT system is not functioning prop-
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Engine oil pressure warning
light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the
light flickers or comes on during normal driving,
pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine
immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other
authorized repair shop.
The engine oil pressure warning light is not
designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the
dipstick to check the oil level. See “Engine oil” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil
pressure warning light on could cause se-
rious damage to the engine almost imme-
diately. Such damage is not covered by
warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it
is safe to do so.
Low tire pressure warning light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire
pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low
tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not
functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this light illuminates for about 1 second
and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning:
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire
pressure, the warning light will illuminate.
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning also
appears in the vehicle information display.
When the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates, you should stop and adjust the
tire pressure of all 4 tires to the recom-
mended COLD tire pressure shown on the
Tire and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening. The low tire
pressure warning light does not automati-
cally turn off when the tire pressure is ad-
justed. After the tire is inflated to the rec-
ommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low
tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pres-
sure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning is active
as long as the low tire pressure warning light
remains illuminated.
For additional information, see “Vehicle informa-
tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving” section and
in the “In case of emergency” section.
2-12 Instruments and controls
TPMS malfunction:
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low
tire pressure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position. The light will remain on
after the 1 minute. Have the system checked by a
NISSAN dealer. The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
warning does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS mal-
function.
For additional information, see “Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section and “Tire pressure” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section.
WARNING
●If the light does not illuminate with the
ignition switch placed in the ON posi-
tion, have the vehicle checked by a
NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
●If the light illuminates while driving,
avoid sudden steering maneuvers or
abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,
pull off the road to a safe location and
stop the vehicle as soon as possible.
Driving with under-inflated tires may
permanently damage the tires and in-
crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-
rious vehicle damage could occur and
may lead to an accident and could re-
sult in serious personal injury. Check
the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust
the tire pressure to the recommended
COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire
and Loading Information label located
in the driver’s door opening to turn the
low tire pressure warning light OFF. If
the light still illuminates while driving
after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire
may be flat. If you have a flat tire, re-
place it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced tire pressure will not be in-
dicated, the TPMS will not function and
the low tire pressure warning light will
flash for approximately 1 minute. The
light will remain on after 1 minute. Con-
tact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION
●The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to
check the tire pressure regularly.
●If the vehicle is being driven at speeds
of less than 16 MPH (25 km/h), the
TPMS may not operate correctly.
●Be sure to install the specified size of
tires to the 4 wheels correctly.
Master warning light
This light comes on when various vehicle infor-
mation display warnings appear.
Instruments and controls 2-13
Seat belt warning light and
chime
The light and chime remind you to fasten your
seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the ON or START
position and remains illuminated until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened. At the same time, the chime
sounds for about 6 seconds unless the driver’s
seat belt is securely fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if
the front passenger’s seat belt is not fastened
when the front passenger’s seat is occupied. For
7 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the ON position, the system does not activate the
warning light for the front passenger.
Refer to “Seat belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat
belts and supplemental restraint system” section
for precautions on seat belt usage.
Supplemental air bag warning
light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or
START position, the supplemental air bag warn-
ing light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then
turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front
air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and preten-
sioner systems need servicing and your vehicle
must be taken to a NISSAN dealer:
●The supplemental air bag warning light re-
mains on after approximately 7 seconds.
●The supplemental air bag warning light
flashes intermittently.
●The supplemental air bag warning light does
not come on at all.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental
restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pre-
tensioners may not function properly. For addi-
tional details, see “Supplemental restraint sys-
tem” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light
is on, it could mean that the front air bag,
side air bag, curtain air bag systems
and/or pretensioner systems will not op-
erate in an accident. To help avoid injury
to yourself or others, have your vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings and indi-
cators, see “Vehicle information display” later in
this section.
Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) position
indicator light (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, this indicator light shows the shift selec-
tor position. See “Driving the vehicle” in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual.
Cruise main switch indicator
light
The light comes on when the cruise control main
switch is pushed. The light goes out when the
main switch is pushed again. When the cruise
main switch indicator light comes on, the cruise
control system is operational.
2-14 Instruments and controls
Cruise set switch indicator
light
The light comes on while the vehicle speed is
controlled by the cruise control system. If the light
blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate
the cruise control system is not functioning prop-
erly. Have the system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Front passenger air bag status
light
The front passenger air bag status light ( )
will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be
OFF depending on how the front passenger seat
is being used.
For front passenger air bag status light operation,
see “Front passenger air bag and status light” in
the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section of this manual.
High beam indicator light
(blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high
beams are on and goes out when the low beams
are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on
when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks
while the engine is running, it may indicate a
potential emission control malfunction.
The Malfunction Indicator Light may also come
on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing,
or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make
sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed
tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons
(11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the light should
turn off if no other potential emission control
system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for 20
seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds when
the engine is not running, it indicates that the
vehicle is not ready for an emission control sys-
tem inspection/maintenance test. See “Readi-
ness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
Operation
The Malfunction Indicator Light will come on in
one of two ways:
●Malfunction Indicator Light on steady — An
emission control system malfunction has
been detected. Check the fuel-filler cap if
the LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in
the vehicle information display. If the fuel-
filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or install
the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
The light should turn off after a few
driving trips. If the light does not turn
off after a few driving trips, have the vehicle
inspected by a NISSAN dealer. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed to the
dealer.
●Malfunction Indicator Light blinking — An
engine misfire has been detected which may
damage the emission control system. To re-
duce or avoid emission control system dam-
age:
– do not drive at speeds above 45 MPH
(72 km/h).
– avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
– avoid steep uphill grades.
– if possible, reduce the amount of cargo
being hauled or towed.
Instruments and controls 2-15
The Malfunction Indicator Light may stop blinking
and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected
by a NISSAN dealer. You do not need to have
your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without hav-
ing the emission control system checked
and repaired as necessary could lead to
poor driveability, reduced fuel economy,
and possible damage to the emission con-
trol system.
Security indicator light
This light blinks when the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.
The blinking security indicator light indicates that
the security systems equipped on the vehicle are
operational.
For additional information, see “Security sys-
tems” later in this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system or
the traction control system is operating, thus
alerting that the vehicle is nearing its traction
limits. The road surface may be slippery.
Turn signal/hazard indicator
lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal
switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned
on.
Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) OFF indicator light
This indicator light comes on when the Vehicle
Dynamic Control off switch is pushed to OFF.
This indicates the Vehicle Dynamic Control has
been turned off.
Push the Vehicle Dynamic Control off switch
again or restart the engine and the system will be
reactivated. See “Vehicle Dynamic Control
(VDC) system” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion of this manual.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control light also comes on
when you push the push-button ignition switch to
the ON position. The light will turn off after about
2 seconds if the system is operational. If the light
stays on or comes on along with the indi-
cator light while you are driving, have the Vehicle
Dynamic Control system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
While the Vehicle Dynamic Control system is
operating, you might feel slight vibration or hear
the system working when starting the vehicle or
accelerating, but this is normal.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS
Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings.
When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it
makes a high pitched scraping sound when the
vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake
pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as
soon as possible if the warning sound is heard.
Key reminder chime
A chime sounds if the driver’s door is opened
while the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
OFF position or placed in the OFF or LOCK
position with the Intelligent Key left in the Intelli-
gent Key port. Make sure the ignition switch is
placed in the LOCK position, and take the Intel-
ligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF posi-
tion, a chime sounds when the driver’s door is
opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off before leav-
ing the vehicle.
2-16 Instruments and controls
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ door buzzer
The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if the
Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when
locking the doors. When the buzzer sounds, be
sure to check both the vehicle and the Intelligent
Key. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
The vehicle information display 䊊
1is located on
the bottom of the speedometer. It displays such
items as:
●Intelligent Key operation information
●some indicators and warnings
●other information
For details about the Intelligent Key, see
“NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE
INFORMATION DISPLAY
Press the button, located on the instru-
ment panel just behind the steering wheel, to
display the following modes:
MPG→MPG/MPH →Time/Miles →Range →
Exterior Temperature →Setting →Warning
WIC1102 LIC1103
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
Instruments and controls 2-17
Fuel economy mode
The fuel economy mode can be selected to dis-
play the instant fuel economy since the last reset.
Average speed mode
The average speed mode can be selected to
display the average miles per gallon and miles per
hour since the last reset.
Time/Miles (km) mode
The time/miles (km) mode can be selected to
show the time and distance driven since the last
reset.
LIC1093 LIC1097 WIC1266
2-18 Instruments and controls
Range mode
The range mode can be selected to give you an
estimation of the distance that can be driven
before refueling. The range is constantly calcu-
lated based on the amount of fuel in the fuel tank
and the actual fuel consumption.
Exterior temperature mode
The exterior temperature mode can be selected
to provide you with the temperature outside of
your vehicle.
Setting mode
The setting mode allows you to set reminders or
preferences for alerts, maintenance intervals or
language displays.
In the setting mode screen press to move
to:
●Alert
●Maintenance
●Options
and press to select the menu.
LIC1095 LIC1096 LIC1541
Instruments and controls 2-19
Alert mode
The alert mode allows you to set alerts notifying
you of time to rest or icy conditions.
The time to rest alert lets you know when you
have been traveling for a long time and may need
a break.
The icy alert notifies you that icy driving condi-
tions may exist.
Reset mode
The reset mode can be selected in any screen
that allows for preferences to be programmed.
Once the screen is selected, you have the option
to reset the selected distances or time to a new
setting.
Maintenance mode
The maintenance mode allows you to set alerts
for the reminding of maintenance intervals for the
following:
●tires
●oil
●filter
●other
Set a desired interval by pushing to high-
light the maintenance field and pressing .
The reset mode will open up and allow you to
enter the desired distance.
LIC1544 LIC1046 LIC1545
2-20 Instruments and controls
For additional information, see “Indicators for
maintenance” later in this section.
Options mode
The LANGUAGE/UNIT screen will appear when
selecting the “Language/Unit” key and
pressing .
Language: English or French
Unit: US — mile, °F, MPG
Metric — km, °C, l/km
You can select the language and unit using
the button and pressing .
The settings are automatically saved when you
exit the menu by pressing the BACK button or
any other mode button.
Warning mode
The warning mode can be selected to view any
warnings that may be present. Once the screen is
selected you have the option of skipping the
warning or viewing it in detail.
Warnings can be present for issues such as an
open door or low fuel. For more information about
potential warnings see “Vehicle information dis-
play warnings and indicators” later in this section.
LIC1546 LIC1098
Instruments and controls 2-21
Indicators for maintenance
1. Engine oil replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for changing the engine
oil. You can set or reset the distance for
changing the engine oil. See “Maintenance
mode” earlier in this section.
2. Oil filter replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for replacing the oil filter.
You can set or reset the distance for replac-
ing the oil filter. See “Maintenance mode”
earlier in this section.
3. Tire replacement indicator
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for replacing tires. You
can set or reset the distance for replacing
tires. See “Maintenance mode” earlier in this
section.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a
substitute for regular tire checks, includ-
ing tire pressure checks. See “Changing
Wheels and Tires” in “Maintenance & Do-
It-Yourself” section. Many factors includ-
ing tire inflation, alignment, driving habits
and road conditions affect tire wear and
when tires should be replaced. Setting the
tire replacement indicator for a certain
driving distance does not mean your tires
will last that long. Use the tire replace-
ment indicator as a guide only and always
perform regular tire checks. Failure to per-
form regular tire checks, including tire
pressure checks could result in tire fail-
ure. Serious vehicle damage could occur
and may lead to a collision, which could
result in serious personal injury or death.
4. “OTHER” indicator
This indicator appears when the customer
set distance comes for checking or replac-
ing maintenance items other than the engine
oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance
items can include such things as air filter or
tire rotation. You can set or reset the dis-
tance for checking or replacing the items.
See “Maintenance mode” earlier in this sec-
tion. For scheduled maintenance items and
intervals, see your “NISSAN Service and
Maintenance Guide.”
LIC2027
2-22 Instruments and controls
Vehicle information display warnings
and indicators
1. Door and trunk open warning
2. Push warning (CVT models)
3. Low fuel warning
4. Low windshield-washer fluid warning
5. No key warning
6. Parking brake warning
7. Shift P warning (CVT models)
8. Engine start operation indicator
(CVT models)
9. Engine start operation indicator
(M/T models)
10. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indicator
LIC2007
Instruments and controls 2-23
11. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indicator
12. NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge
indicator
13. Loose fuel cap warning
14. Check tire pressure warning
Door and trunk open warning
This warning illuminates when a door or the trunk
has been opened when the engine is running.
Push warning (CVT models)
After the Shift P warning illuminates, the Push
warning will illuminate if the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC position when the shift selec-
tor is moved to the P (Park) position.
See “Shift P warning (CVT models)” in this sec-
tion for additional information.
To turn off the Push warning, place the ignition
switch in the ON position and then in the LOCK
position.
Low fuel warning
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the
fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is
convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge
reaches E (Empty). There will be a small re-
serve of fuel in the tank when the fuel
gauge needle reaches E (Empty).
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
This warning illuminates when the windshield-
washer fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-
washer fluid as necessary. See “Windshield-
washer fluid” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
No key warning
This warning illuminates following two condi-
tions:
1. When the ignition switch is pushed and the
Intelligent Key cannot be recognized by the
system. If this warning illuminates, you can-
not start the engine.
Check for the following causes and perform
the assigned remedies:
– The battery of the Intelligent Key carried
with you is discharged completely. Re-
place the battery with a new one.
– The Intelligent Key carried with you is not
registered to the system. Use the regis-
tered Intelligent Key.
– You do not have an Intelligent Key with
you. Carry an Intelligent Key with you.
2. When the door is closed with the Intelligent
Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition
switch is placed in the ACC or ON position.
A chime will also sound.
Parking brake warning
This warning illuminates when the parking brake
is set and the vehicle is driven.
SHIFT P warning (CVT models)
This warning illuminates when the ignition switch
is pushed to stop the engine with the shift selec-
tor in any position except in the P (Park) position.
If this warning illuminates, the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position. Move the shift selec-
tor to the P (Park) position or place the ignition
switch in the ON position.
An inside warning chime will also sound.
If the shift selector is moved to the P (Park)
position, the Push warning will appear. Refer to
“Push warning (CVT models)” in this section.
For additional information about Intelligent Key,
see “NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ” in the “Pre-
driving checks and adjustments” section.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Engine start operation indicator (CVT
models)
This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch
is placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the push-button ignition switch with the
brake pedal depressed.
Engine start operation indicator (M/T
models)
This indicator illuminates when the ignition switch
is placed in the LOCK, OFF, ACC or ON position
with the shift selector in neutral and the parking
brake on.
This indicator means that the engine will start by
pushing the ignition switch with the clutch and
the brake pedal depressed.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ insertion indica-
tor
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
needs to be inserted into the Intelligent Key port.
(For example, the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.)
If this indicator illuminates, insert the Intelligent
Key into the Intelligent Key port in the correct
direction. See “Push-button ignition switch” in
the “Starting and driving” section.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ removal indica-
tor
This indicator illuminates when the driver’s door
is opened with the ignition switch placed in the
OFF position and the Intelligent Key placed in the
Intelligent Key port. A key reminder chime also
sounds.
If this indicator illuminates, remove the Intelligent
Key from the Intelligent Key port and take it with
you when leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery dis-
charge indicator
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key
battery is running out of power.
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery
with a new one. See “NISSAN Intelligent Key™” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section.
Loose fuel cap warning
This warning appears when the fuel-filler cap is
not tightened correctly after the vehicle has been
refueled. See “Fuel-filler cap” in the “Pre-driving
checks and adjustments” section.
Check tire pressure warning
This warning appears when the low tire pressure
warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire
pressure is detected. If this warning appears,
stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on
the Tire and Loading Information label. See “Low
tire pressure warning light” earlier in this section
and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
in the “Starting and driving” section.
Instruments and controls 2-25
Your vehicle may have two types of security sys-
tems:
●Vehicle security system
●NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and
audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors
or trunk lid when the system is armed. It is not,
however, a motion detection type system that
activates when a vehicle is moved or when a
vibration occurs.
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot
prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or
exterior vehicle components in all situations. Al-
ways secure your vehicle even if parking for a
brief period. Never leave your Intelligent Key in
the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when
unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and
park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.
Many devices offering additional protection, such
as component locks, identification markers, and
tracking systems, are available at auto supply
stores and specialty shops. Your NISSAN dealer
may also offer such equipment. Check with your
insurance company to see if you may be eligible
for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security
system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be
armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors, hood and trunk. Lock all
doors. The doors can be locked with the
Intelligent Key, door handle request switch
(if so equipped), power door lock switch or
mechanical key.
4. Confirm that the security indicator light
comes on. The security light stays on for
about 30 seconds. The vehicle security sys-
tem is now pre-armed. After about 30 sec-
onds the vehicle security system automati-
cally shifts into the armed phase. The
security light begins to flash once every 3
seconds. If, during the 30-second pre-arm
time period, the driver’s door is unlocked by
the key or the keyfob, or the ignition switch is
placed in the ACC or ON position, the sys-
tem will not arm.
●Even when the driver and/or passen-
gers are in the vehicle, the system will
activate with all the doors, hood and
trunk lid locked with the ignition
switch placed in the LOCK position.
When placing the ignition switch in the
ACC or ON position, the system will be
released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following
alarm:
●The headlights blink and the horn sounds
intermittently.
●The alarm automatically turns off after ap-
proximately 50 seconds. However, the alarm
reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with
again. The alarm can be shut off by unlocking
the driver’s door or trunk lid with the key, or
by pressing the button on the Intelli-
gent Key.
LIC0301
SECURITY SYSTEMS
2-26 Instruments and controls
The alarm is activated by:
●opening the door or trunk lid without using
the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is
unlocked by releasing the door inside lock
switch).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking the driver’s
door or the trunk lid with the key, pressing
the button on the Intelligent Key, or press-
ing the request switch (if so equipped) on the
driver’s or passenger’s door with the Intelligent
Key in range of the door handle.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not
allow the engine to start without the use of a
registered key.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Statement related to Section 15 of FCC
Rules for NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-
tem
This device complies with part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the follow-
ing two conditions;
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and (2) this device must accept
any interference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired opera-
tion of the device.
CHANGES OR MODIFICATIONS NOT EX-
PRESSLY APPROVED BY THE PARTY RE-
SPONSIBLE FOR COMPLIANCE COULD
VOID THE USER’S AUTHORITY TO OPER-
ATE THE EQUIPMENT.
Security indicator light
The security indicator light blinks whenever the
ignition switch is placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC
position. This function indicates the NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System is operational.
If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is mal-
functioning, the light will remain on while the
ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
If the light still remains on and/or the en-
gine will not start, see a NISSAN dealer for
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-
vice as soon as possible. Please bring all
registered keys that you have when visiting
your NISSAN dealer for service.
LIC0474
Instruments and controls 2-27
SWITCH OPERATION
The windshield wiper and washer switch oper-
ates when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the
following speed:
䊊
1Intermittent — intermittent operation can be
adjusted by turning the switch toward 䊊
A
(Slower) or 䊊
B(Faster). Also, for vehicles
equipped with speed dependent wipers, the
intermittent operation speed varies in accor-
dance with the vehicle speed. (For example,
when the vehicle speed is high, the intermit-
tent operation speed will be faster.)
䊊
2Low — continuous low speed operation
䊊
3High — continuous high speed operation
Push the lever up 䊊
4to have one sweep opera-
tion of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you 䊊
5to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solu-
tion may freeze on the windshield and
obscure your vision which may lead to an
accident. Warm the windshield with the
defroster before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
●Do not operate the washer continu-
ously for more than 30 seconds.
●Do not operate the washer if the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir is
empty.
●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
cohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir.
●Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-
centrates with water to the manufactur-
er’s recommended levels before pour-
ing the fluid into the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir. Do not use the
windshield-washer fluid reservoir to
mix the washer fluid concentrate and
water.
LIC1061
WINDSHIELD WIPER AND WASHER
SWITCH
2-28 Instruments and controls
To defrost the rear window glass and outside
mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and
push the rear window defroster switch on. The
rear window defroster indicator light on the
switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn
the defroster off.
The rear window defroster automatically turns off
after approximately 15 minutes.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or dam-
age the rear window defroster.
NOTE:
The top and bottom few rows of wires on
the rear window are not part of the rear
window defroster system. These wires
make up the antenna for the audio system.
XENON HEADLIGHTS (if so
equipped)
WARNING
ᏘHIGH VOLTAGE
●When xenon headlights are on, they
produce a high voltage. To prevent an
electric shock, never attempt to modify
or disassemble. Always have your xe-
non headlights replaced at a NISSAN
dealer.
●Xenon headlights provide considerably
more light than conventional head-
lights. If they are not correctly aimed,
they might temporarily blind an oncom-
ing driver or the driver ahead of you and
cause a serious accident. If headlights
are not aimed correctly, immediately
take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer
and have the headlights adjusted
correctly.
When the xenon headlight is initially turned on, its
brightness or color varies slightly. However, the
color and brightness will soon stabilize.
Type A
LIC2030
Type B
WIC1460
REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE
MIRROR (if so equipped)
DEFROSTER SWITCH
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL
SWITCH
Instruments and controls 2-29
●The life of xenon headlights will be
shortened by frequent on-off opera-
tion. It is generally desirable not to turn
off the headlights for short intervals
(for example, when the vehicle stops at
a traffic signal). Even when the daytime
running lights are active (Canada only),
the xenon headlights do not turn on.
This way the life of the xenon head-
lights is not reduced.
●If the xenon headlight bulb is close to
burning out, the brightness will drasti-
cally decrease, the light will start blink-
ing, or the color of the light will be-
come reddish. If one or more of the
above signs appear, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
Type A
LIC1085
Type B
LIC1064
2-30 Instruments and controls
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
䊊
1When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the front parking, tail, license plate and
instrument panel lights come on.
䊊
2When turning the switch to the posi-
tion, the headlights come on and all the other
lights remain on.
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running
to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to be
set so they turn on and off automatically. The
autolight system can:
●Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail,
license plate and instrument panel lights au-
tomatically when it is dark.
●Turn off all the lights when it is light.
●Keep all the lights on for 45 seconds after
you place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and all doors are closed.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO posi-
tion 䊊
1.
2. Push the push-button ignition switch to the
ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the
headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and a door is opened and left open, the
headlights remain ON for 5 minutes. If another
door is opened during the 5 minutes, then the 5
minute timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the switch to
the OFF, ,or position.
Type C
LIC1063 LIC1086
Instruments and controls 2-31
Be sure you do not put anything on top of
the autolight sensor located on the top side
of the instrument panel. The autolight sen-
sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,
the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark
out and the headlights will illuminate. If
this occurs while parked with the engine
off and the ignition switch placed in the ON
position, your vehicle’s battery could be-
come discharged.
Headlight beam select
䊊
1To select the high beam function, push the
lever forward. The high beam lights come on
and the light illuminates.
䊊
2Pull the lever back to select the low beam.
䊊
3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes the
headlight high beams on and off.
Battery saver system
If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position
while the headlight switch is in the
or position, the headlights will turn off after
5 minutes.
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature au-
tomatically turns off the headlights after a
period of time, you should turn the head-
light switch to the OFF position when the
engine is not running to avoid discharging
the vehicle battery.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHT SYSTEM
(Canada only)
The headlights automatically illuminate at a re-
duced intensity when the engine is started with
the parking brake released. The daytime running
lights operate with the headlight switch in the
OFF position or in the position. Turn the
headlight switch to the position for full
illumination when driving at night.
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is
started, the daytime running lights do not illumi-
nate. The daytime running lights illuminate when
the parking brake is released. The daytime run-
ning lights will remain on until the ignition switch
is placed in the OFF position.
LIC1068 LIC1087
2-32 Instruments and controls
WARNING
When the daytime running light system is
active, tail lights on your vehicle are not
on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your
headlights. Failure to do so could cause
an accident injuring yourself and others.
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS
CONTROL
The instrument cluster illuminates when the igni-
tion switch is placed in the ON position.
The instrument brightness control operates when
the headlight control switch is in the
AUTO, or position.
Turn the control left or right to adjust the bright-
ness of the instrument panel lights when driving
at night.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
Turn signal
䊊
1Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is com-
pleted, the turn signals cancel automatically.
Lane change signal
䊊
2To signal a lane change, move the lever up or
down to the point where the indicator light
begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
LIC1066 LIC1088
Instruments and controls 2-33
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight switch
to the position, then turn the fog light
switch to the position.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight switch
in the AUTO position (if so equipped), the head-
lights must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
the position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light switch
to the OFF position.
The headlights must be on and the low beams
selected for the fog lights to operate. The fog
lights automatically turn off when the high beam
headlights are selected.
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when
you must stop or park under emergency condi-
tions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
●If stopping for an emergency, be sure to
move the vehicle well off the road.
●Do not use the hazard warning flashers
while moving on the highway unless
unusual circumstances force you to
drive so slowly that your vehicle might
become a hazard to other traffic.
●Turn signals do not work when the haz-
ard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch
placed in any position.
Some state laws may prohibit the use of
the hazard warning flasher switch while
driving.
LIC1089 LIC0394
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
SWITCH
2-34 Instruments and controls
To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so
could affect proper operation of the
supplemental front air bag system. Tam-
pering with the supplemental front air bag
system may result in serious personal
injury.
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Start the engine.
2. Push the low or high position of the switch,
as desired, depending on the temperature.
The indicator light in the switch will illumi-
nate.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat,
automatically turning the heater on and off.
The indicator light will remain on as long as
the switch is on.
3. When the seat is warmed or before you
leave the vehicle, be sure to turn the switch
off.
CAUTION
●Do not use the seat heater for extended
periods or when no one is using the
seat.
●Do not put anything on the seat which
insulates heat, such as a blanket, cush-
ion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat
may become overheated.
●Do not place anything hard or heavy on
the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar
object. This may result in damage to the
heater.
●Any liquid spilled on the heated seat
should be removed immediately with a
dry cloth.
●When cleaning the seat, never use
gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any simi-
lar materials.
●If any abnormalities are found or the
heated seat does not operate, turn the
switch off and have the system checked
by your NISSAN dealer.
●The battery could run down if the seat
heater is operated while the engine is
not running.
LIC1069 LIC1543
HORN HEATED SEAT (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-35
The vehicle should be driven with the Vehicle
Dynamic Control (VDC) system on for most driv-
ing conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC
system reduces the engine output to reduce
wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced
even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If
maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck
vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC OFF
switch. The indicator will come on.
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the
engine to turn on the system. See “Vehicle Dy-
namic Control (VDC) system”in the “Starting and
driving” section.
The power outlets are for powering electrical
accessories such as cellular telephones. They
are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum. The
console outlet is powered directly by the vehi-
cle’s battery.
CAUTION
●The outlet and plug may be hot during
or immediately after use.
●Only certain power outlets are designed
for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do
not use any other power outlet for an
accessory lighter. See your NISSAN
dealer for additional information.
●Do not use with accessories that ex-
ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more
than one electrical accessory.
●Use power outlets with the engine run-
ning to avoid discharging the vehicle
battery.
●Avoid using power outlets when the air
conditioner, headlights or rear window
defroster is on.
●Before inserting or disconnecting a
plug, be sure the electrical accessory
being used is turned OFF.
●Push the plug in as far as it will go. If
good contact is not made, the plug may
overheat or the internal temperature
fuse may open.
●When not in use, be sure to close the
cap. Do not allow water or any other
liquids to contact the outlet.
LIC1548
Instrument panel
LIC1070
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
OFF SWITCH
POWER OUTLET
2-36 Instruments and controls
Open the lower half of the console box to access
the power outlet. Refer to “Console box” in this
section.
MAP POCKETS SEATBACK POCKETS (if so
equipped)
The seatback pockets are located on the back of
the driver’s and passenger’s seats. The pockets
can be used to store maps.
Console box
WIC1262 LIC1073 LIC0016
STORAGE
Instruments and controls 2-37
STORAGE POUCH (if so equipped)
A storage pouch is located on the front of the
driver’s and passenger’s seats.
WARNING
Do not store angular, sharp, heavy objects
or objects that cannot fully fit inside the
pouch because they might increase the
likelihood of an injury in a crash.
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push and release.
Only store one pair of sunglasses in the holder.
WARNING
Keep the sunglasses holder closed while
driving to prevent an accident.
CAUTION
●Do not use for anything other than
sunglasses.
●Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-
glasses holder while parking in direct
sunlight. The heat may damage the
sunglasses.
LIC1242 WIC1551
2-38 Instruments and controls
Front - Type A
LIC1075
Front - Type B
LIC1105
Rear (sedan)
WRS0167
Instruments and controls 2-39
CUP HOLDERS
To open the front cup holders, push the cup
holder lid. To close, lower the cup holder lid and
push down until it clicks in place.
The plastic insert (if so equipped) may be re-
moved to accommodate a larger cup size or for
cleaning.
The rear center cup holders are located in the
rear fold-down armrest (sedan) or in the rear arm
rest (coupe).
CAUTION
●Avoid abrupt starting and braking when
the cup holder is being used to prevent
spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it
can scald you or your passenger.
●Use only soft cups in the cup holder.
Hard objects can injure you in an
accident.
Soft bottle holder
CAUTION
●Do not use bottle holder for any other
objects that could be thrown about in
the vehicle and possibly injure people
during sudden braking or an accident.
●Do not use bottle holder for open liquid
containers.
Rear (coupe)
LIC1219
Soft bottle holder
WIC1216
2-40 Instruments and controls
GLOVE BOX
Open the glove box by pulling the handle. Use the
master key when locking 䊊
1or unlocking 䊊
2the
glove box.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to
help prevent injury in an accident or a
sudden stop.
CONSOLE BOX
Upper half
Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the
upper half of the console box. The mat (if so
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.
The upper half of the console box may be used for
storage of cellular phones. An access hole is
provided at the front of the upper half of the
console box for phone cord routing to the power
outlet.
Lower half
Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to open the
lower half of the console box. A power outlet is
located inside the console box. The mat (if so
equipped) may be removed for cleaning.
WIC1076 WIC1120 WIC1121
Instruments and controls 2-41
STORAGE BOX (if so equipped) COVERED STORAGE BOX
Push the center of the lid to open.
GROCERY HOOKS
The grocery hooks are located in the trunk and
can be used to hang a standard size plastic
grocery bag.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 20
lbs (9 kg) to a single grocery hook.
LIC1477 LIC1597 LIC0748
2-42 Instruments and controls
CARGO NET (if so equipped)
WARNING
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or
straps to help prevent it from sliding or
shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, un-
secured cargo could cause personal
injury.
The cargo net helps keep packages in the cargo
area from moving around while the vehicle is in
motion.
To install the cargo net, attach the net to the
retainers.
To remove the cargo net, detach the net from the
cargo net retainers.
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
●Make sure that all passengers have
their hands, etc. inside the vehicle while
it is in motion and before closing the
windows. Use the window lock switch
to prevent unexpected use of the power
windows.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls and become
trapped in a window. Unattended chil-
dren could become involved in serious
accidents.
The power windows operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position, or for about
45 seconds after the ignition switch is placed in
the OFF position. If the driver’s or passenger’s
door is opened during this period of about 45
seconds, power to the windows is canceled.
WIC1264 LIC0802
WINDOWS
Instruments and controls 2-43
1. Window lock button
2. Power door lock switch
3. Front passenger side (automatic switch,
if so equipped)
4. Right rear passenger side (sedan only)
5. Left rear passenger side (sedan only)
6. Driver side automatic switch
Driver’s side power window switch
The driver’s side control panel is equipped with
switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the first
detent and continue to hold down until the de-
sired window position is reached. To close a
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold down until the desired window
position is reached.
Front passenger’s power window
switch
The passenger’s window switch operates only
the corresponding passenger’s window. To open
the window, push the switch to the first detent
and continue to hold it down until the desired
window position is reached 䊊
1. To close the
window, pull the switch to the first detent and
continue to hold it up until the desired window
position is reached 䊊
2.
WIC1124 WIC1265
2-44 Instruments and controls
Rear power window switch (sedan
only)
The rear power window switches open or close
only the corresponding windows. To open the
window, push the switch and hold it down 䊊
1.To
close the window, pull the switch up 䊊
2.
Locking passengers’ windows
When the window lock button is depressed, only
the driver’s side window can be opened or
closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock
function.
Automatic operation
To fully open a window equipped with automatic
operation, press the window switch down (only
driver’s side shown) to the second detent and
release it; it need not be held. The window auto-
matically opens all the way. To stop the window,
lift the switch up while the window is opening.
To fully close a window equipped with automatic
operation, pull the switch up to the second detent
and release it; it need not be held. To stop the
window, press the switch down while the window
is closing.
Auto-reverse function
If the control unit detects something caught in the
window as it is closing, the window will be imme-
diately lowered.
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the window is closed by automatic operation
when the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position or for 45 seconds after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the window oc-
curs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the window.
LIC0718 LIC0410
Instruments and controls 2-45
When power window switch does not
operate
If the power window automatic function (closing
only) does not operate properly, perform the fol-
lowing procedure to initialize the power window
system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway by
operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to
close the window, and then hold the switch
more than 3 seconds after the window is
closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate
the window by the automatic function to
confirm the initialization is complete. The
power window automatically opens or
closes depending on if the automatic down
or up function is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other
windows.
If the power window function does not operate
properly after performing the above procedure,
see a NISSAN dealer for assistance.
AUTOMATIC MOONROOF
The moonroof will only operate when the ignition
switch is placed in the ON position. The auto-
matic moonroof is operational for about 45 sec-
onds, even if the ignition switch is placed in the
ACC or OFF position. If the driver’s door or the
front passenger’s door is opened during this
period of about 45 seconds, power to the moon-
roof is canceled.
Sliding the moonroof
To fully open the moonroof, push the switch
toward 䊊
1.
To fully close the moonroof, push the switch
toward 䊊
2.
To open or close the moonroof part way, push the
switch in any direction while the moonroof is
sliding to stop it in the desired position.
Tilting the moonroof
Close the moonroof by pushing the switch
toward 䊊
2. Release the switch, then push
the switch toward 䊊
2again to tilt the
moonroof up.
To tilt the moonroof down, push the switch
toward 䊊
1.
WARNING
●In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
●Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
WIC1559
MOONROOF (if so equipped)
2-46 Instruments and controls
CAUTION
●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
●Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Resetting the moonroof switch
The moonroof switch may not operate properly
and need to be reset if any of the following
conditions have occurred:
●the moonroof has been manually moved,
●the moonroof motor has been removed and
reinstalled after the moonroof has been re-
positioned or adjusted,
●the moonroof glass panel has been adjusted
or changed, or
●the electrical supply interrupted and/or
some malfunction has been detected.
Use the following reset procedure to return the
moonroof operation to normal.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Push and hold the moonroof switch
toward 䊊
2. Once the moonroof has
reached the full tilt position, release the
switch. Push and hold the switch toward
the 䊊
2position again. After a delay of
four seconds, the moonroof will make a small
movement and backup.
3. Release the switch.
4. Within 5 seconds of releasing the switch,
push and continuously hold the switch
toward 䊊
2. The moonroof will move
from the tilt position to the open position and
back to the close position.
NOTE:
If the switch is released at any time during
Step 4, the procedure must be restarted.
5. Release the switch. Do not place the ignition
switch in the OFF position for at least 2
seconds. The moonroof is now reset.
If the moonroof still does not operate properly,
have the moonroof system checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
Auto-reverse function (when closing or
tilting down the moonroof)
The auto-reverse function can be activated when
the moonroof is closed or tilted down by auto-
matic operation when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position or for about 45 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Depending on the environment or driving
conditions, the auto-reverse function may
be activated if an impact or load similar to
something being caught in the moonroof
occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immedi-
ately before the closed position which
cannot be detected. Make sure that all
passengers have their hands, etc., inside
the vehicle before closing the moonroof.
When closing:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it moves to the front, the moonroof
will immediately open backward.
When tilting down:
If the control unit detects something caught in the
moonroof as it tilts down, the moonroof will im-
mediately tilt up.
If the auto-reverse function malfunctions and re-
peats opening or tilting up the moonroof, keep
pushing the tilt down switch within 5 seconds
after it happens; the moonroof will fully close
gradually. Make sure nothing is caught in the
moonroof.
Instruments and controls 2-47
WARNING
●In an accident you could be thrown from
the vehicle through an open moonroof.
Always use seat belts and child
restraints.
●Do not allow anyone to stand up or
extend any portion of their body out of
the moonroof opening while the vehicle
is in motion or while the moonroof is
closing.
CAUTION
●Remove water drops, snow, ice or sand
from the moonroof before opening.
●Do not place heavy objects on the
moonroof or surrounding area.
Sunshade
Open and close the sunshade by sliding it for-
ward or backward.
If the moonroof does not close
Have your NISSAN dealer check and repair the
moonroof.
Type A
WIC1550
Type B
WIC1267
2-48 Instruments and controls
The interior light has a three-position switch and
operates regardless of ignition switch position.
●When the switch is in the ON position 䊊
1,
the interior light illuminates, regardless of
door position. The light will go off after 15
minutes unless the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position.
●When the switch is in the center DOOR
position 䊊
2, the front and rear personal
lights will illuminate when the driver’s door is
opened. Lights remain on for a maximum of
30 seconds after driver’s door is closed.
The lights will go off when the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, or the driver’s door is
closed and locked.
The lights will also go off after 15 minutes when
the doors are open.
●When the switch is in the OFF position 䊊
3,
the interior light does not illuminate, regard-
less of door position.
NOTE:
The doorstep lights illuminate when the
driver and passenger doors are opened re-
gardless of the interior light switch posi-
tion. These lights will turn off automatically
after 15 minutes while doors are open to
prevent the battery from becoming dis-
charged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
INTERIOR LIGHT
Instruments and controls 2-49
CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)
The console light will turn on whenever the park-
ing lights or headlights are illuminated.
The console light brightness can be adjusted
with the instrument brightness control.
To turn the rear personal lights on, press the
switch. To turn them off, press the switch again.
To turn the map lights on, press the light lens. To
turn them off, press the lens again.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time
with the engine stopped. This could result
in a discharged battery.
WIC1476
Rear personal lights (sedan only)
LIC1083
Front map lights
WIC1494
PERSONAL LIGHTS MAP LIGHTS
2-50 Instruments and controls
The light illuminates when the trunk lid is opened.
When the trunk lid is closed, the light goes off.
The light will go off after about 15 minutes if the
trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position.
For bulb replacement procedures, refer to “Exte-
rior and interior lights” in the “Maintenance and
do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
The HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver provides a
convenient way to consolidate the functions of up
to three individual hand-held transmitters into
one built-in device.
HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver:
●Will operate most Radio Frequency (RF)
devices such as garage doors, gates, home
and office lighting, entry door locks and se-
curity systems.
●Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No
separate batteries are required. If the vehi-
cle’s battery is discharged or is discon-
nected, HomeLink姞will retain all program-
ming.
Once the HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver
is programmed, retain the original trans-
mitter for future programming procedures
(Example: new vehicle purchases). Upon
sale of the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver buttons
should be erased for security purposes. For
additional information, refer to “Program-
ming HomeLink姞” later in this section.
WARNING
●Do not use the HomeLink姞Universal
Transceiver with any garage door
opener that lacks safety stop and re-
verse features as required by federal
safety standards. (These standards be-
came effective for opener models
manufactured after April 1, 1982). A ga-
rage door opener which cannot detect
an object in the path of a closing garage
door and then automatically stop and
reverse, does not meet current federal
safety standards. Using a garage door
opener without these features in-
creases the risk of serious injury or
death.
●During the programming procedure
your garage door or security gate will
open and close (if the transmitter is
within range). Make sure that people or
objects are clear of the garage door,
gate, etc. that you are programming.
●Your vehicle’s engine should be turned
off while programming the HomeLink姞
Universal Transceiver.
TRUNK LIGHT HOMELINK姞UNIVERSAL
TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-51
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK姞
1. To begin, press and hold the two outer
HomeLink姞buttons (to clear the memory)
until the indicator light 䊊
1blinks (after 20
seconds). Release both buttons.
2. Position the end of the hand-held transmitter
1 - 3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink姞surface.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously press and
hold both the HomeLink姞button you want to
program and the hand-held transmitter but-
ton.
DO NOT release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed.
4. Hold down both buttons until the indicator
light on the HomeLink姞flashes, changing
from a “slow blink” to a “rapidly flashing
blink”. This could take up to 90 seconds.
When the indicator light flashes rapidly, both
buttons may be released. The rapidly flash-
ing light indicates successful programming.
To activate the garage door or other pro-
grammed device, press and hold the pro-
grammed HomeLink姞button — releasing
when the device begins to activate.
5. If the indicator light on the HomeLink姞blinks
rapidly for 2 seconds and then turns solid,
HomeLink姞has picked up a “rolling code”
garage door opener signal. You will need to
proceed with the next steps to train the
HomeLink姞to complete the programming
which may require a ladder and another per-
son for convenience.
6. Press and release the “smart” or “learn” pro-
gram button located on the garage door
opener’s motor to activate the “training
mode”. This button is usually located near
the antenna wire that hangs down from the
motor. If the wire originates from under a
light lens, you will need to remove the lens to
access the program button.
NOTE:
Once you have pressed and released the
program button on the garage door open-
er’s motor and the “training light” is lit, you
have 30 seconds in which to perform step 7.
Use the help of a second person for conve-
nience to assist when performing this step.
WIC0986 WIC0987
2-52 Instruments and controls
7. Within 30 seconds of pressing and releas-
ing the garage door opener’s program but-
ton, quickly and firmly press and release the
HomeLink姞button you’ve just programmed.
Press and release the HomeLink姞button up
to 3 times to complete the training.
8. Your HomeLink姞button should now be pro-
grammed. (To program the remaining
HomeLink姞buttons for additional door or
gate openers, follow steps 2-4 only.)
NOTE:
Do not repeat step 1 unless you want to
“clear” all previously programmed
HomeLink姞buttons.
If you have any questions or are having difficulty
programming your HomeLink姞buttons, refer to
the HomeLink姞web site at: www.homelink.com
or call 1-800-355-3515.
PROGRAMMING HOMELINK姞FOR
CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
Prior to 1992, D.O.C. regulations required hand-
held transmitters to stop transmitting after 2 sec-
onds. To program your hand-held transmitter to
HomeLink姞, continue to press and hold the
HomeLink姞button (see steps2-4under “Pro-
gramming HomeLink姞”) while you press and re-
press (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitters every
2 seconds until the indicator light flashes rapidly
(indicating successful programming).
NOTE:
When programming a garage door opener,
etc., it is advised to unplug the device dur-
ing the “cycling” process to prevent pos-
sible damage to the garage door opener
components.
OPERATING THE HOMELINK姞
UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER
The HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver (once pro-
grammed) may now be used to activate the ga-
rage door, etc. To operate, simply press the ap-
propriate programmed HomeLink姞Universal
Transceiver button. The red indicator light will
illuminate while the signal is being transmitted.
PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-
DIAGNOSIS
If the HomeLink姞does not quickly learn the hand-
held transmitter information:
●replace the hand-held transmitter batteries
with new batteries.
●position the hand-held transmitter with its
battery area facing away from the
HomeLink姞surface.
●press and hold both the HomeLink姞and
hand-held transmitter buttons without inter-
ruption.
●position the hand-held transmitter 1 - 3
inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the
HomeLink姞surface. Hold the transmitter in
that position for up to 15 seconds. If
HomeLink姞is not programmed within that
time, try holding the transmitter in another
position – keeping the indicator light in view
at all times.
If you continue to have programming difficulties,
please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs
Department. The phone numbers are located in
the Foreword of this manual.
CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED
INFORMATION
Individual buttons cannot be cleared. However,
to clear all programming, press and hold the two
outside buttons and release when the indicator
light begins to flash (approximately 20 seconds).
Instruments and controls 2-53
ROLLING CODE PROGRAMMING
Rolling code garage door openers (or other roll-
ing code devices) which are “code protected”
and manufactured after 1996, may be deter-
mined by the following:
●Reference the garage door opener Owner’s
Manual for verification.
●The hand-held transmitter appears to pro-
gram the HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver
but does not activate the garage door.
●Press and hold the trained HomeLink姞but-
ton. If the garage door opener has the rolling
code feature, the HomeLink姞indicator light
will flash rapidly, then remain on after 2 sec-
onds.
To program the HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver
to a garage door opener with the rolling code
feature, follow these instructions after completing
the “Programming HomeLink姞” (the aid of a sec-
ond person may make the following procedures
quicker and easier).
1. Locate the training button on the garage
door opener motor unit. Exact location and
color of the button may vary by garage door
opener brand. If there is difficulty locating
the training button, reference the garage
door opener Owner’s Manual.
2. Press the training button on the garage door
opener motor unit (which may activate a
training light).
NOTE:
Following step 2, there are 30 seconds in
which to initiate step 3.
3. Firmly press and release the programmed
HomeLink姞button a second time to com-
plete the training process. (Some garage
door openers may require you to do this
procedure a third time to complete the train-
ing.)
The garage door opener should now recognize
the HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver and acti-
vate when the HomeLink姞button is pressed. The
remaining two buttons may now be programmed
(if not yet programmed, follow steps 2 through 4
in the “Programming HomeLink姞” procedures
earlier in this section).
REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE
HOMELINK姞BUTTON
To reprogram a HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver
button, complete the following.
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink姞but-
ton. Do not release the button until step 4
has been completed.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash
slowly (after 20 seconds), position the
hand-held transmitter1-3inches (26 - 76
mm) away from the HomeLink姞surface.
3. Press and hold the hand-held transmitter
button.
4. The HomeLink姞indicator light will flash, first
slowly and then rapidly. When the indicator
light begins to flash rapidly, release both
buttons.
The HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver button has
now been reprogrammed. The new device can
be activated by pushing the HomeLink姞button
that was just programmed. This procedure will
not affect any other programmed HomeLink姞
buttons.
IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN
If your vehicle is stolen, you should change the
codes of any non-rolling code device that has
been programmed into HomeLink姞. Consult the
Owner’s Manual of each device or call the manu-
facturer or dealer of those devices for additional
information.
When your vehicle is recovered, you will
need to reprogram the HomeLink姞Univer-
sal Transceiver with your new transmitter
information.
2-54 Instruments and controls
FCC Notice:
This device complies with FCC rules part 15
and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Opera-
tion is subject to the following two condi-
tions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
terference and (2) This device must accept
any interference that may be received, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
This transmitter has been tested and com-
plies with FCC and DOC/MDC rules.
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
DOC: ISTC 1763K1313
FCC I.D. CV2V67690
Instruments and controls 2-55
MEMO
2-56 Instruments and controls
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys.............................................3-2
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ........................3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys .........3-3
Doors ............................................3-4
Locking with key................................3-4
Locking with inside lock knob . ...................3-5
Locking with power door lock switch .............3-5
Automatic door locks . . .........................3-5
Child safety rear door lock (Sedan only)...........3-6
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ With Door and Trunk
Request Switches .................................3-6
Operating range................................3-8
Door locks/unlocks precaution ...................3-9
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ operation ...............3-9
How to use the remote keyless entry
function ......................................3-12
Warning signals ...............................3-15
Troubleshooting guide .........................3-16
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ Without Door and Trunk
Request Switches ................................3-17
Operating range...............................3-18
How to use the remote keyless entry
function ......................................3-18
Warning signals ...............................3-21
Troubleshooting guide .........................3-22
Hood ...........................................3-23
Trunk lid .........................................3-23
Opener operation..............................3-23
Interior trunk lid release ........................3-24
Fuel-filler door ...................................3-25
Opener operation..............................3-25
Fuel-filler cap .................................3-25
Tilt/telescopic steering ............................3-28
Tilt operation..................................3-28
Telescopic operation...........................3-28
Sun visors .......................................3-28
Vanity mirrors (if so equipped)...................3-29
Mirrors ..........................................3-29
Rearview mirror (if so equipped).................3-29
Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror
(if so equipped) ...............................3-30
Outside mirrors ...............................3-31
1. Two Intelligent Keys
2. Mechanical keys (inside Intelligent
Keys)
3. Key number plate
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent
Key which are registered to your vehicle’s Intelli-
gent Key components and NISSAN Vehicle Im-
mobilizer System components.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be regis-
tered and used with one vehicle. The new keys
must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to
use with the Intelligent Key and NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System of your vehicle. Since the
registration process requires erasing all memory
in the Intelligent Key components when register-
ing new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys
that you have to the NISSAN dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys.
Record the key number and keep it in a safe place
(such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose
your keys, see a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by
using the key number. NISSAN does not record
key numbers so it is very important to keep track
of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have
lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate
from. If you still have a key, your NISSAN dealer
can duplicate it.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
●Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
●Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
WPD0363
KEYS
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Mechanical key
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock
knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into
the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to
the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the
doors, trunk lid, glove box and rear seatback lock.
See “Doors” and “Trunk lid” in this section, “Stor-
age” in the “Instruments and controls” section,
“Seats” in the “Safety — Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section, and “Up-
per tether anchor/key cylinder covers” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed
in the Intelligent Key slot.
Valet hand-off
When you have to leave a key with a valet, give
them the Intelligent Key itself and keep the me-
chanical key with you to protect your belongings.
To prevent the glove box and the trunk from being
opened during valet hand-off, follow the proce-
dures below:
1. Push the trunk cancel switch to the OFF
position.
2. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
3. Lock the glove box and the rear seats with
the mechanical key.
4. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet and
keep the mechanical key with you.
See “Trunk lid” in this section, “Storage” in the
“Instruments and controls” section and “Seats” in
the “Safety — seats, seat belts and supplemental
restraint system” section.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the master
keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
The master key can be used for all the locks.
Never leave these keys in the vehicle.
Additional or replacement keys:
If you still have a key, the key number is not
necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle
Immobilizer System keys. Your dealer can dupli-
cate your existing key. This is because the regis-
tration process will erase the memory of all key
codes previously registered into the NISSAN Ve-
hicle Immobilizer System.
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which
contains an electrical transponder, to come into
contact with salt water. This could affect system
function.
SPA1951
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
When the doors are locked using one of the
following methods, the doors can not be opened
using the inside or outside door handles. The
doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
●Always have the doors locked while
driving. Along with the use of seat belts,
this provides greater safety in the event
of an accident by helping to prevent
persons from being thrown from the
vehicle. This also helps keep children
and others from unintentionally open-
ing the doors, and will help keep out
intruders.
●Before opening any door, always look
for and avoid oncoming traffic.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
LOCKING WITH KEY
The power door lock system allows you to lock or
unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front 䊊
1of the vehicle
locks all doors.
Turning the key one time toward the rear 䊊
2of the
vehicle unlocks that door. From that position,
returning the key to neutral 䊊
3(where the key can
only be removed and inserted) and turning it
toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks
all doors 䊊
4.
Opening and closing windows (if so
equipped)
The driver’s door key operation allows you to
open and close windows equipped with auto-
matic operation at the same time.
●To open the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the rear of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is unlocked.
●To close the windows, turn the driver’s door
key toward the front of the vehicle for longer
than 1 second after the door is locked.
Windows stop when the key cylinder is released.
Driver’s side
WPD0444
DOORS
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK
KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the inside
lock knob to the lock position 䊊
1, then close the
door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the unlock position 䊊
2.
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR
LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door
lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s side) to
the lock position 䊊
1. When locking the door this
way, be certain not to leave the key inside the
vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the
door lock switch (driver’s or front passenger’s
side) to the unlock position 䊊
2.
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver’s or
front passenger’s side) is moved to the lock
position with the Intelligent Key in the port and
any door open, all doors will lock and unlock
automatically. With the Intelligent Key left in the
vehicle (not in the Intelligent Key port) and any
door open, all doors will unlock automatically and
a chime will sound after the door is closed.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
●All doors lock automatically when the vehicle
speed reaches 15 MPH (24 km/h).
●All doors unlock automatically when the ig-
nition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The automatic unlock function can be de-
activated or activated. To deactivate or acti-
vate the automatic door unlock system, perform
the following procedure:
1. Close all doors.
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. Within 20 seconds of performing Step 2,
push and hold the power door lock switch to
the position (UNLOCK) for more than
5 seconds.
Inside lock
WPD0291
Door lock switch
WPD0381
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
4. When activated, the hazard indicator will
flash twice. When deactivated, the hazard
indicator will flash once.
5. The ignition switch must be placed in the
OFF and ON position again between each
setting change.
When the automatic door unlock system is deac-
tivated, the doors do not unlock when the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. To unlock
the door manually, use the inside lock knob or the
power door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-
ger’s side).
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
(Sedan only)
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors
from being opened accidentally, especially when
small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the
edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊
1, the
door can be opened from the outside or the
inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊
2,
the door can be opened only from the out-
side.
WARNING
●Radio waves could adversely affect
electric medical equipment. Those who
use a pacemaker should contact the
electric medical equipment manufac-
turer for the possible influences before
use.
●The Intelligent Key transmits radio
waves when the buttons are pressed.
The FAA advises the radio waves may
affect aircraft navigation and communi-
cation systems. Do not operate the In-
telligent Key while on an airplane. Make
sure the buttons are not operated unin-
tentionally when the unit is stored for a
flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks
using the remote controller function or pushing
the request switch on the vehicle without taking
the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating
environment and/or conditions may affect the
Intelligent Key operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key.
LIC0716
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™ WITH
DOOR AND TRUNK REQUEST
SWITCHES
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following
operating conditions:
●When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
●When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
●When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal com-
puter.
●When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-
charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-
gent Key port to start the engine. Replace the
discharged battery with a new one as soon as
possible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-
nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
tery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a bat-
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
●Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
●Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range from the request switch 䊊
1.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.50 in (80 cm)
from each request switch 䊊
1.
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass,
handle or rear bumper, the request switches may
not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating
range, it is possible for anyone, even someone
who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the
request switch to lock/unlock the doors.
Coupe shown Sedan similar
WPD0465
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS
PRECAUTION
●Do not push the door handle request switch
with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as
illustrated. The close distance to the door
handle will cause the Intelligent Key system
to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelli-
gent Key is outside the vehicle.
●After locking with the door handle request
switch, verify the doors are securely locked
by testing them.
●To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left
inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the
Intelligent Key with you and then lock the
doors.
●Do not pull the door handle before pushing
the door handle request switch. The door
will be unlocked but will not open. Release
the door handle once and pull it again to
open the door.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking
the key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you
can lock or unlock all doors by pushing the door
handle request switch within the range of opera-
tion.
WPD0375
Coupe shown, Sedan similar
WPD0432
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
Locking doors
1. Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion, place the ignition switch in the LOCK
position and make sure you carry the Intelli-
gent Key with you.
2. Close all doors.
3. Push any door handle request switch 䊊
1
while carrying the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the trunk will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the outside buzzer sounds twice.
NOTE:
●Doors lock with the door handle request
switch while the ignition switch is not in the
LOCK position.
●Doors do not lock by pushing the door
handle request switch while any door is
open. However, doors lock with the me-
chanical key even if any door is open.
●Doors do not lock with the door handle
request switch with the Intelligent Key inside
the vehicle and a beep sounds to warn you.
However, when an Intelligent Key is inside
the vehicle, doors can be locked with an-
other Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
●After locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure that the doors
have been securely locked by operating
the door handle or the trunk opener
switch.
●When locking the doors using the re-
quest switch, make sure to have the
Intelligent Key in your possession be-
fore operating the request switch to
prevent the Intelligent Key from being
left in the vehicle.
●The request switch is operational only
when the Intelligent Key has been de-
tected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection
is equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When the driver’s side door is open, the doors
are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put
inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed;
the lock will automatically unlock and the door
buzzer sounds.
Coupe shown, Sedan similar
WPD0433 WPD0369
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelli-
gent Key is in the same hand that is oper-
ating the request switch to lock the door.
Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or
your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function
under the following conditions:
●When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the instrument panel.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed on
top of the rear parcel shelf.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the glove box or a storage bin.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side the door pockets.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed on or
under the spare tire area.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed in-
side or near metallic materials.
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
2. Push the door handle request switch 䊊
1.
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the
outside buzzer sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch 䊊
1
again within 5 seconds to unlock all doors.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the
doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning
the door handle to its original position will unlock
the door. If the door does not unlock after return-
ing the door handle, push the door handle re-
quest switch to unlock the door.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pushing the request switch.
●Opening any door.
●Pushing the ignition switch.
Coupe shown, Sedan similar
WPD0432 WPD0369
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
The interior light timer illuminates for 30 seconds
when a door is unlocked and the room light
switch is in the DOOR position.
The interior light can be turned off without waiting
for 30 seconds by performing one of the follow-
ing operations.
●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
●Locking the doors with the remote controller.
●Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
Opening the trunk lid
1. Push the trunk opener request switch 䊊
Afor
more than 1 second while carrying the Intel-
ligent Key with you.
2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will sound 4
times.
3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being acci-
dentally locked in the trunk, lockout protection is
equipped with the Intelligent Key.
When all doors are locked and the trunk lid is
closed with the Intelligent Key inside the trunk,
the outside buzzer will sound and the trunk will
open.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not func-
tion under the following conditions:
●When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
●When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
LPD0478
3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.
Unlocking doors
1. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the button again within 5 sec-
onds to unlock all doors.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pressing the button:
●Opening any doors.
●Pushing the ignition switch.
WPD0359 WPD0360
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in
the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting for 15
seconds by performing one of the following op-
erations:
●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
●Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
●Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
Opening windows (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key allows you to open windows
equipped with automatic operation simultane-
ously.
●To open the windows, press the but-
ton on the Intelligent Key longer than 3
seconds after all doors are unlocked.
The door windows will open while pressing
the button on the Intelligent Key.
The door windows cannot be closed by
using the Intelligent Key.
Releasing the trunk lid
Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel
switch” in this section.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
by pressing and holding the button on the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The panic alarm stops when:
●It has run for 25 seconds, or
●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
●Pushing the request switch on the driver or
passenger door with the Intelligent Key in
range of the door handle.
WPD0364 WPD0361
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
Intelligent Key.
See the “Troubleshooting guide” that follows and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
WPD0362
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the ignition switch to stop
the engine
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-
play and the inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position.
Shift the shift selector to the P (Park)
position.
When opening the driver’s door to get out
of the vehicle The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC
position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key
port. Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-
gent Key port.
When closing the door after getting out of
the vehicle
The NO KEY warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times
and the inside warning chime sounds for
approximately 3 seconds.
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC or
ON position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-
play and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is placed in the ACC
position and the shift selector is not in the P
(Park) position.
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion and place the ignition switch in the
OFF position.
The shift “P” warning light appears on the
display and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position and the shift selector is not in the P
(Park) position.
Move the shift selector to the P (Park)
position.
When closing the door with the inside lock
knob placed in the LOCK position The outside chime sounds for approximately
3 seconds and all the doors unlock. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When pushing the door handle request
switch to lock the door The outside chime sounds for approximately
2 seconds.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
A door is not closed securely. Close the door securely.
The door handle request switch is pushed
before the door is closed. Push the door handle request switch after
the door is closed.
When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for approximately
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens. The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
●
Radio waves could adversely affect elec-
tric medical equipment. Those who use a
pacemaker should contact the electric
medical equipment manufacturer for the
possible influences before use.
●
The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves
when the buttons are pressed. The FAA
advises the radio waves may affect air-
craft navigation and communication sys-
tems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key
while on an airplane. Make sure the but-
tons are not operated unintentionally
when the unit is stored for a flight.
The Intelligent Key can operate all the door locks
using the remote controller function. The operat-
ing environment and/or conditions may affect the
Intelligent Key operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the
Intelligent Key.
CAUTION
●Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with
you when operating the vehicle.
●Never leave the Intelligent Key in the
vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is always communicating with
the vehicle as it receives radio waves. The Intel-
ligent Key transmits weak radio waves. Environ-
mental conditions may interfere with the opera-
tion of the Intelligent Key under the following
operating conditions:
●When operating near a location where
strong radio waves are transmitted, such as
a TV tower, power station and broadcasting
station.
●When in possession of wireless equipment,
such as a cellular telephone, transceiver,
and CB radio.
●When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or
covered by metallic materials.
●When any type of radio wave remote control
is used nearby.
●When the Intelligent Key is placed near an
electric appliance such as a personal com-
puter.
●When the vehicle is parked near a parking
meter.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions
before using the Intelligent Key function or use
the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending
on the operating conditions, the battery’s life is
approximately 2 years. If the battery is dis-
charged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost dis-
charged, insert the Intelligent Key into the Intelli-
gent Key port to start the engine. Replace the
discharged battery with a new one as soon as
possible. For more details, see “Push-button ig-
nition switch” in the “Starting and driving” sec-
tion.
Since the Intelligent Key is continuously receiving
radio waves, if the key is left near equipment
which transmits strong radio waves, such as sig-
nals from a TV and personal computer, the bat-
tery life may become shorter.
For information regarding replacement of a bat-
tery, see “Battery replacement” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section.
As many as 4 Intelligent Keys can be registered
and used with one vehicle. For information about
the purchase and use of additional Intelligent
Keys, contact a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
WITHOUT DOOR AND TRUNK
REQUEST SWITCHES
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occur-
rences which will damage the Intelligent
Key:
●Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which
contains electrical components, to
come into contact with water or salt
water. This could affect the system
function.
●Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
●Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply
against another object.
●Do not change or modify the Intelligent
Key.
●Wetting may damage the Intelligent
Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-
mediately wipe until it is completely dry.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key for an
extended period in an area where tem-
peratures exceed 140°F (60°C).
●Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a
key holder that contains a magnet.
●Do not place the Intelligent Key near
equipment that produces a magnetic
field, such as a TV, audio equipment and
personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN
recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelli-
gent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the
unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate
the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing
procedure, contact a NISSAN dealer.
OPERATING RANGE
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used
when the Intelligent Key is within the specified
operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or
strong radio waves are present near the operat-
ing location, the Intelligent Key system’s operat-
ing range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent
Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 33 ft (10 m) of the
vehicle.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE
KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all
door locks using the remote keyless function of
the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function
can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away
from the vehicle. The operating distance de-
pends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not func-
tion under the following conditions:
●When the Intelligent Key is not within the
operational range.
●When the doors or the trunk are open or not
closed securely.
●When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-
charged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure not to leave the key in
the vehicle.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Locking doors
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion.
2. Close all doors.
3. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and
the horn beeps once.
5. All doors will be locked.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelli-
gent Key, be sure that the doors have been
securely locked by operating the door
handles.
Unlocking doors
1. Press the button on the Intelligent
Key.
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the button again within 5 sec-
onds to unlock all doors.
All doors will be locked automatically unless one
of the following operations is performed within 1
minute after pressing the button:
●Opening any doors.
●Pushing the ignition switch.
WPD0359 WPD0360
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
The interior light illuminates for 15 seconds when
a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in
the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting for 15
seconds by performing one of the following op-
erations:
●Placing the ignition switch in the ON posi-
tion.
●Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
●Switching the room light switch to the OFF
position.
Releasing the trunk lid
Press the button for longer than 0.5 sec-
onds to open the trunk lid. The trunk release
button will not operate when the ignition switch is
in the ON position or when the trunk cancel
switch is in the OFF position. See “Cancel
switch” in this section.
Using the panic alarm
If you are near your vehicle and feel threatened,
you may activate the panic alarm to call attention
by pressing and holding the button on the
Intelligent Key for longer than 0.5 seconds.
The panic alarm and headlights will stay on for 25
seconds.
The panic alarm stops when:
●It has run for 25 seconds, or
●Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
WPD0364 WPD0361
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Silencing the horn beep feature
If desired, the horn beep feature can be deacti-
vated using the Intelligent Key.
To deactivate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds.
The hazard warning lights will flash 3 times to
confirm that the horn beep feature has been
deactivated.
To activate: Press and hold the
and buttons for at least 2 seconds
once more.
The hazard warning lights will flash once and the
horn will sound once to confirm that the horn
beep feature has been reactivated.
Deactivating the horn beep feature does not si-
lence the horn if the alarm is triggered.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unex-
pectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent
Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being
stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and
outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in
the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is
displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the
Intelligent Key.
See the “Troubleshooting guide” that follows and
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section of this manual.
WPD0362
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are
programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent
Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle
system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom Possible Cause Remedy
When pushing the ignition switch to stop
the engine
The SHIFT P warning appears on the dis-
play and the inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The shift selector is not in the P position.
Shift the shift selector to the P position.
When opening the driver’s door to get out
of the vehicle
The inside warning chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position. Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The Intelligent Key is in the Intelligent Key
port.
Remove the Intelligent Key from the Intelli-
gent Key port.
When closing the door after getting out of
the vehicle
The NO KEY warning appears on the
display, the outside chime sounds 3 times
and the inside warning chime sounds for
approximately 3 seconds.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position.
The NO KEY warning appears on the dis-
play and the outside chime sounds
continuously.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position
and the shift selector is not in the P (Park)
position.
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion and place the ignition switch in the
OFF position.
When closing the door with the inside lock
knob turned to LOCK
The outside chime sounds for approximately
3 seconds and all the doors unlock.
The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle or
trunk.
Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
When closing the trunk lid The outside chime sounds for approximately
10 seconds and the trunk lid opens. The Intelligent Key is inside the trunk. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
䊊
1Pull the hood lock release handle located
below the driver’s side instrument panel; the
hood springs up slightly.
䊊
2Lift the lever at the front of the hood with your
fingertips and raise the hood.
䊊
3Remove the support rod from the clamp.
䊊
4Insert the support rod into the hole on the
passenger’s side of the hood. 䊊
5
When closing the hood, return the hood rod to its
original position. Lower the hood approximately
12 inches (30 cm) above the latch and release it.
This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.
WARNING
●Make sure the hood is completely
closed and latched before driving. Fail-
ure to do so could cause the hood to fly
open and result in an accident.
●If you see steam or smoke coming from
the engine compartment, to avoid injury
do not open the hood.
OPENER OPERATION
WARNING
●Do not drive with the trunk lid open. This
could allow dangerous exhaust gases
to be drawn into the vehicle. See “Ex-
haust gas” in the “Starting and driving”
section of this manual.
WPD0441 LPD0394
HOOD TRUNK LID
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
To open the trunk lid, push the opener switch
down.
To close the trunk lid, lower and push the trunk lid
down securely.
NOTE:
You can open the trunk lid with the Intelli-
gent Key. Refer to “NISSAN Intelligent
Key™” in this section.
Cancel switch
When the switch, located inside the glove box, is
in the OFF position, the power to the trunk lid will
be cancelled. The trunk can only be opened with
the master key or keyfob.
The trunk lid cannot be opened when:
●using the trunk lid release switch,
●the trunk open request switch (if so
equipped) is pushed, when the Intelligent
Key is in range of the vehicle or
●the HOLD button on the Intelligent Key is
pressed.
INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE
WARNING
Closely supervise children when they are
around cars to prevent them from playing
and becoming locked in the trunk where
they could be seriously injured. Keep the
car locked, with the rear seatback and
trunk lid securely latched when not in use,
and prevent children’s access to car keys.
The interior trunk lid release mechanism provides
a means of escape for children and adults in the
event they become locked inside the trunk.
LPD0395 LPD0396
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
To open the trunk from the inside, pull the illumi-
nated release handle until the lock releases and
push up on the trunk lid. The release handle is
made of a material that glows in the dark after a
brief exposure to ambient light.
The handle is located inside the trunk compart-
ment on the interior of the trunk lid.
OPENER OPERATION
The fuel-filler door release is located on the floor
to the left of the driver’s seat. To open the fuel-
filler door, pull up the release. To lock, close the
fuel-filler door securely.
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
●Gasoline is extremely flammable and
highly explosive under certain condi-
tions. You could be burned or seriously
injured if it is misused or mishandled.
Always stop the engine and do not
smoke or allow open flames or sparks
near the vehicle when refueling.
●Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank
after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off
automatically. Continued refueling may
cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel
spray and possibly a fire.
●Use only an original equipment type
fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a
built-in safety valve needed for proper
operation of the fuel system and emis-
sion control system. An incorrect cap
can result in a serious malfunction and
possible injury. It could also cause
the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) to come on.
●Never pour fuel into the throttle body to
attempt to start your vehicle.
LPD0397
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
●Do not fill a portable fuel container in
the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity
can cause an explosion of flammable
liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or
trailer. To reduce the risk of serious
injury or death when filling portable fuel
containers:
– Always place the container on the
ground when filling.
– Do not use electronic devices when
filling.
– Keep the pump nozzle in contact
with the container while you are fill-
ing it.
– Use only approved portable fuel con-
tainers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
●The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning will ap-
pear if the fuel-filler cap is not properly
tightened. Failure to tighten the fuel-
filler cap properly after the LOOSE
FUEL CAP warning appears may cause
the Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL) to illuminate.
●Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap
properly may cause the Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-
nate. If the light illuminates be-
cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or
missing, tighten or install the cap and
continue to drive the vehicle.
The light should turn off after a
few driving trips. If the light
does not turn off after a few driving
trips, have the vehicle inspected by a
NISSAN dealer.
●For additional information, see the
“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in
the “Instruments and Controls” section
in this manual.
●If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,
flush it away with water to avoid paint
damage.
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to
remove.
2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder 䊊
1
while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-
filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until it
clicks. The fuel-filler cap is a ratcheting type.
Coupe
LPD0448
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Loose Fuel Cap warning
The LOOSE FUEL CAP warning appears in the
vehicle information display when the fuel-filler
cap is not tightened correctly after the vehicle has
been refueled. To turn off the warning, do the
following:
1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as soon
as possible. See “Fuel-filler cap”.
2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.
3. Press the next button 䊊
Aon the in-
strument panel located behind the steering
wheel for about 1 second to turn off the
LOOSE FUEL CAP warning 䊊
Bafter tight-
ening the fuel-filler cap.
Sedan
LPD0449 LRS2006
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
TILT OPERATION
Pull the lever 䊊
1all the way toward you and
adjust the steering wheel up or down 䊊
2to the
desired position. Lock the wheel by releasing the
lever and ensure that the lever has returned to its
original position.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while
driving. You could lose control of your
vehicle and cause an accident.
TELESCOPIC OPERATION
Pull the lever 䊊
1all the way toward you and
adjust the steering wheel forward or backward in
direction 䊊
3, to the desired position. Lock the
wheel by releasing the lever and ensure that the
lever has returned to its original position.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel any
closer to you than is necessary for proper
steering operation and comfort. The driv-
er’s air bag inflates with great force. If you
are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting
sideways or out of position in any way, you
are at greater risk of injury or death in a
crash. You may also receive serious or
fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up
against it when it inflates. Always sit back
against the seatback and as far away as
practical from the steering wheel. Always
use the seat belts.
䊊
1To block glare from the front, swing down the
main sun visor.
䊊
2To block glare from the side, remove the sun
visor from the center mount and swing the
sun visor to the side.
LPD0398
Coupe shown, sedan similar
WPD0435
TILT/TELESCOPIC STEERING SUN VISORS
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
䊊
3Slide the extension sun visor (if so equipped)
in or out as needed.
CAUTION
Do not store the sun visor before returning
the extension to its original position.
VANITY MIRRORS (if so equipped)
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor
down and flip open the mirror cover. Some vanity
mirrors are illuminated and turn on when the
mirror cover is open.
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The night position 䊊
1reduces glare from the
headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position 䊊
2when driving in daylight
hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when neces-
sary, because it reduces rear view clarity.
Coupe shown, sedan similar
LPD0400 WPD0126
MIRRORS
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE
REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)
The inside mirror is designed so that it automati-
cally dims during night time conditions and ac-
cording to the intensity of the headlights of the
vehicle following you. The automatic anti-glare
feature is activated when the ignition switch is in
the ON position.
The indicator light will illuminate when the auto-
matic anti-glare feature is operating.
NOTE:
Do not hang any objects over the sensors
䊊
1or apply glass cleaner to the sensors.
Doing so will reduce the sensitivity of the
sensors, resulting in improper operation. Type A and Type B
The indicator light 䊊
2will illuminate when the
automatic anti-glare feature is operating.
To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature, press:
●the O button for inside mirrors without
compass.
●the button for inside mirrors with
compass.
The indicator light will turn off.
To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature again,
press:
●the | button for inside mirrors without
compass.
●the button for inside mirrors with
compass.
The indicator light will turn on.
For information on HomeLink姞Universal Trans-
ceiver operation, see the “HomeLink姞Universal
Transceiver” in the “Instruments and controls”
section of this manual.
Type A-Without compass
LPD0469
Type B-With compass
LPD0470
3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
For information on the compass display (if so
equipped), see “Compass display” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section of this manual.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
WARNING
●Objects viewed in the outside mirror on
the passenger side are closer than they
appear. Be careful when moving to the
right. Using only this mirror could cause
an accident. Use the inside mirror or
glance over your shoulder to properly
judge distances to other objects.
Electric control type
The outside mirror remote control only operates
when the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON
position.
Rotate the control lever to select the right or left
mirror. Adjust the mirror to the desired position by
moving the control lever.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
Some outside mirrors can be heated to defrost,
defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. For addi-
tional information, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
Manual folding outside mirrors (if so
equipped)
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
LPD0346 WPD0056
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice
recognition systems
Control panel buttons — color screen with
Navigation System (if so equipped) ..................4-2
How to use the touch screen ....................4-3
How to select menus on the screen ..............4-5
How to use the INFO button .....................4-5
How to use the SETTING button .................4-6
button..................................4-12
RearView Monitor (if so equipped)..................4-13
How to read the displayed lines .................4-13
Difference between predicted and actual
distances .....................................4-14
Adjusting the screen ...........................4-16
Operating tips.................................4-17
Vents ...........................................4-18
Heater and air conditioner (manual)
(if so equipped) ..................................4-19
Controls......................................4-19
Heater operation ..............................4-20
Air conditioner operation .......................4-21
Air flow charts.................................4-22
Heater and air conditioner (automatic)
(if so equipped) ..................................4-26
Automatic operation ...........................4-26
Manual operation ..............................4-27
Operating tips.................................4-28
Servicing air conditioner...........................4-28
Audio system (if so equipped)......................4-29
Radio ........................................4-29
FM radio reception ............................4-29
AM radio reception ............................4-29
Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .........4-30
Audio operation precautions ....................4-30
FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD) player
(if so equipped) ...............................4-44
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)
player (if so equipped) .........................4-48
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player
(if so equipped) ...............................4-54
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) Player
Operation (models with Navigation System) ......4-63
USB interface (models without Navigation
System) (if so equipped) .......................4-66
USB interface (models with Navigation
System) ......................................4-68
iPod姞* player operation without Navigation
System (if so equipped) ........................4-72
iPod姞* player operation with Navigation
System (if so equipped) ........................4-74
Music Box姞(if so equipped) ....................4-77
Bluetooth姞streaming audio (if so equipped) ......4-84
CD care and cleaning..........................4-87
Steering wheel switch for audio control
(if so equipped) ...............................4-88
Antenna ......................................4-90
Car phone or CB radio............................4-91
Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System without
Navigation System (if so equipped) .................4-91
Regulatory Information . ........................4-93
Using the system ..............................4-93
Control buttons ...............................4-95
Getting started ................................4-96
List of voice commands ........................4-98
Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode ................4-102
Manual control ...............................4-104
Troubleshooting guide . .......................4-105
Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System (if so equipped) ................4-106
Regulatory Information . .......................4-108
Voice commands .............................4-108
Connecting procedure ........................4-108
Vehicle phonebook ...........................4-110
Handset phonebook ..........................4-112
Making a call.................................4-113
Receiving a call ..............................4-113
During a call .................................4-114
Ending a call .................................4-115
Phone settings ...............................4-115
Bluetooth settings ............................4-116
Call volume ..................................4-117
NISSAN Voice Recognition System
(if so equipped) .................................4-117
NISSAN Voice Recognition Standard Mode .....4-118
Using the system .............................4-121
Before starting ...............................4-121
Giving voice commands .......................4-121
NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate
Command Mode .............................4-129
Using the system .............................4-135
Speaker Adaptation function...................4-138
Troubleshooting guide . . . .....................4-140
WARNING
●Positioning of the heating or air condi-
tioning controls and display controls
should not be done while driving in or-
der that full attention may be given to
the driving operation.
●Do not disassemble or modify this sys-
tem. If you do, it may result in accidents,
fire, or electrical shock.
●Do not use this system if you notice any
abnormality, such as a frozen screen or
lack of sound. Continued use of the
system may result in accident, fire or
electric shock.
●In case you notice any foreign object in
the system hardware, spill liquid on it,
or notice smoke or smell coming from
it, stop using the system immediately
and contact your nearest NISSAN
dealer. Ignoring such conditions may
lead to accidents, fire or electrical
shock.
1. Display screen
2. MAP button*
3. DEST button*
4. ROUTE button*
5. INFO button (P. 4-5)
6. SETTING button (P. 4-6)
7. Volume control knob
8. (brightness control) button
LHA1400
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS —
COLOR SCREEN WITH NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
*For Navigation system control buttons, refer to
the separate Navigation System Owner’s
Manual.
When you use this system, make sure the engine
is running.
If you use the system with the engine not
running (ignition ON or ACC) for a long
time, it will discharge the battery, and the
engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
“Example” — Words marked in quotes refer to a
key shown only on the display. These keys can be
selected by touching the screen.
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH
SCREEN
CAUTION
●The glass screen on the liquid crystal
display may break if it is hit with a hard
or sharp object. If the glass breaks, do
not touch the liquid crystalline material,
which contains a small amount of mer-
cury. Doing so could result in an injury.
In case of contact with skin, wash im-
mediately with soap and water.
●To clean the display, never use a rough
cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any
kind of solvent or paper towel with a
chemical cleaning agent. They will
scratch or deteriorate the panel.
●Do not splash any liquid such as water
or car fragrance on the display. Contact
with liquid will cause the system to
malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions can-
not be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available
while driving will be “grayed out” or muted.
Park the vehicle in a safe location and then oper-
ate the navigation system.
WARNING
●ALWAYS give your full attention to
driving.
●Avoid using vehicle features that could
distract you. If distracted, you could
lose control of your vehicle and cause
an accident.
Touch screen operation
Selecting the item:
Touch an item to select. To select the “Naviga-
tion” key, touch the “Navigation” key 䊊
1on the
screen. Touch the “BACK” key 䊊
2to return to the
previous screen.
LHA1227
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
Adjusting the item:
Touch the “+” key 䊊
1or the “⫺” key 䊊
2to adjust
the settings of an item.
Touch the up arrow 䊊
3to scroll up the page one
item at a time, or touch the double up arrow 䊊
4to
scroll up an entire page.
Touch the down arrow 䊊
5to scroll down the
page one item at a time, or touch the double
down arrow 䊊
6to scroll down an entire page.
Inputting characters:
Touch the letter or number key 䊊
1.
There are some options available when inputting
characters.
●Uppercase:
Shows uppercase characters.
●Lowercase:
Shows lowercase characters.
●Space:
Inserts a space.
●Delete:
Deletes the last inputted character with one
touch. Touch and hold the “Delete” key to
delete all of the characters.
●OK:
Completes the character input.
Touch screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft
cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a
small amount of neutral detergent with a soft
cloth. Never spray the screen with water or de-
tergent. Dampen the cloth first, and then wipe the
screen.
LHA1228 LHA1230
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
HOW TO SELECT MENUS ON THE
SCREEN
Vehicle functions are viewed on the center dis-
play screen in menus. Whenever a menu selec-
tion is made or menu item is highlighted, different
areas on the screen provide you with important
information. See the following for details.
1. Header:
Shows the path used to get to the current
screen (for example, press the SETTING
button > then select the “Comfort” key).
2. Menu Selections:
Shows the options to choose within that
menu screen (for example, Auto Interior Illu-
mination, etc.).
3. Up/Down Movement Indicator:
Shows that the arrows on the touch screen
may be used to move up or down on the
screen and select more options.
4. Screen Count:
Shows the number of menu selections avail-
able for the current menu, even if they are on
multiple pages (for example, 1/7).
5. Footer/Information Line:
Provides more information (if available)
about the menu selection currently high-
lighted (for example, Cabin lighting when
unlocking doors).
HOW TO USE THE INFO BUTTON
Press the INFO button; the display screen shows
vehicle and navigation information for your con-
venience.
Where am I?
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Traffic Info
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
WHA1401 LHA1402
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Weather Info
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Map Update
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
Navigation Version
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding this item.
GPS Position
For GPS Position, refer to the separate Naviga-
tion System Owner’s Manual.
Voice Recognition settings
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition system” in this section.
HOW TO USE THE SETTING
BUTTON
When the SETTING button is pressed, the Set-
tings screen will appear on the display. You can
select and/or adjust several functions, features
and modes that are available for your vehicle.
LHA1236 LHA1237
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Display settings
Select the “Display” key. On the screen above,
select the “Display Adjustment” key. The Display
Adjustment screen will appear.
Brightness/contrast:
Select the “Brightness” key or the “Contrast” key
to adjust the brightness or contrast of the display
background. Touch the “+” or “-” key to adjust the
brightness to darker or brighter and the contrast
to lower or higher.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by selecting the
“Back” key or any other mode button.
Display off:
Select the “Display ON” key. The indicator of the
“Display ON” turns off and the message above
will be displayed briefly. When the audio, HVAC
(Heater and air conditioner), or any mode button
on the control panel is operated, the display turns
on for that operation. If one of the control panel
buttons is pressed, the display will not automati-
cally turn off until that operation is finished. Oth-
erwise, the screen turns off automatically after 5
seconds.
WHA1502 WHA1503 LHA1242
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
To turn the screen on:
●Press the SETTING button and select the
“Display” key and then select the “Display
ON” key, or
●Press the button and the message
“resuming display” will appear and the “Dis-
play ON” key will be automatically turned on
(no amber indicator).
Background color:
Select the “Background Color” key; the display
color changes between day and night.
The new settings are automatically saved when
you exit the setting screen by selecting the
“Back” key or any other mode button. Color theme:
Select the “Display” key, then select the “Color
Theme” key. The Color Theme select screen will
appear.
Select the key for the desired color. The appear-
ance of the background, arrows and bars will
change for all screens accordingly. You can
choose a black, blue or red color theme.
Clock
The following display will appear after pressing
the SETTING button, then selecting the “Clock”
key.
On-screen Clock:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), a clock is always displayed in the upper
right corner of the screen.
This clock will indicate the time almost exactly
because it is always adjusted by the GPS system.
LHA1240 LHA1241
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Clock Format (24h):
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), the clock format will change from the
default 12-hour display to a 24-hour display.
Offset (hour):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
hours.
Offset (minute):
Adjust the time by increasing or decreasing the
minutes.
Daylight Savings Time:
When this item is enabled (indicator light illumi-
nated), daylight savings time is on. To turn off the
daylight savings time, touch the “ON” key; the
amber indicator light will go out.
Time Zone:
Select the “Time Zone” key; the Time Zone
screen will appear.
Select one of the following zones, depending on
the current location, by selecting the correct time
zone key to enable that time zone (indicator light
will illuminate for that location).
●Pacific
●Mountain
●Central
●Eastern
●Atlantic
●Newfoundland
●Hawaii
●Alaska
After selection/settings, select the “Back” key or
any other mode button to accept the changes.
LHA1243
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
Others settings
Select the “Others” key. Comfort settings, lan-
guage and units and Voice Recognition settings
will be displayed.
Comfort settings
Select the “Others” key, then select the “Com-
fort” key. The Comfort settings screen will be
displayed.
You can set the following operating conditions by
selecting the key for the desired item. The indica-
tor light (box at the right of the selected item)
alternately turns on and off each time the item is
touched.
Indicator light is illuminated — ON
Indicator light is not illuminated — OFF
Auto Interior Illumination: Select to turn on or
turn off the illumination of the interior lights when
any door is unlocked.
Light Sensitivity: Select to adjust the sensitivity
of the automatic headlights higher (right) or lower
(left). After selecting the item, touch the “+” or “-”
key to change the setting.
Light Off Delay: Select to change the duration
of the automatic headlight off timer. After select-
ing the item, touch the “+” or “-” key to change
the setting. The available delays are 0, 30, 45, 60,
90, 120, 150 and 180 seconds.
LHA1403 WHA1404 LHA1405
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Speed Sensing Wiper Interval: Select to turn
on or turn off the wiper interval adjusted automati-
cally according to the vehicle speed.
Selective Door Unlock: When this item is
turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked first
after the door unlock operation. When the door
handle request switch on the driver’s or front
passenger’s side door is pushed to be unlocked,
only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All
the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock
operation is performed again within one minute.
When this item is turned to off, all the doors will
be unlocked after the door unlock operation is
performed once.
Intelligent Key Lock / Unlock: Select to turn
on or turn off the door lock/unlock function by
pushing the door handle request switch.
Return All Settings to Default: Select to
change all the comfort and convenience systems
to their default settings.
Language & Units:
Select the “Language & Units” key. Select the key
of the setting you wish to change.
Select Language:
Select the “English” key or the “Français” key to
change the language shown on the display.
If you select the “Français” key, French language
will be displayed, so please use the French Own-
er’s Manual. To obtain a French Owner’s Manual,
please see “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual Or-
der Information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section.
LHA1250 LHA1251
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
Select Units:
Select the “US” (mi, °F, MPG) key or the “Metric”
(km, °C, L/100 km) key to change the units
shown on the display.
Voice Recognition:
For Voice Recognition settings, refer to “NISSAN
Voice Recognition system” in this section.
Navigation settings
Refer to the separate Navigation System Own-
er’s Manual for information regarding these set-
tings.
Audio settings
For audio settings, refer to “Audio System” in this
section.
Phone settings
For phone settings refer to “Bluetooth姞Hands-
Free Phone System with Navigation System” in
this section.
Bluetooth姞settings
For Bluetooth姞phone settings, refer to
“Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System with
Navigation System” in this section.
For Bluetooth姞audio settings, refer to
“Bluetooth姞streaming audio” in this section.
Volume & beeps settings
Navigation volume
For navigation volume settings, refer to the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual for infor-
mation regarding these settings.
Phone volume
For phone volume settings refer to “Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation Sys-
tem” in this section.
Switch beeps
With this option on (indicator light illuminated), a
beep will sound if any control panel button is
pressed.
BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the button. Pressing the button again will
change the display to the day or the
night display.
If no operation is performed within 5 seconds, the
display will return to the previous display.
LHA1252 LHA1253
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Press and hold the button for more than
two seconds to turn the display off. Press the
button again to turn the display on.
When the shift selector is shifted into the R
(Reverse) position, the monitor display shows a
rearward view from the vehicle.
WARNING
●The system is designed as an aid to the
driver in detecting large stationary ob-
jects to help avoid damaging the ve-
hicle. The system will not detect small
objects below the bumper, and may not
detect objects close to the bumper or
on the ground.
●The RearView Monitor is a convenience
but it is not a substitute for proper back-
ing. Always turn and check that it is safe
to do so before backing up. Always
back up slowly.
●Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-
tor differ from actual distance because
a wide-angle lens is used.
●Make sure that the trunk is securely
closed when backing up.
●Do not put anything on the rearview
camera. The rearview camera is in-
stalled beside the license plate light.
●When washing the vehicle with high-
pressure water, be sure not to spray it
around the camera. Otherwise, water
may enter the camera unit causing wa-
ter condensation on the lens, a mal-
function, fire or an electric shock.
●Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-
sion instrument. Otherwise, it may mal-
function or cause damage resulting in a
fire or an electric shock.
CAUTION
There is a plastic cover over the camera.
Do not scratch the cover when cleaning
dirt or snow from the cover.
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED
LINES
Lines which indicate the vehicle clearance and
distances to objects with reference to the bum-
per line 䊊
Aare displayed on the monitor.
LHA1254
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so
equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
They are indicated as reference distances to
objects. The lines and colors in the display indi-
cate distances from the back bumper line 䊊
Ain
the illustration.
䊊
11.5 ft (0.5 m) red
䊊
23 ft (1 m) yellow
䊊
37 ft (2 m) green
䊊
410 ft (3 m) green
The vehicle clearance lines are wider than
the actual clearance.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN
PREDICTED AND ACTUAL
DISTANCES
The distance guide line and the vehicle width
guide line should be used as a reference only
when the vehicle is on a level, paved surface. The
distance viewed on the monitor is for reference
only and may be different than the actual distance
between the vehicle and displayed objects.
LHA0437
WHA1504
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the dis-
tance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown closer than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
place 䊊
A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
the hill is the place 䊊
B. Note that any object on
the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the
distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide
lines are shown farther than the actual distance.
For example, the display shows 3 ft (1.0 m) to the
place 䊊
A, but the actual 3 ft (1.0 m) distance on
the hill is the place 䊊
B. Note that any object on
the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
WHA1505
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position 䊊
Cis shown farther than the position
䊊
Bin the display. However, the position 䊊
Cis
actually at the same distance as the position 䊊
A.
The vehicle may hit the object when backing up to
the position 䊊
Aif the object projects over the
actual backing up course.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
The procedure for adjusting the quality of the
screen differs depending on the type of screen
present on the vehicle.
For vehicles without a touch screen (Type A):
●To adjust the Brightness and Contrast,
press the ENTER button on the audio sys-
tem repeatedly until the desired setting is
displayed. Use the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
adjust the display to the desired level.
WHA1506
Type A
LHA1272
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
●Do not adjust the Brightness or Contrast of
the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is
moving.
For vehicles with a touch screen (Type B):
●To adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Display
ON/OFF and Color of the RearView Moni-
tor, press the SETTING button and then
select the “Display” key with the RearView
Monitor on. When the display adjustment
screen appears, touch the “–” or “+” key on
the desired item and adjust the level.
●Do not adjust the Brightness, Contrast, and
Color of the RearView Monitor while the
vehicle is moving.
OPERATING TIPS
●When the shift selector is shifted to R (Re-
verse), the monitor screen automatically
changes to the RearView Monitor mode.
However, the radio can be heard.
●It may take some time until the RearView
Monitor is displayed after the shift selector
has been shifted to R (Reverse). Objects
may be distorted momentarily until the Rear-
View Monitor screen is displayed com-
pletely. When the shift selector is returned to
a position other than R (Reverse), it may take
some time until the screen changes. Objects
on the screen may be distorted until they are
completely displayed.
●When the temperature is extremely high or
low, the screen may not clearly display ob-
jects. This is not a malfunction.
●When strong light directly enters the cam-
era, objects may not be displayed clearly.
●Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the
screen. This is due to strong reflected light
from the bumper. This is not a malfunction.
●The screen may flicker under fluorescent
light. This is not a malfunction.
●The colors of objects on the RearView Moni-
tor may differ somewhat from those of the
actual object.
●When the contrast of objects is low at night,
pressing the SETTING button or ENTER
button may not change the brightness.
●Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a
dark place or at night.
●If dirt, rain or snow attaches to the camera,
the RearView Monitor may not display ob-
jects. Clean the camera.
●Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to
clean the camera. This will cause discolor-
ation. To clean the camera, wipe with a cloth
dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent
and then wipe with a dry cloth.
●Do not damage the camera as the monitor
screen may be adversely affected.
●Do not use body wax on the camera window.
If body wax does get on the camera window,
wipe off the wax with a clean cloth damp-
ened with mild detergent diluted with water.
Type B
LHA1238
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent
slides.
Open or close the vents by using the dial. Move
the dial toward the to open the vents or
toward the to close them.
Right and Left
WHA0736
Center
WHA0737
Rear (sedan, if so equipped)
WHA0688
VENTS
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WARNING
●The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
●Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
●Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
1. Fan speed control/system OFF dial
2. Air flow control buttons
3. Temperature control dial
4. Air conditioner button
5. Rear window defroster
6. MAX A/C button
7. Front windshield defrost button
8. Air recirculation button
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The fan control dial turns the fan on and off, and
controls fan speed.
Air flow control buttons
The air flow control buttons allow you to select
the air flow outlets.
MAX
A/C
— Air flows from center and side
vents with maximum cooling.
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
WHA1407
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(manual) (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets and
foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust
the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the
temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase
the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
Air recirculation button
On position (Indicator light on):
Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.
Press the button to the on position when:
●driving on a dusty road.
●to prevent traffic fumes from entering pas-
senger compartment.
●for maximum cooling when using the air con-
ditioner.
Off position (Indicator light off):
Outside air is drawn into the passenger compart-
ment and distributed through the selected outlet.
Use the off position for normal heater or air con-
ditioner operation.
Air conditioner button
The button is provided only on vehicles equipped
with an air conditioner.
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position and push the button to
turn on the air conditioner. The indicator light
comes on when the air conditioner is operating.
To turn off the air conditioner, push the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Rear window defroster switch
For more information about the rear window de-
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION
Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot
outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost
outlets and the side vent outlets.
1. Press the button to the OFF position
for normal heating.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and
center ventilators.
1. Press the button to the OFF position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to
defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the defrost/defog button .
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
●To quickly remove ice or fog from the win-
dows, turn the fan control dial to the highest
setting and the temperature control to the
full HOT position.
●When the position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on (the indi-
cator light on the button will come on)
if the outside temperature is more than 36°F
(2°C). This dehumidifies the air which helps
defog the windshield. The mode au-
tomatically turns off, allowing outside air to
be drawn into the passenger compartment
to further improve the defogging perfor-
mance.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side
and center vents and to the front and rear floor
outlets.
1. Press the button to the OFF position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the wind-
shield.
1. Press the air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position between the middle and the
hot position.
●When the position is selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on if the out-
side temperature is more than 36°F (2°C).
The indicator light on the A/C button will
come on. This dehumidifies the air which
helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing out-
side air to be drawn into the passenger
compartment to further improve the defog-
ging performance.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades
and air inlet in front of the windshield. This
improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the fan control dial to the
desired position, and push in the button to
activate the air conditioner. When the air condi-
tioner is on, cooling and dehumidifying functions
are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function oper-
ates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the button to the OFF position.
2. Press MAX A/C or air flow control
button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Push the button. the indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
●For quick cooling when the outside tem-
perature is high, push the button to
the ON position. Be sure to return the
to the OFF position for normal cooling. MAX
A/C may be used for quick cooling.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the button to the OFF position.
2. Press the air flow control button.
3. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
4. Push the button. The indicator light
comes on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and
dehumidify the air.
1. Press the air flow control button.
2. Turn the fan control dial to the desired posi-
tion.
3. Press the button. The indicator light
comes on.
When the or are selected, the air
conditioner automatically turns on (the indicator
light will illuminate) if the outside temperature is
more than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield. The
mode automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compartment to
further improve the defogging performance.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the de-
sired position.
Operating tips
●Keep the windows and moonroof closed
while the air conditioner is in operation.
●After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or 3
minutes with the windows open to vent hot
air from the passenger compartment. Then,
close the windows. This allows the air con-
ditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
●The air conditioning system should be
operated for approximately 10 minutes
at least once a month. This helps pre-
vent damage to the system due to lack
of lubrication.
●A visible mist may be seen coming from the
ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air
is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a
malfunction.
●If the engine coolant temperature
gauge indicates engine coolant tem-
perature over the normal range, turn
the air conditioner off. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of
emergency” section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and dial
positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK heating,
cooling or defrosting. The air recirculation
button should always be in the OFF posi-
tion for heating and defrosting.
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
WHA1408 WHA1409
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
LHA2034 LHA2035
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA2036
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
1. Driver temperature control dial
2. Air flow control buttons
3. Passenger temperature control dial
4. DUAL button
5. Rear defrost button
6. Front window defrost button
7. Fan speed dial/system OFF button
8. Air recirculation button
9. A/C ON/OFF button
10. AUTO button
WARNING
●The air conditioner cooling function op-
erates only when the engine is running.
●Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
●Do not use the recirculation mode for
long periods as it may cause the interior
air to become stale and the windows to
fog up.
Start the engine and operate the controls to
activate the air conditioner.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Cooling or heating (auto)
This mode may be normally used all year round as
the system automatically works to keep a con-
stant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan
speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the driver’s side temperature control
dial to the left or right to set the desired
temperature. Driver and passenger tem-
peratures can be set independently. Press
DUAL or turn the passenger temperature
control dial to the left or right to activate dual
climate control functions. Turn the passen-
ger’s side temperature control dial to the left
or right to set the desired passenger’s tem-
perature.
●Adjust the temperature dial to about 75°F
(24°C) for normal operation.
WHA1171
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER
(automatic) (if so equipped)
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
●The temperature of the passenger compart-
ment will be maintained automatically. Air
flow distribution, fan speed and A/C on/off
are also controlled automatically.
●A visible mist may be seen coming from the
vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is
cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a mal-
function.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Press the defroster control button to
turn the system on. The indicator light in the
button will illuminate.
2. Turn the temperature dial to the left or right
to set the desired temperature.
●To quickly remove ice from the outside of the
windows, turn the manual fan control to HI.
●As soon as possible after the windshield is
clean, press the AUTO button to return to
the auto mode.
●When the control is activated, the air
conditioner will automatically be turned on at
outside temperatures above 36°F (2°C).
This dehumidifies the air which helps defog
the windshield. The air recirculation mode
automatically turns off, allowing outside air
to be drawn into the passenger compart-
ment to further improve the defogging per-
formance.
Rear window defroster switch
For more information about the rear window de-
froster switch, see “Rear window and outside
mirror defroster switch” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
MANUAL OPERATION
Fan speed control
Turn the fan control dial left or right to
manually control the fan speed.
Press the /OFF button to turn the system
off.
Press the AUTO button to return to automatic
control of the fan speed.
Air recirculation
Push the air recirculation button to recir-
culate interior air inside the vehicle. The indicator
light on the switch will come on.
The air recirculation button will not be activated
when the air conditioner is in DEF or mode.
Air flow control
Press the air flow control buttons to manually
control air flow and select the air outlet:
— Air flows from center and side
vents.
— Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets.
— Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
— Air flows from defroster and foot
outlets.
— Air flows from defroster outlets.
To turn system off
Press the /OFF button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
OPERATING TIPS
●When the engine coolant temperature and
outside air temperature are low, the air flow
from the foot outlets may not operate for a
maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is
not a malfunction. After the coolant tempera-
ture warms up, air flow from the foot outlets
will operate normally.
The sunload sensor, located on the top of the
instrument panel on the driver’s side, helps the
system maintain a constant temperature. Do not
put anything on or around this sensor.
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN ve-
hicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with
the environment in mind.
This refrigerant does not harm the earth’s
ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is re-
quired when servicing your NISSAN air condi-
tioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants
will cause severe damage to your air conditioner
system. See “Air conditioner system refrigerant
and oil recommendations” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
A NISSAN dealer is able to service your “environ-
mentally friendly” air conditioning system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
personal injury, any air conditioner ser-
vice should be done only by an experi-
enced technician with proper equipment.
WHA0791
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
RADIO
With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON posi-
tion, press the PWR (power)/VOL (volume) knob
to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with
the engine not running, the ignition should be
placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal
strength, distance from radio transmitter, build-
ings, bridges, mountains and other external influ-
ences. Intermittent changes in reception quality
normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-
hicle may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with
state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance ra-
dio reception. These circuits are designed to
extend reception range, and to enhance the qual-
ity of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics
of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect
radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even
when the finest equipment is used. These char-
acteristics are completely normal in a given re-
ception area and do not indicate any malfunction
in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change be-
cause of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain,
signal distance and interference from other ve-
hicles can work against ideal reception. De-
scribed below are some of the factors that can
affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to come
from the audio system speakers. Storing the de-
vice in a different location may reduce or elimi-
nate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 – 30 mi
(40 – 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM
having slightly more range than stereo FM. Exter-
nal influences may sometimes interfere with FM
station reception even if the FM station is within
25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is
directly related to the distance between the
transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-
of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same char-
acteristics as light. For example, they will reflect
off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from
a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade
and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from
buildings, large hills or due to antenna position
(usually in conjunction with increased distance
from the station transmitter), static or flutter can
be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the
treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective
characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected
signals reach the receiver at the same time. The
signals may cancel each other, resulting in mo-
mentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can
bend around objects and skip along the ground.
In addition, the signals can be bounced off the
ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of
these characteristics, AM signals are also sub-
ject to interference as they travel from transmitter
to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing
through freeway underpasses or in areas with
many tall buildings. It can also occur for several
seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in
areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical
power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
AUDIO SYSTEM (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so
equipped)
When the satellite radio is used for the first time
or the battery has been replaced, the satellite
radio may not work properly. This is not a mal-
function. Wait more than 10 minutes with satellite
radio ON and the vehicle outside of any metal or
large building for satellite radio to receive all of
the necessary data.
No satellite radio reception is available and “NO
SAT” is displayed when the SAT band option is
selected unless optional satellite receiver and
antenna are installed and an XM姞satellite radio
service subscription is active. Satellite radio is
not available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
Satellite radio performance may be affected if
cargo carried on the roof blocks the satellite radio
signal.
If possible, do not put cargo over the satellite
antenna.
A build up of ice on the satellite radio antenna can
affect satellite radio performance. Remove the
ice to restore satellite radio reception. AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
Compact disc (CD) player (models
without Navigation System)
CAUTION
●Do not force a compact disc into the CD
insert slot. This could damage the CD
and/or CD player.
●Only one CD can be loaded into the CD
player at a time.
●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc
or packaging.
●During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the CD
and dehumidify or ventilate the player
completely.
●The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
●The CD player sometimes cannot func-
tion when the compartment tempera-
ture is extremely high or low.
Decrease/increase the temperature
before use.
●Do not expose the CD to direct sun-
light.
LHA0099
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
●CDs that are in poor condition or are
dirty, scratched or covered with finger-
prints may not work properly.
●The following CDs may not work prop-
erly:
●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
●Do not use the following CDs as they
may cause the CD player to malfunc-
tion:
●3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter
●CDs that are not round
●CDs with a paper label
●CDs that are warped, scratched, or
have abnormal edges
●This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs. It has no capability to
record or burn CDs.
●If the CD cannot be played, one of the
following messages will be displayed.
CHECK DISC:
●Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-
rectly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
●Confirm that the CD is not bent or
warped and it is free of scratches.
PRESS EJECT:
This is an error due to excessive tem-
perature inside the player. Remove the
CD by pressing the EJECT button. After
a short time, reinsert the CD. The CD
can be played when the temperature of
the player returns to normal.
UNPLAYABLE:
The file is unplayable in this audio sys-
tem (only MP3 or WMA (if so equipped)
CD).
CD/DVD combination player (models
with Navigation System)
●Do not force a disc into the CD/DVD
insert slot. This could damage the
CD/DVD player.
●During cold weather or rainy days, the
player may malfunction due to the hu-
midity. If this occurs, remove the
CD/DVD and dehumidify or ventilate
the player completely.
●The player may skip while driving on
rough roads.
●The CD/DVD player sometimes cannot
function when the passenger compart-
ment temperature is extremely high.
Decrease the temperature before use.
●Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)
round discs that have the “COMPACT
disc DIGITAL AUDIO” or “DVD Video”
logo on the disc or packaging.
●Do not expose the CD/DVD to direct
sunlight.
●CDs/DVDs that are of poor quality,
dirty, scratched, covered with finger-
prints, or that have pinholes may not
work properly.
●The following CDs/DVDs are not guar-
anteed to play:
●Copy control compact discs (CCCD)
●Recordable compact discs (CD-R)
●Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
●Recordable compact discs (DVD±R,
DVD±R DL)
●Rewritable compact discs
(DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL)
●Do not use the following CDs/DVDs as
they may cause the CD/DVD player to
malfunction.
●3.1 in (8 cm) discs
●CDs/DVDs that are not round
●CDs/DVDs with a paper label
●CDs/DVDs that are warped,
scratched, or have abnormal edges
●This audio system can only play pre-
recorded CDs/DVDs. It has no capa-
bilities to record or burn CDs/DVDs.
●If the CD/DVD cannot be played, one of
the following messages will be dis-
played.
Disc Read Error:
●Confirm that the CD/DVD is inserted
correctly (the label side is facing up,
etc.).
●Confirm that the CD/DVD is not bent
or warped and it is free of scratches.
Please Eject Disc:
This error may be due to the tempera-
ture inside the player getting too high.
Remove the CD/DVD by pushing the
EJECT button, and after a short time
reinsert the CD/DVD. The CD/DVD can
be played when the temperature of the
player returns to normal. If the error
persists, consult your local dealership.
Unplayable File:
●The file may be copy protected.
●The file is not MP3, WMA, AAC, M4A
or DIVX type.
Region Invalid
●The DVD is not for region 1 or all
regions.
●Use DVDs with a region code “1”,
“ALL” or “1 included” for your DVD
entertainment system. (The region
code 䊊
Ais displayed as a small sym-
bol printed on the top of the DVD
䊊
B.) This vehicle-installed DVD
player cannot play DVDs with a re-
gion code other than “1” or “ALL”.
Copyright and trademark
●The technology protected by the U.S.
patent and other intellectual property
rights owned by Macrovision
Corporation and other right holders is
adopted for this system.
LHA0484
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
●This copyright protected technology
cannot be used without a permit from
Macrovision Corporation. It is limited
to personal use, etc., as long as the
permit from Macrovision Corporation
is not issued.
●Modifying or disassembling is prohib-
ited.
●Dolby digital is manufactured under li-
cense from Dolby Laboratories, Inc.
●Dolby and the double D mark “ ”
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories,
Inc.
●DTS and DTS Digital Surround “ ”
are registered trademarks of Digital
Theater Systems, Inc.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) memory (if
so equipped)
This system supports various USB memory
sticks, USB hard drives and iPod姞players. There
are some USB devices which may not be sup-
ported with this system.
●Make sure that the USB device is connected
correctly into the USB connector.
●Do not force the memory stick or USB cable
into the USB connector.
●During cold weather or rainy days, the player
may malfunction due to the humidity. If this
occurs, remove the USB memory stick and
dehumidify or ventilate the player com-
pletely.
●The player sometimes cannot function when
the passenger compartment temperature is
extremely high. Decrease the temperature
before use.
●Do not leave the USB memory in a place
prone to static electricity or where the air
conditioner blows directly. The data in the
USB memory may be damaged.
●Prepare the USB device by yourself be-
cause it is not equipped with the vehicle.
●The USB device cannot be formatted with
this system. If you want to format the USB
memory, use your personal computer.
●Partitioned USB devices may not be played
correctly.
●Some characters used in other languages
(Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed
properly on the vehicle center screen.
NISSAN recommends using English lan-
guage characters with USB devices.
●Do not connect the USB device if the con-
nector or cable is wet. Allow the cable
and/or connectors to dry completely before
connecting the USB device.
●Large video podcast files cause slow re-
sponses in the iPod姞. The vehicle center
display may momentarily black out, but it will
soon recover.
●If the iPod姞automatically selects large video
podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the
vehicle center display may momentarily
black out, but it will soon recover.
●Audiobooks may not play in the same order
as they appear on the iPod姞.
●The iPod姞nano (1st Generation) may re-
main in fast forward or rewind mode if it is
connected during a seek operation. In this
case, please manually reset the iPod姞.
●The iPod姞nano (2nd Generation) will con-
tinue to fast forward or rewind if it is discon-
nected during a seek operation.
●An incorrect song title may appear when the
Play Mode is changed while using the iPod姞
nano (2nd generation).
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
●If you are using an iPod姞(3rd Generation
with Dock connector), do not use very long
names for the song title, album name or artist
name to avoid the iPod姞resetting itself.
iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Bluetooth姞streaming audio (if so
equipped)
●Some Bluetooth姞audio devices may not be
recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
●It is necessary to set up the wireless con-
nection between a compatible Bluetooth姞
audio device and the in-vehicle Bluetooth姞
module before using the Bluetooth姞audio.
●Operating procedure of the Bluetooth姞au-
dio will vary depending on the devices. Make
sure how to operate your audio device be-
fore using it with this system.
●The Bluetooth姞audio may be stopped under
the following conditions:
●Receiving a call on the Hands-Free
Phone System.
●Checking the connection to the hands-
free phone.
●Do not place the Bluetooth姞audio device in
an area surrounded by metal or far away from
the in-vehicle Bluetooth姞module to prevent
tone quality degradation and wireless con-
nection disruption.
●While an audio device is connected through
the Bluetooth姞wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the device may discharge
quicker than usual.
●This system supports the Bluetooth姞Audio
Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH威is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Clarion.
Compact disc (CD) with MP3 or
WMA (models without Navigation
System)
Terms:
●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well-known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track from CD-ROM can reduce the
file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with
virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3
compression removes the redundant and
irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the
human ear doesn’t hear.
●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a
compressed audio format created by Micro-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
●Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, encoding bit
rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag infor-
mation is displayed on the Artist/song title
line on the display.
* Windows姞and Windows Media姞are regis-
tered trademarks and trademarks in the United
States of America and other countries of Micro-
soft Corporation of the USA.
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or WMA
files is as illustrated.
●The names of folders not containing MP3 or
WMA files are not shown in the display.
●If there is a file in the top level of the disc,
“Root Folder” is displayed.
●The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software.
Therefore, the files might not play in the
desired order.
Playback order chart
WHA1078
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
Specification chart:
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW
Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
Supported
versions*1
MP3
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR
WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR
Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05:
UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot play
Check if the disc was inserted correctly.
Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of characters for
folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the disc is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.
Bit rate may be too low.
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts playing.
Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, there
will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
CD, DVD or USB with Compressed
Audio Files (models with Navigation
System)
The file types supported by this system are MP3,
WMA, AAC/M4A and ATRAC3.
Explanation of terms:
●MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures
Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the
most well known compressed digital audio
file format. This format allows for near “CD
quality” sound, but at a fraction of the size of
normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an
audio track can reduce the file size by ap-
proximately 10:1 ratio (Sampling: 44.1 kHz,
Bit rate: 128 kbps) with virtually no percep-
tible loss in quality. The compression re-
duces certain parts of sound that seem in-
audible to most people.
●WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA) is a
compressed audio format created by Micro-
soft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA
codec offers greater file compression than
the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more
digital audio tracks in the same amount of
space when compared to MP3s at the same
level of quality.
●AAC/M4A — Advanced Audio Coding
(AAC) is a lossy audio compression format.
Audio files that have been encoded with
AAC are generally smaller in size and deliver
a higher quality of sound than MP3.
●ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus — Adaptive Trans-
form Acoustic Coding (ATRAC) is a lossy
audio compression format developed by
Sony.
●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital music file.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
●Sampling frequency — Sampling frequency
is the rate at which the samples of a signal
are converted from analog to digital (A/D
conversion) per second.
●Multisession — Multisession is one of the
methods for writing data to media. Writing
data once to the media is called a single
session, and writing more than once is called
a multisession.
●ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the
part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that
contains information about the digital music
file such as song title, artist, album title,
encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc.
ID3 tag information is displayed on the
Album/Artist/Track title line on the display.
* Windows姞, Windows Media姞and Windows
Vista姞are registered trademarks or trademarks
of Microsoft Corporation in the United States of
America and/or other countries.
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Playback order:
Music playback order of a CD, DVD or USB
device with compressed audio files is as illus-
trated.
●The folder names of folders not containing
compressed audio files are not shown in the
display.
●If there is a file in the top level of the
disc/USB, “Root Folder” is displayed.
●The playback order is the order in which the
files were written by the writing software, so
the files might not play in the desired order.
Playback order chart
WHA1374
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
Specification chart:
Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, USB 2.0
Supported file systems
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-ROM, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±R DL, ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista姞operating system-based computer) are not
supported.
UDF Bridge (UDF 1.02 + ISO9660), UDF 1.5, UDF 2.0
* VDF 1.5/VDF 2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB memory: FAT16, FAT32
Supported
versions*1
MP3
Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5
Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
WMA*2 Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9
Sampling frequency 32 kHz - 48 kHz
Bit rate 32 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR*4
AAC Sampling frequency 8 kHz - 96 kHz
Bit rate 16 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR*4
ATRAC Version ATRAC3, ATRAC3 Plus
Tag information (Song title and artist name) ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3, VER 2.4 (MP3 only)
WMA tag (WMA only)
Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)
Text character number limitation 128 characters
Displayable character codes*3 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian),
05: UNICODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF 16 BOM Little Endian), 07: SHIFT-JIS
*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.
*2 Protected WMA files (DRM) cannot be played.
*3 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.
*4 When VBR files are played, the playback time may not be displayed correctly.
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Troubleshooting guide:
Symptom Cause and Countermeasure
Cannot play
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device was inserted correctly.
Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.
If there is a temperature increase error, the player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.
If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and compressed audio files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.
Files with extensions other than “.MP3”, “.WMA”, “.AAC”, “.M4A” or “.AA3” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of charac-
ters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.
Check if the disc or file is generated in an irregular format. This may occur depending on the variation or the setting of the compressed audio file writ-
ing application or other text editing applications.
Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.
Check if the CD/DVD/USB device is protected by copyright.
Poor sound quality Check if the CD/DVD is scratched or dirty.
It takes a relatively long time
before the music starts
playing.
If there are many folders or file levels on the CD/DVD/USB device, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music starts
playing.
Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not match the
specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.
Skipping with high bit rate
files
Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.
Moves immediately to the
next song when playing
If an unsupported compressed audio file has been given a supported extension like “.MP3”, or when play is prohibited by copyright protection, the
player will skip to the next song.
Songs do not play back in
the desired order
The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the desired order.
Random/Shuffle may be active on the audio system or on the USB device.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
Compressed Video Files (models with
Navigation System)
Explanation of terms:
●DivX – DivX refers to the DivX姞codec
owned by Div, Inc. used for a lossy compres-
sion of video based on MPEG-4.
●AVI – AVI stands for Audio Video Interleave.
It is standard file format originated by Micro-
soft Corporation. A .divx encoded file can be
saved into the .avi file format for playback on
this system if it meets the requirements
stated in the table in this section. However,
all .avi files are not playable on this system
since different encodings can be used other
than the DivX姞codec.
●ASF – ASF stands for Advanced Systems
Format. It is file format owned by Microsoft
Corporation. Note: Only .asf files that meet
the requirements stated in the table in this
section can be played.
●Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number of
bits per second used by a digital video files.
The size and quality of a compressed digital
audio file is determined by the bit rate used
when encoding the file.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Requirements for Supporting Video Playback:
Media CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD, DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW DL, USB 2.0 Memory
File Systems
CD, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD,
DVD±R, DVD±RW, DVD±RW
DL
ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Romeo, Joliet, UDF Bridge (UDF1.02+ISO9660), UDF1.5, UDF2.0
* ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.
* Files saved using the Live File System component (on a Windows Vista-based computer) are not supported.
* VDF1.5/VDF2.0 (packet writing) is not supported.
USB Memory FAT16, FAT32
File Types
.divx, .avi Video Codecs DivX3, DivX4, DivX5, DivX6
Audio Codecs MP3, MPEG2.5 Audio Layer3, AC3, LPCM
.asf Video Codec ISO-MPEG4
Audio Codec G.726
Bit Rates .divx, .avi Maximum Average 4 Mbps
Maximum Peak 8 Mbps
Resolution
.divx, .avi Minimum 32 x 32
Maximum 720 x 480
.asf Minimum 32 x 32
Maximum 720 x 576
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
1. SEEK/TRACK button
2. CD insert slot
3. TUNE/FF·REW button
4. CD eject button
5. AUDIO button (BASS, TREBLE, FADE
and BALANCE)
6. CLOCK button
7. AUX IN jack
8. SCAN button
9. RDM/RPT button
10. PWR/VOL control knob
11. AUX button
12. RADIO button
13. CD button
14. DISP button
15. PRESET A·B·C button
16. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
17. pause/mute button
FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT
DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” earlier in this section.
Audio main operation
PWR/VOL control knob
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, then press the PWR/VOL control knob.
If you listen to the radio with the engine not
running, place the ignition in the ACC position.
The mode (radio or CD) that was playing imme-
diately before the system was turned off resumes
playing.
When no CD is loaded, the radio comes on.
Pressing the PWR/VOL control knob again turns
the system off.
Turn the PWR/VOL control knob to the right to
increase volume or to the left to decrease volume.
LHA0728
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
AUDIO button (Bass, Treble, Fade and
Balance)
Press the AUDIO button to change the mode as
follows:
Bass →Treble →Fade →Balance →Beep
ON/OFF →Audio →Bass
To adjust Bass, Treble, Fade and Balance press
the AUDIO button until the desired mode ap-
pears in the display. Press the
TUNE/FF·REW or to adjust Bass
and Treble to the desired level. You can also use
the TUNE/FF·REW button to adjust Fade and
Balance mode. Fade adjusts the sound level be-
tween the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left
speaker.
To turn the Beep sound off or on, press the
AUDIO button until Beep is displayed. Press the
TUNE/FF·REW button or until the
desired mode is displayed. This turns on or turns
off the beep sound when audio buttons are
pressed.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO button repeatedly
until the radio or CD display reappears. Other-
wise, the radio or CD display will automatically
reappear after about 10 seconds.
DISP (display) button:
Pressing the DISP (display) button will show text
about CD information in the audio display.
If the text information is to long to fully be dis-
played on the screen; press and hold the DISP
button for longer than 1.5 seconds to scroll
through the rest of the text.
CD display mode
To change the text displayed while playing a CD
with text, press the DISP button. The DISP button
will allow you to scroll
through CD text as follows: Track number and
Track time →Album title →Song title.
●Track number displays the track number se-
lected on the disc.
●Track time displays the amount of time the
track has played.
●Album title displays the title of the CD being
played.
●Song title displays the title of the selected
CD track.
Clock operation
Pressing the CLOCK button displays the clock
with the radio on or off. Press the CLOCK button
again to turn off the clock display.
Clock set
1. Press and hold the CLOCK button for ap-
proximately 2 seconds.
2. The display will show “H-Seek M-Tune”.
3. Press the SEEK/TRACK button
or to adjust the hours.
4. Press TUNE/FF·REW button
or to adjust the minutes.
5. Press the CLOCK button again to exit the
clock set mode.
The display will return to the regular clock display
after 10 seconds, or you may press the CLOCK
button again to return to the regular clock display.
pause/mute button:
To mute or pause the audio sound, press
the pause/mute button. Press the
button again to resume the audio sound.
FM/AM radio operation
FM/AM band select:
Pressing the RADIO button will change the band
as follows:
AM ←→ FM
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
When the RADIO button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
If a compact disc is playing when the RADIO
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
matically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
The FM stereo indicator, ST, illuminates during
FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast
signal is weak, the radio automatically changes
from stereo to monaural reception.
TUNE/FF·REW (tuning)
button:
Press the TUNE/FF·REW button or
for manual tuning. To move quickly through the
channels, hold the tuning buttons down.
SEEK (tuning) button:
Press the SEEK/TRACK button or
to tune from high to low or low to high frequen-
cies and stop at the next broadcasting station.
SCAN (tuning) button:
Press the SCAN button. SCAN illuminates in the
display window. Scan tuning begins from low to
high frequencies. Scan tuning stops for 5 sec-
onds at each broadcasting station that has suffi-
cient signal strength. When scanning, SCAN
blinks in the display. Pressing the SCAN button
again during this 5 second period stops scan
tuning and the radio remains tuned to that station.
Station memory operations:
18 stations can be set for the FM and AM radio to
the A, B and C preset button in any combination
of AM or FM stations.
1. Press the PRESET A·B·C button to change
between storage banks. The radio displays
the icon A, B or C to indicate which set of
presets are active.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual
TUNE or SEEK tuning. Press and hold any of
the desired station memory buttons (1 – 6)
until a beep sound is heard. (The radio mutes
when the select button is pressed.)
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position, and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio turns
off and the last used compact disc starts to play.
TUNE/FF·REW
(Fast Forward, Rewind)
button:
When the TUNE/FF·REW button or
is pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
compact disc plays at an increased speed while
fast forwarding or rewinding. When the button is
released, the compact disc returns to normal play
speed.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SEEK/TRACK button:
When is pressed while the compact disc
is playing, the next track following the present
one starts to play from the beginning.
Press several times to skip several tracks.
Each time the button is pressed, the CD ad-
vances 1 additional track. The track number ap-
pears in the display window. (When the last track
on the compact disc is skipped, the first track is
played.)
When is pressed, the track being played
returns to the beginning. Press several
times to skip back several tracks. Each time the
button is pressed the CD moves back 1 track.
pause/mute button:
To pause the sound while a CD is playing, press
the pause/mute button. “Pause” is shown
on the display. Press the button again to
resume playing the CD.
RDM/RPT button:
When the RDM/RPT button is pressed while the
compact disc is being played, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
Random Disc ←→ Repeat Track ←→ Normal
Random Disc: The order of the tracks on the disc
will be mixed during play.
Repeat Track: The track that is currently playing
will be repeated.
SCAN (CDs) button:
Press the SCAN button less than 1.5 seconds to
scan all tracks of the current disc for 10 seconds
per track. The SCAN icon is flashed during scan
mode.
The scan mode is canceled once it scans through
all tracks on the disc, or if the SCAN button is
pressed during scan mode.
CD EJECT:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected.
When the button is pressed while the
compact disc is playing, the compact disc will
eject and the system will turn off.
CD IN indicator:
A CD icon indicator appears on the display when
a CD is loaded with the system on.
AUX (Auxiliary) button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or laptop com-
puters.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
when it is plugged into the AUX IN jack.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
1. SCAN button
2. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
3. CD insert slot
4. Display screen
5. iPod MENU button
6. CD eject button
7. SEEK/CATEGORY button
8. SETTING/ENTER button, SCROLL/
TUNE knob
9. AUX IN jack
10. AUX button
11. CD button
12. AM-FM button
13. RPT button
14. VOL/ON-OFF control knob
15. RDM button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the AUX button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XM姞satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH
COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so
equipped)
For all operation precautions, see “Audio opera-
tion precautions” earlier in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode (radio
or CD) that was playing immediately before the
system was turned off.
WHA1475
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sen-
sitive Volume (SSV) for audio. When this feature
is active, the audio volume changes as the driving
speed changes.
Setting control knob (Audio, Display and
Clock):
Press the SETTING button to adjust the audio,
display and clock settings as follows:
Bass →Treble →Fade →Balance →Speed
Sensitive Volume (SSV) (if so equipped) →
Brightness →Contrast →On-screen Clock →
Clock Adjust →Bass
Once the desired setting is displayed on the
screen, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob left or right
to adjust the chosen setting. Press the SETTING
button to move to the next setting or wait approxi-
mately five seconds to exit the setting adjustment
mode.
Audio settings:
Adjust the bass, treble, fade and balance by
selecting the desired setting with the SETTING
button and then adjusting the level with the
SCROLL/TUNE knob. Balance adjusts the
sound between the left and right speakers. Fade
adjusts the sound between the front and rear
speakers.
Speed Sensitive Volume (if so equipped):
To change the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
level from 1 to 5, or to turn the feature off entirely,
choose the Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV) set-
ting with the SETTING button and then adjust the
level with the SCROLL/TUNE knob. Speed Sen-
sitive Volume (SSV) adjusts the volume of the
audio system as the vehicle’s driving speed
changes.
LHA1270 LHA1271
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Display settings:
To adjust the brightness or contrast of the display
screen, press the SETTING button until the cho-
sen setting is displayed. Use the SCROLL/TUNE
knob to adjust the display to the desired level.
On-screen Clock:
The clock is shown in the upper right corner of
the screen. To turn this feature off or to re-enable
the clock display after it has been turned off,
press the SETTING button until the On-screen
Clock mode is displayed. Use the
SCROLL/TUNE knob to toggle the feature on or
off.
Clock adjust:
To adjust the time, perform the following steps:
1. Press the SETTING button repeatedly until
the Clock Adjust mode is displayed on the
screen.
2. The hours will begin blinking. Adjust the
hours by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knob
left or right and press the ENTER button.
3. The minutes will begin blinking. Adjust the
minutes by turning the SCROLL/TUNE knob
left or right and press the ENTER button.
LHA1272 LHA1273 LHA1274
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
iPod姞MENU button
This button can only be used for iPod姞opera-
tions. See “iPod姞player operation without Navi-
gation System” later in this section for details
about the function of this button.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
AM·FM button:
Press the AM·FM button to change the band as
follows:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM
If another audio source is playing when the
AM·FM button is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the last
radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on
the screen during FM stereo reception. When the
stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio auto-
matically changes from stereo to monaural re-
ception.
SAT band select:
Pressing the AUX button will change the band as
follows:
AUX →XM1* →XM2* →AUX (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the AUX button is pressed while the igni-
tion switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed to turn
the radio on.
*When the AUX button is pressed, the satellite
radio mode will be skipped unless an optional
satellite receiver and antenna are installed and an
XM姞satellite radio service subscription is active.
Satellite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the AUX button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
SCROLL/TUNE knob (Tuning):
Turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to the left or right
for manual tuning.
SEEK tuning:
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button
or to tune from low to high or high to low
frequencies and to stop at the next broadcasting
station.
SCAN tuning:
Press the SCAN button to stop at each broad-
casting station for 5 seconds. SCAN will appear
on the screen while the radio is scan tuning.
Pressing the button again during this 5 second
period will stop SCAN tuning and the radio will
remain tuned to that station. If the SCAN button is
not pressed within 5 seconds, SCAN tuning
moves to the next station.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Twelve stations can be set for the FM band (6 for
FM1, 6 for FM2) and six stations can be set for
the AM band.
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the AM·FM select button.
2. Tune to the desired station using manual,
SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press and hold any
of the desired station memory buttons (1 –
6) until a beep sound is heard.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
If the battery cable is disconnected or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and carefully insert the compact disc
into the slot with the label side up. The compact
disc is automatically pulled into the slot and starts
to play.
If the radio is already operating, it automatically
turns off and the compact disc begins to play.
CD button:
When the CD button is pressed with the system
off and the compact disc loaded, the system will
turn on and the compact disc will start to play.
When the CD button is pressed with a compact
disc loaded and the radio playing, the radio will
automatically be turned off and the compact disc
will start to play.
CD/MP3 display mode:
While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain text
may be displayed on the screen if the CD has
been encoded with text information. Depending
on how the MP3/WMA CD is encoded, informa-
tion such as Artist, Song and Folder will be dis-
played.
The track number and the total number of tracks
in the current folder or on the current disc are
displayed on the screen as well. For example, the
first track out of fourteen total is currently playing.
SEEK/CATEGORY
(Reverse or Fast Forward)
button:
Press and hold the SEEK/CATEGORY
button or for 1.5 seconds while the
compact disc is playing to reverse or fast forward
the track being played. The compact disc plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the com-
pact disc returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CATEGORY button:
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the
beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK/CATEGORY button several times
to skip backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CATEGORY button while
a CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CATEGORY
button several times to skip forward sev-
eral tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped, the
first track on the disc is played. If the last track in
a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the first
track of the next folder is played.
LHA1275
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SCROLL/TUNE knob (MP3/WMA CD
only):
If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is play-
ing, turn the SCROLL/TUNE knob to change
folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip back a
folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip ahead a
folder.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 TRK RPT ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 FOLDER RPT →1 TRK RPT →OFF
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-
peated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while a com-
pact disc is playing, the play pattern can be
changed as follows:
CD:
1 DISC RDM ←→ OFF
CD with MP3 or WMA:
1 DISC RDM →1 FOLDER RDM →OFF
1 DISC RDM: all tracks on the disc will be played
randomly.
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the CD is displayed on
the screen unless no pattern is applied.
AUX button:
The AUX IN jack is located on the CD player. The
AUX IN audio input jack accepts any standard
analog audio input such as from a portable cas-
sette tape/CD player, MP3 player or a laptop
computer.
Press the AUX button to play a compatible device
plugged into the AUX IN jack. The AUX button is
also used to switch the audio system to a source
plugged into the USB input jack in the center
console. When a device is plugged into the AUX
IN jack while another device is plugged into the
USB input jack, the AUX button is used to toggle
between the two functions.
For more information about the USB input jack,
see “USB interface” in this section.
EJECT button:
When the button is pressed with a com-
pact disc loaded, the compact disc will eject and
the last source will be played.
When the button is pressed twice with a
compact disc loaded, the compact disc will be
ejected further for easier CD removal. If the disc
is not removed within 20 seconds, the disc will
reload.
Additional features
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models without Navigation System)” in this sec-
tion.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
1. OPEN/TILT button (Screen tilts down to
expose CD/DVD insert slot)
2. Display screen
3. SETTING button
4. AUDIO button/control knob
5. Station select (1 - 6) buttons
6. Seeking button
7. VOL/ON·OFF control knob
8. DISC·AUX button
9. XM button*
10. FM·AM button
11. button
*No satellite radio reception is available
when the XM button is pressed to ac-
cess satellite radio stations unless op-
tional satellite receiver and antenna are
installed and an XM姞satellite radio ser-
vice subscription is active. Satellite ra-
dio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii
and Guam.
FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH CD/DVD
PLAYER (if so equipped)
For all operation precautions, see ⬙Audio opera-
tion precautions⬙in this section.
Audio main operation
VOL/ON·OFF control:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and push the VOL/ON·OFF control knob
while the system is off to call up the mode that
was playing immediately before the system was
turned off.
To turn the system off, press the VOL/ON·OFF
control knob.
Turn the VOL/ON·OFF control knob to adjust the
volume.
LHA1391
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
This vehicle has Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV)
for audio. The audio volume changes as the driv-
ing speed changes.
AUDIO control knob (Bass, Treble, Bal-
ance and Fade):
Press the AUDIO control knob to change the
mode as follows:
Bass →Treble →Balance →Fade
To adjust Bass, Treble, Balance and Fade, press
the AUDIO control knob until the desired mode
appears in the display. Turn the tuning knob to
adjust Bass and Treble to the desired level. You
can also use the tuning knob to adjust Fade and
Balance modes. Fade adjusts the sound level
between the front and rear speakers and Balance
adjusts the sound between the right and left
speakers.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, press the AUDIO control knob re-
peatedly until the radio or CD display reappears.
If the control knob is not pressed for approxi-
mately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will
automatically reappear.
Speed Sensitive Volume (SSV):
To change the SSV mode from OFF to 5, press
the SETTING button. Select the “Audio” key to
display the audio settings screen. Select the “–”
key or “+” key to change the SSV level.
While in this screen you can also adjust the other
audio settings by selecting the corresponding
key.
Once you have adjusted the sound quality to the
desired level, select the “Back” key.
LHA1236 LHA1256
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
Display album cover art:
When an audio source encoded with album
cover art is played, the album cover art can be
displayed on the screen. To toggle this feature on
or off, touch the “Display Album Cover Art” key.
When the feature is activated, the amber indica-
tor next to the word ON will illuminate.
CD, DVD or USB with compressed audio
files
While listening to a CD or compressed audio
files, certain text might be able to be displayed
(when CD encoded with text is being used).
Depending on how the CD or compressed audio
files are encoded, the following text might be
displayed:
●Folder displays the name of the current
folder being accessed.
●File displays the name of the file currently
playing.
●Song displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
song name.
●Album displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
album name.
●Artist displays the ID3 encoded tag of the
artist’s name.
Some of this text might not display while playing a
regular CD.
FM/AM/SAT radio operation
FM/AM band select:
Pressing the FM·AM button will change the band
as follows:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM
When the FM·AM button is pressed while the
ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position, the
radio will come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
If a compact disc is playing when the FM·AM
button is pressed, the compact disc will auto-
matically be turned off and the last radio station
played will come on.
LHA1257 LHA1258
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The FM stereo indicator STEREO will illuminate
during FM stereo reception. When the stereo
broadcast signal is weak, the radio will automati-
cally change from stereo to monaural reception.
XM band select:
Press the XM button to change the band as
follows:
XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1 (satellite, if so
equipped)
When the XM button is pressed while the ignition
switch is in the ACC or ON position, the radio will
come on at the station last played.
The last station played will also come on when
the VOL/ON·OFF control knob is pressed ON.
*When the XM button is pressed, the satellite
radio reception will not be available unless an
optional satellite receiver and antenna are in-
stalled and an XM姞satellite radio service sub-
scription is active. Satellite radio is not available
in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.
If a compact disc is playing when the XM button
is pressed, the compact disc will automatically be
turned off and the last radio station played will
come on.
TUNE/FOLDER (Tuning) knob:
To manually tune the radio, turn the
TUNE/FOLDER knob to the right or left.
Seeking button:
For AM or FM:
Press the side of the seeking button to
tune from high to low frequencies and stop at the
next broadcasting station. Press the side
of the seeking button to tune from low to high
frequencies and stop at the next broadcasting
station.
For XM:
Press the or side of the seeking
button to go to the first channel of the previous or
next category.
1 to 6 Station memory operations:
Six stations can be set for the AM band. Twelve
stations can be set for the FM band (6 for FM1, 6
for FM2). Eighteen channels can be set for the
XM radio (6 for XM1, 6 for XM2, 6 for XM3 – if so
equipped).
1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2
using the FM·AM select button, or choose
the satellite band XM1, XM2 or XM3 using
the XM button.
2. Tune to the desired station using
the seeking button. Press and
hold any of the desired station memory but-
tons (1 – 6) until the preset number is up-
dated on the display and the sound is briefly
muted.
3. The channel indicator will then come on and
the sound will resume. Programming is now
complete.
4. Other buttons can be set in the same man-
ner.
If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the fuse
opens, the radio memory will be canceled. In that
case, reset the desired stations.
List (AM and FM)
Select the “List” key to see a list of the presets in
the AM, FM1 or FM2 preset banks.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Menu (XM, if so equipped)
Select the “Menu” key to see a list of options:
●Preset List – Displays the list of presets.
Press and hold the key on the touchscreen
to save a preset.
●Customize Channel List – deselect chan-
nels to skip while using the TUNE/FOLDER
knob.
●Favorite Artist & Songs
– Tags the current artist or song playing on
XM as a favorite.
– Turn the Alert ON to indicate whenever a
favorite artist or song is playing on XM.
The audio system must be playing XM
radio for this feature to work.
– Delete a favorite artist or song.
●Categories – Displays a category list for XM
radio. Select a category to select the first
channel for that category.
●Direct Tune – Tune to a channel by entering
the channel number.
Radio data system (RDS):
RDS stands for Radio Data System, and is a data
information service transmitted by some radio
stations on the FM band (not AM band). Cur-
rently, most RDS stations are in large cities, but
many stations are now considering broadcasting
RDS data.
RDS can display:
●Station call sign, such as “WHFR 98.3”.
●Station name, such as “The Groove”.
●Music or programming type such as “Clas-
sical”, “Country”, or “Rock”.
●Station specific text.
If the station broadcasts RDS information, the
text information is automatically displayed.
Compact disc (CD) player operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. The CD/DVD insert slot is located be-
hind the display screen. To insert a CD, press the
OPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The display
screen will automatically move down to expose
the CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the CD into the
slot with the label side facing up. The CD will be
guided automatically into the slot and begin play-
ing. To return the display screen to its upright
position after the CD is inserted, press the
OPEN/TILT button again.
If the radio is already operating, it will automati-
cally turn off and the compact disc will play.
LHA1375 LHA1413
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
If the system has been turned off while the com-
pact disc was playing, pressing the
VOL/ON·OFF control knob will start the compact
disc.
DISC·AUX button:
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the compact disc loaded, the
system will turn on and the compact disc will start
to play.
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
compact disc loaded but the radio playing, the
radio will automatically be turned off and the
compact disc will start to play.
Seeking button:
When the side of the seeking button is
pressed while a compact disc is playing, the track
being played returns to its beginning. Press sev-
eral times to skip back through tracks. The com-
pact disc will go back the number of times the
button is pressed.
When the side of the seeking button is
pressed while the compact disc is playing, the
next track will start to play from its beginning.
Press several times to skip through tracks. The
compact disc will advance the number of times
the button is pressed. (When the last track on the
compact disc is skipped through, the first track
will be played.)
Seeking (Rewind and
Fast Forward) button:
Press and hold the side of the seeking
button or the side of the seeking button
while a compact disc is playing; the compact disc
will play while rewinding or fast forwarding. When
the button is released, the compact disc will
return to normal play speed.
TUNE/FOLDER knob
While playing a CD with compressed audio files,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob right or left to play
the next or previous folder.
CD menu
Touch the “Menu” key on the display while a CD
or CD with compressed audio files is playing to
bring up a list of options. Depending on the type
of CD being played, the following options may be
available:
LHA1258
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
●Play Mode
This option allows you to alter the play pattern of
the CD. Touch the key of the mode you wish to
apply. The modes change the play pattern as
follows:
1 Track Repeat - the current track is repeated.
1 Disc Random- tracks from the entire disc are
played randomly.
1 Folder Repeat (compressed audio files CD
only) - the current folder is repeated.
1 Folder Random (compressed audio files CD
only) - tracks from the current folder are played
randomly.
Normal - Plays all tracks on the CD in sequential
order until stopped.
●Folder List
The folders on the disc are displayed. Select the
key of a folder name to begin playing tracks from
that folder.
LHA1259 LHA1262 LHA1260
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
●Track List
The tracks on the disc are displayed. Select the
key of a track name to begin playing that track.
●Title Text Priority
●Record to Music Box, Automatic Recording,
Recording Quality
For more information about these options, see
“Music Box姞” in this section.
CD EJECT button:
To eject a CD, press the OPEN/TILT button to
lower the display screen. Once the screen is in
the lowered position, press the button to
the left of the CD/DVD insert slot 䊊
1. The CD will
be ejected.
When the button is pressed while the CD
is being played, the CD will eject and the system
will turn off.
LHA1261 LHA1267 LHA1415
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
AUX (auxiliary) input jacks
The auxiliary input jacks are located inside the
center console 䊊
1. NTSC compatible devices
such as video games, camcorders and portable
video players can be connected to the auxiliary
input jacks. Audio devices, such as some MP3
players, can also be connected to the system
through the auxiliary input jacks.
The auxiliary input jacks are color coded for iden-
tification purposes:
●Red – right channel audio input
●White – left channel audio input
●Yellow – video input
Before connecting a device to the auxiliary input
jacks, turn off the power of the portable device.
With a compatible device connected to the aux-
iliary input jacks, press the DISC·AUX button
repeatedly until the AUX mode appears in the
display. The output from the device will be played
through the display (when the vehicle is in the (P)
Park position and the parking brake engaged)
and audio system.
AUX settings
Select the “Settings” key.
The display mode can be set to Normal, Wide or
Cinema. The volume setting can be set to Low,
Medium or High.
Additional features
For more information about the iPod姞player
available with this system, see “iPod姞player op-
eration with Navigation System” in this section.
For more information about the USB interface
available with this system, see “USB interface
(models with Navigation System)” in this section.
WHA1532 WHA1393
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
For more information about the Music Box姞fea-
ture available with this system, see “Music Box姞”
in this section.
For more information about the Bluetooth姞
streaming audio feature available with this sys-
tem, see “Bluetooth姞streaming audio” in this
section.
DIGITAL VERSATILE DISC (DVD)
PLAYER OPERATION (models with
Navigation System)
Precautions
Start the engine when using the DVD entertain-
ment system.
Movies will not be shown on the front display
while the vehicle is in any drive position to reduce
driver distraction. Audio is available when a movie
is played. To view movies on the front display,
stop the vehicle in a safe location, move the shift
selector to the P (Park) position and apply the
parking brake.
WARNING
●The driver must not attempt to operate
the DVD system or wear the head-
phones while the vehicle is in motion so
that full attention may be given to ve-
hicle operation.
●Do not attempt to modify the system to
display a movie on the front screen
while the vehicle is being driven. Doing
so may distract the driver and may
cause a collision and serious personal
injury or death.
CAUTION
●Only operate the DVD while the vehicle
engine is running. Operating the DVD
for extended periods of time with the
engine OFF can discharge the vehicle
battery.
●Do not allow the system to get wet.
Excessive moisture such as spilled liq-
uids may cause the system to
malfunction.
●While playing VIDEO-CD media, this
DVD player does not guarantee com-
plete functionality of all VIDEO-CD
formats.
LHA1394
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
Playing a DVD
Inserting/Ejecting the DVD
The CD/DVD insert slot is located behind the
display screen. To insert the DVD, press the
OPEN/TILT button on the audio unit. The display
screen will automatically move down to expose
the CD/DVD insert slot. Insert the DVD into the
slot with the label side facing up. The DVD will be
guided automatically into the slot and begin play-
ing. To return the display screen to its upright
position after the DVD is inserted, press the
OPEN/TILT button again.
To eject a DVD, press the OPEN/TILT button to
lower the display screen. Once the screen is in
the lowered position, press the button to
the left of the CD/DVD insert slot 䊊
1. The DVD
will be ejected.
DISC-AUX button
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the front
seat occupants to operate the DVD drive while
watching the images.
Press the DISC-AUX button until the DVD mode
is active on the display.
When a DVD is loaded, it will be replayed auto-
matically.
The operation screen will be turned on when the
DISC-AUX button is pressed while a DVD is
playing. The operation screen will turn off auto-
matically after a period of time. To turn it on again,
press the DISC-AUX button.
DVD operation keys
When the DVD is playing without the operation
screen being shown, you may use the touch-
screen to select items from the displayed video.
When the operation screen is being shown, use
the touchscreen to select an item from the dis-
played menus.
PAUSE:
Select the key to pause the DVD. To re-
sume playing the DVD, use the key.
LHA1415 LHA1376
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
PLAY:
Select the key to start playing the DVD or
resume playing the DVD after it has been paused.
STOP:
Select the key to stop playing the DVD.
NEXT/PREVIOUS
CHAPTER:
Select the key to skip the chapter(s) of the
disc forward. Select the key to skip the
chapter(s) of the disc backward. The chapters
will advance forward or backward the number of
times the respective key is touched.
CM SKIP:
This function is only for DVD-VIDEO and DVD-
VR. Select the or key to fast forward
or rewind a set interval of time based on the CM
settings. For more information, see “DVD set-
tings” in this section.
Next/Prev:
This function is only for DVD-AUDIO. Select the
“+” or “-” key to advance or rewind the still image.
The still image will advance or rewind the number
of times the key is touched.
Top Menu:
When the “Top Menu” key is selected while the
DVD is playing, the top menu specific to each
disc will be displayed. For details, see the instruc-
tions attached to the disc.
DVD settings
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:
●Key (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-AUDIO)
Displays the operation keys for the specific
DVD menu.
– Select the directional keys to move the
cursor on the DVD menu.
– Select the “Enter” key to fix the selected
menu item.
– Select the “Move” key to move the loca-
tion of the operation keys on the screen.
– Select the “Back” key to return to the
previous menu screen.
– Select the “Hide” key to hide the opera-
tion keys.
●Title Menu (DVD-VIDEO)
Some menus specific to each disc will be
shown. For details, see the instructions at-
tached to the disc.
●Title Search (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
The scene with the specified title will be
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
side is selected.
●Group Search (DVD-AUDIO, VIDEO CD)
The scene with the specified group will be
displayed the number of times the “+” or “-”
side is selected.
●10 Key Search (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
CD-DA, DVD-VR)
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and select the “OK” key.
The specified Title/Chapter or Group/Track
will be played.
●Select No. (VIDEO CD)
Select the “Select No.” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and select the “OK” key.
The specified scene will be played.
●Angle (DVD-VIDEO)
If the DVD contains different angles (such as
moving images), the current image angle
can be switched to another one. Select the
“Angle” key and use the “+” or “-” key to
change the angle.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
●Angle Mark (DVD-VIDEO)
When this item is turned on, an angle mark
will be shown on the bottom of the screen if
the scene can be seen from a different angle.
●Menu Skip (DVD-VIDEO)
DVD menus are automatically configured
and the contents will be played directly
when the “Menu Skip” key is turned on. Note
that some discs may not be played directly
even if this item is turned on.
●CM Skip (DVD-VIDEO)
Select the “CM Skip” key to choose the
setting time for CM backward and forward
operations. Use the “+” or “-” key to choose
a setting time of 15, 30 or 60 seconds.
●DRC (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the
speakers.
●DVD Language (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD)
Select the “DVD Language” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number cor-
responding to the preferred language and
select the “OK” key. The DVD top menu
language will be changed to the one speci-
fied.
●Display
Adjust the image quality of the screen by
selecting the preferred adjustment items.
●Audio
Choose the preferred language for the au-
dio.
●Subtitle (DVD-VIDEO, DVD-VR)
Choose the preferred language for the sub-
titles.
●Display Mode (DVD-VIDEO, VIDEO CD,
DVD-VR)
Choose from the “Full”, “Wide”, “Normal” or
“Cinema” mode.
●Title List (DVD-VR)
Choose the preferred title from the list.
●Play Mode
Choose the preferred play mode.
●PG/PL Mode (DVD-VR)
Choose from the “PG” or “PL” mode.
USB INTERFACE (models without
Navigation System) (if so equipped)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
sole. Open the protective cover 䊊
1on the USB
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio files on the stor-
age device can be played through the vehicle’s
audio system.
WHA1530
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Audio file operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the AUX button to switch to
the USB input mode. If another audio source is
plugged in through the AUX IN jack on the radio,
the AUX button toggles between the two
sources.
Play information
Information about the audio files being played
can be displayed on the display screen of the
vehicle’s audio system. Depending on how the
audio files are encoded, information such as
Folder, Song and Artist will be displayed.
The track number and number of total tracks in
the folder are displayed on the screen as well. For
example, the fourth track out of twelve total is
currently playing.
SEEK/CAT (Reverse or
Fast Forward) buttons:
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on
the USB device is playing to reverse or fast
forward the track being played. The track plays at
an increased speed while reversing or fast for-
warding. When the button is released, the audio
file returns to normal play speed.
SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
dio file on the USB device is playing to return to
the beginning of the current track. Press the
SEEK/CAT button several times to skip
backward several tracks.
Press the SEEK/CAT button while an au-
dio file on the USB device is playing to advance
one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button
several times to skip forward several tracks. If the
last track in a folder on the USB device is
skipped, the first track of the next folder is played.
LHA1280
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
RDM button:
When the RDM button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
ALL RDM →1 FOLDER RDM →OFF
ALL RDM: all tracks on the USB device will be
played randomly.
1 FOLDER RDM: all tracks in the current folder
will be played randomly.
OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The
indicator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
RPT button:
When the RPT button is pressed while an audio
file on the USB device is playing, the play pattern
can be changed as follows:
1 FOLDER RPT →1 TRACK RPT →OFF
1 TRACK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
1 FOLDER RPT: the current folder will be re-
peated.
OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The indi-
cator on the display will turn off.
The current play pattern of the USB device is
displayed on the screen unless no pattern is
applied.
TUNE/SCROLL knob:
If there are multiple folders with audio files on the
USB device, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
change folders. Turn the knob to the left to skip
back a folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip
ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of audio
files on the USB device, turning the
TUNE/SCROLL knob in either direction will re-
turn to the first track on the USB device.
USB INTERFACE (models with
Navigation System)
Connecting a device to the USB input
jack
The USB input jack is located in the center con-
sole. Open the protective cover 䊊
1on the USB
jack, then insert the USB device into the jack.
When a compatible storage device is plugged
into the jack, compatible audio and video files on
the storage device can be played through the
vehicle’s audio system and center display screen.
WHA1530
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When there are both audio and movie files in the
USB memory, the mode select screen is dis-
played. Use the touchscreen to select the pre-
ferred type of file. When there is only type of file in
the USB memory, that audio or movie operation
screen is displayed and starts to play.
When you play a file with limited playing time, the
confirmation screen will be displayed before
starting to play the file. Confirm the playing time
and select “yes” to start playing.
Audio file operation
DISC-AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC
position and press the DISC-AUX button to
switch to the USB input mode. If another audio
source is playing and a USB memory device is
inserted, press the DISC-AUX button repeatedly
until the center display changes to the USB
memory mode.
If the system has been turned off while the USB
memory was playing, push the ON-OFF/VOL
control knob to restart the USB memory.
Seeking (Reverse or Fast
Forward) button:
Press and hold the side of the seeking
button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file on the
USB device is playing to reverse the track being
played. Press and hold the side of the
seeking button for 1.5 seconds while an audio file
on the USB device is playing to fast forward the
track being played. The track plays at an in-
creased speed while reversing or fast forwarding.
When the button is released, the audio file re-
turns to normal play speed.
Seeking button:
Press the side of the seeking button while
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
return to the beginning of the current track. Press
the side of the seeking button several
times to skip backward several tracks.
Press the side of the seeking button while
an audio file on the USB device is playing to
advance one track. Press the side of the
seeking button several times to skip forward sev-
eral tracks. If the last track in a folder on the USB
device is skipped, the first track of the next folder
is played.
Folder selection:
To change to another folder in the USB memory,
turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob or choose a folder
displayed on the screen using the touchscreen.
LHA1378
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
Menu:
There are some options available during play-
back. Select one of the following that are dis-
played on the screen, if necessary. Refer to the
following information for each item.
●Movie Playback
Switch to the movie playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
memory contains movie files.
The shift selector must be in Park (P) with
the parking brake engaged to watch movies
from a USB device.
●Folder List/Track List
Displays the folder or track list. The “Movie
Playback” key is also displayed in this list
screen and enables you to switch to the
movie playback mode.
●Play Mode
Choose the preferred play mode using the
touchscreen.
Movie file operation
Park the vehicle in a safe location for the
front seat occupants to operate the USB
memory while watching the images.
DISC-AUX button:
When the DISC-AUX button is pushed with the
system off and the USB memory inserted, the
system will turn on. If another audio source is
playing and the USB memory is inserted, press
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the center
display changes to the USB memory mode.
LHA1294 LHA1379
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Operation keys:
To operate the USB memory, select the desired
key displayed on the display screen.
●Pause:
Select the key to pause the movie file.
To resume playing the movie file, use
the key.
●Play:
Select the key to start playing the
movie file or resume the movie file if it has
been paused.
●Stop:
Select the key to stop playing the
movie file.
●Next Chapter/Fast Forward:
Select the key to skip the chapter(s)
of the disc forward. The chapters will ad-
vance the number of times the key is se-
lected. Press and hold the key to fast for-
ward the chapter.
●Previous Chapter/Rewind:
Select the key to skip the chapter(s)
of the disc backward. The chapters will go
back the number of times the key is selected.
Press and hold the key to rewind the chap-
ter.
List:
Select the “List” key on the movie file operation
screen to display the file list.
Settings:
Select the “Settings” key to adjust the following
settings:
●Audio File Playback
Switch to the audio playback mode. This
item is displayed only when the USB
memory contains audio files.
●Play Mode
Choose between the “Normal” or “1 Track
Repeat” play modes.
LHA1380
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
●10 Key Search
Select the “10 Key Search” key to open the
number entry screen. Input the number you
want to search for and the specified file or
folder will be played.
●Display
Adjust the image quality of the screen.
●DRC
DRC (Dynamic Range Compression) auto-
matically adjusts the soundtrack volume
level to maintain a more even sound to the
speakers.
●Audio
Choose the preferred language of the audio.
●Subtitle
Choose the preferred language of the sub-
titles.
●Display Mode
Choose between the “Normal”, “Wide”,
“Cinema” or “Full” display modes.
iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION
WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if
so equipped)
Connecting iPod姞
To connect an iPod姞to the vehicle so that the
iPod姞can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the protec-
tive cover 䊊
1on the USB jack in the center
console. Then connect the iPod姞-specific end of
the cable to the iPod姞and the USB end of the
cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPod姞
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-
tery will be charged while connected to the ve-
hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod姞from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPod姞.
*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
●iPod姞5th Generation version 1.2.3
●iPod姞Classic - version 1.1
●iPod姞Touch - version 2.1*
●iPod姞Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1
●iPod姞Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3
●iPod姞Nano - 3rd generation version 1.0.2
●iPod姞Nano - 4th generation version 1.0.4
●iPod姞Nano - 5th generation version 1.0.1
* Some features of this iPod姞may not be fully
functional.
WHA1530
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Make sure that your iPod姞firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
Audio main operation
AUX button:
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the AUX button repeatedly
until the iPod姞mode is displayed on the screen.
If another audio source is playing and the iPod姞is
connected, press the AUX button repeatedly to
switch to the iPod姞mode.
If the vehicle audio system is turned off while the
iPod姞is playing, the iPod姞will start when the
VOL/ON-OFF control knob is pressed.
Interface:
The interface for iPod姞operation shown on the
vehicle’s audio system display screen is similar to
the iPod姞interface. Use the TUNE/SCROLL
knob and ENTER button to navigate the menus
on the screen. The iPod姞MENU button on the
vehicle audio system is used to move up one level
in the iPod姞menus.
Depending on the iPod姞model, the following
items may be available on the menu list screen.
For further information about each item, see the
iPod姞Owner’s Manual.
●Playlists
●Artists
●Albums
●Songs
●Podcasts
●Genres
●Composers
●Audiobooks
●ShuffleSongs
SEEK/CAT buttons:
Press the SEEK/CAT buttons or to
skip backward or forward one track.
Press and hold the SEEK/CAT buttons
or for 1.5 seconds while a track is playing
to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
The track plays at an increased speed while
reversing or fast forwarding. When the button is
released, the track returns to normal play speed.
RPT button:
Press the RPT button while a track is playing to
change the play pattern as follows:
1 TRK RPT →ALL RPT →RPT OFF
1 TRK RPT: the current track will be repeated.
ALL RPT: all songs in the current list are re-
peated.
RPT OFF: no repeat play pattern is applied.
RDM button:
Press the RDM button while a track is playing to
change the play pattern as follows:
TRK SHUFFLE →ALBUM SHUFFLE →
SHUFFLE OFF
TRK SHUFFLE: the tracks in the current list will
be played randomly.
ALBUM SHUFFLE: the albums in the current list
will be played randomly.
SHUFFLE OFF: no random play pattern is ap-
plied.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
iPod姞* PLAYER OPERATION WITH
NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if so
equipped)
Connecting iPod姞
To connect an iPod姞to the vehicle so that the
iPod姞can be controlled with the audio system
controls and display screen, use the USB jack
located in the center console. Open the protec-
tive cover 䊊
1on the USB jack in the center
console. Then connect the iPod姞-specific end of
the cable to the iPod姞and the USB end of the
cable to the USB jack on the vehicle. If your iPod姞
supports charging via a USB connection, its bat-
tery will be charged while connected to the ve-
hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod姞can
only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod姞from the vehicle, remove
the USB end of the cable from the USB jack on
the vehicle, then remove the cable from the
iPod姞.
*iPod姞is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
●iPod姞5th Generation version 1.2.3
●iPod姞Classic - version 1.1.1
●iPod姞Touch - version 2.0.0*
●iPod姞Nano - 1st generation version 1.3.1
●iPod姞Nano - 2nd generation version 1.1.3
●iPod姞Nano - 3rd generation version 1.1.3
●iPod姞Nano - 4th generation version 1.0.4
●iPod姞Nano - 5th generation version 1.0.1
* Some features of this iPod姞may not be fully
functional.
Make sure that your iPod姞firmware is updated to
the version indicated above.
WHA1530
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Audio main operation
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position. Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly
to switch to the iPod姞mode.
If the system has been turned off while the iPod姞
was playing, pressing the VOL/ON·OFF control
knob will start the iPod姞.
DISC·AUX button:
When the DISC·AUX button is pressed with the
system off and the iPod姞connected, the system
will turn on. If another audio source is playing and
the iPod姞is connected, press the DISC·AUX but-
ton repeatedly until the center display changes to
the iPod姞mode.
Interface:
The interface for iPod姞operation shown on the
vehicle center display is similar to the iPod姞in-
terface. Use the touchscreen to control your fa-
vorite settings.
The following items can be chosen from the menu
list screen. For further information about each
item, see the iPod姞Owner’s Manual.
●Now Playing
●Playlists
●Artists
●Albums
●Songs
●Podcasts
●Genres
●Composers
●Audiobooks
●Shuffle Songs
The following keys shown on the screen are also
available:
●Menu: returns to the previous screen.
●: plays/pauses the music selected.
LHA1397 LHA1398
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
Play mode:
While the iPod姞is playing, touch the “Menu” key
to display the iPod姞menu. Touch the “Play
Mode” key to display the Play Mode screen and
adjust the settings for Shuffle, Repeat and Audio-
books. For further information about each item,
see the iPod姞Owner’s Manual.
Seeking button:
When the or side of the seeking
button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds while
the iPod姞is playing, the next track or the begin-
ning of the current track on the iPod姞will be
played.
When the or side of the seeking
button is pressed for more than 1.5 seconds
while the iPod姞is playing, the iPod姞will play
while fast forwarding or rewinding. When the
button is released, the iPod姞will return to the
normal play speed.
Scrolling menus:
While navigating long lists of artists, albums or
songs in the music menu, it is possible to scroll
the list by the first letter. To activate letter index-
ing, touch and hold the page up/down arrows on
the touchscreen.
To exit the scrolling by letter mode, perform one of
the following:
●Push the ENTER switch on the steering
wheel.
●Do not touch the controls for 2 seconds.
LHA1315 LHA1399
4-76 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MUSIC BOX姞(if so equipped)
The Music Box system can store songs from CDs
being played. The system has a 9.3 gigabyte
(GB) storage capacity.
The following CDs can be recorded in the Music
Box system:
●CDs without MP3/WMA files.
●Hybrid Compact Disc Digital Audio (Hybrid
CD-DA) specification in Super Audio CDs.
●Compact Disc Digital Audio (CD-DA) speci-
fication in CD-Extras.
●First session of multisession disc.
Extreme temperature conditions [below ⫺4°F
(⫺20°C) and above 158°F (70°C)] could affect
the performance of the hard-disk.
NOTE:
If the hard drive needs to be replaced due
to a malfunction, all stored music data will
be erased.
Recording CDs
1. Operate the audio system to play a CD.
For information on playing CDs, see “Com-
pact Disc (CD) player operation” in this sec-
tion.
2. Touch the “Start REC” key. REC CD ap-
pears on the screen.
NOTE:
●The system starts playing and recording the
1st track on the CD when the “Start REC”
key is selected.
●Individual tracks from a CD cannot be se-
lected to be recorded to the Music Box hard
drive.
●The fast forward and rewind features are
disabled while the CD is recording.
●The recording process can be stopped at
any time. All tracks that were played before
the CD was stopped are stored.
●Individual tracks can be deleted from the
hard drive after the CD is recorded.
●The system records faster than it plays.
LHA1263 LHA1282
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
If the title information of the track being recorded
is stored either in the hard drive or in the CD, the
title is automatically displayed on the screen. For
title acquisition from the hard drive, music recog-
nition technology and related data are provided
by Gracenote姞.
To view the details of the track, touch the “Text”
key on the screen. The track name and album title
are displayed on the screen.
If a track is not recorded successfully due to
skipping sounds, the symbol is displayed
behind the track number.
The Music Box audio system cannot perform
recording under the following conditions:
●There is not enough space in the hard drive.
●The number of albums reaches the maximum
of 500.
●The number of tracks reaches the maximum
of 3,000.
Automatic recording:
If the “Automatic Recording” function is turned to
ON, recording starts when a CD is inserted. For
more information, see “Music Box settings” in this
section.
Stopping recording:
To stop the recording, touch the “Stop REC” key
on the screen. If the CD is ejected, the audio
system is turned off or the ignition switch is
placed in the OFF position, the recording also
stops.
Playing recorded songs
Select the Music Box audio system by using one
of the following methods:
●Press the SOURCE select switch on the
steering wheel.
For information, see “Steering wheel switch
for audio control” in this section.
●Press the DISC·AUX button repeatedly until
the center display changes to the Music Box
mode.
●Give voice commands.
For information, see “NISSAN Voice Recog-
nition system” in this section.
LHA1283
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Stopping playback:
The system stops playing when:
●Another mode (radio, CD, USB, Bluetooth姞
Audio or AUX) is selected.
●The audio system is turned off.
●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF
position.
Seeking button:
Press the side of the seeking button while
a track is playing to return to the beginning of the
current track. Press the side of the seeking
button while a track is playing to skip to the
beginning of the next track.
If you press and hold the side of the seek-
ing button or the side of the seeking button
for more than approximately 1.5 seconds; the
track will play while rewinding or fast forwarding.
When the side of the seeking button or
the side of the seeking button is released,
the track will return to the normal playing speed.
TUNE/FOLDER knob:
The TUNE/FOLDER knob skips from album to
album unless it is playing “All Songs” from the
Music Library menu. When playing “All Songs”,
the TUNE/FOLDER knob changes the track in-
stead of the album. The upper right corner of the
screen indicates if the TUNE/FOLDER knob is
changing by track or album.
Music Box menu
There are some options available during play-
back. Select the “Menu” key, then select one of
the following that are displayed on the screen, if
necessary. Refer to the following information for
each item:
●Now Playing
Lists the tracks stored in the Music Box
system. Touch the name of the track to begin
playing that track.
●Music Library
Lists the songs in the Music Library. Tracks
can be searched by Album, Artist or Genre.
LHA1284
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
●My Playlists
Displays the playlists stored in the system.
Touch the “Edit” key next to a playlist to
perform the following operations for that
playlist:
– Add Current Song - adds the song cur-
rently playing to the playlist.
– Add Songs by Album - adds songs to the
playlist by album.
– Add Songs by Artist - adds songs to the
playlist by artist.
– Edit Song Order - edits the order of the
songs in the playlist.
– Edit Name - changes the name of the
playlist.
– Delete Songs - deletes songs from the
playlist.
LHA1285 LHA1286 LHA1287
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
●Play Mode
Alters the play mode of the playlist. Touch
the key of the mode you wish to apply. The
modes change the play pattern as follows:
– Normal - no play pattern is applied.
– 1 Album Repeat - the songs in the current
album are repeated.
– 1 Track Repeat - the current track is re-
peated.
– 1 Album Random - the songs in the cur-
rent album are played randomly.
– All Random - all songs are played ran-
domly.
●Edit Music Information
Edits the information of the songs in the
Music Library.
– Edit Information of Current Song
– Edit Information by Album
– Update Gracenote from USB Device
– Transfer Missing Titles to USB
– Update Gracenote from HDD
The “Transfer Missing Titles to USB” and “Up-
date Gracenote from HDD” options can be used
to update the titles of songs in the Music Library.
Visit www.nissanusa.com/gracenote for detailed
instructions on how to update the Gracenote
database.
LHA1288 LHA1289
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Music Box settings
To set up the Music Box system to your preferred
settings, touch the “Menu” key during playback,
then touch the “Music Box Settings” key.
●Music Box Used/Free Space:
Displays the number of tracks and albums
stored on the hard drive. The percentage of
hard drive space taken up and the amount of
remaining recording time left are also shown.
●Automatic Recording:
When this item is turned to ON, the Music
Box system automatically starts recording
when a CD is inserted.
●Delete Songs from Music Box:
Delete music data stored on the hard drive.
●Recording Quality:
Set the recording quality of 105 kbps or 132
kbps. The default is set to 132 kbps.
●CDDB Version:
Shows the version of CDDB (Compact Disc
Data Base).
LHA1290 LHA1291 LHA1292
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Gracenote姞
NOTE:
●The information contained in the
Gracenote姞Database is not fully guaran-
teed.
●The service of the Gracenote姞Database on
the Internet may be stopped without prior
notice for maintenance.
End-User License Agreement
USE OF THIS PRODUCT IMPLIES ACCEP-
TANCE OF THE TERMS BELOW.
Gracenote姞MusicID™ Terms of Use
This device contains software from Gracenote,
Inc. of Emeryville, California (“Gracenote”). The
software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Soft-
ware”) enables this application to do online disc
identification and obtain music-related informa-
tion, including name, artist, track, and title infor-
mation (“Gracenote Data”) from online servers
(“Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other func-
tions. You may use Gracenote Data only by
means of the intended End-User functions of this
device.
You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers for
your own personal non-commercial use only. You
agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit the
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to
any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR
EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE
GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE
SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMIT-
TED HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive license to use
the Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you vio-
late these restrictions. If your license terminates,
you agree to cease any and all use of the
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights
in Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and
the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership
rights. Under no circumstances will Gracenote
become liable for any payment to you for any
information that you provide. You agree that
Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under this
Agreement against you directly in its own name.
The Gracenote MusicID Service uses a unique
identifier to track queries for statistical purposes.
The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric
identifier is to allow the Gracenote MusicID ser-
vice to count queries without knowing anything
about who you are. For more information, see the
web page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for
the Gracenote MusicID Service.
The Gracenote Software and each item of
Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”
Gracenote makes no representations or warran-
ties, express or implied, regarding the accuracy
of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote
Servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete
data from the Gracenote Servers or to change
data categories for any cause that Gracenote
deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the
Gracenote Software or Gracenote Servers are
error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Soft-
ware or Gracenote Servers will be uninterrupted.
Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with
new enhanced or additional data types or cat-
egories that Gracenote may provide in the future
and is free to discontinue its online services at
any time.
GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, TITLE, AND NONINFRINGEMENT.
GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RE-
SULTS THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR
USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE
WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAM-
AGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOST
REVENUES.
Copyright:
Music recognition technology and related data
are provided by Gracenote姞. Gracenote is the
industry standard in music recognition technol-
ogy and related content delivery. For more infor-
mation visit www.gracenote.com.
CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc.,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote
Software, copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote.
This product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents: #5,987,525;
#6,061,680; #6,154,773, #6,161,132,
#6,230,192, #6,230,207, #6,240,459,
#6,330,593, and other patents issued or pend-
ing. Some services supplied under license from
Open Globe, Inc. for U.S. Patent: #6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered trademarks
of Gracenote. The Gracenote logo and logotype,
and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are trade-
marks of Gracenote.
BLUETOOTH姞STREAMING AUDIO
(if so equipped)
If you have a compatible Bluetooth姞audio device
that is capable of playing audio files, the device
can be connected to the vehicle’s audio system
so that the audio files on the device play through
the vehicle’s speakers.
Connecting Bluetooth姞audio
To connect your Bluetooth姞audio device to the
vehicle, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key.
LHA1316
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4. A screen will appear asking if you are con-
necting the device to use with the hands-
free phone system. Select the “No” key.
5. Enter a PIN of your choice. It will be needed
by your Bluetooth姞audio device to com-
plete the connection process. See the
Bluetooth姞audio device’s owner’s manual
for more information.
Audio main operation
To switch to the Bluetooth姞audio mode, press
the DISC-AUX button repeatedly until the
Bluetooth姞audio mode is displayed on the
screen.
The controls for the Bluetooth姞audio are dis-
played on the screen.
LHA1317 LHA1351 LHA1299
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
Bluetooth姞audio settings
To adjust the Bluetooth姞audio settings, follow
the procedure below:
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.
3. Select the “Connected Devices” key.
4. Select the “Audio Player” key. 5. A list of the connected Bluetooth姞audio
players is displayed. Select the name of the
device you wish to edit.
LHA1316 LHA1296 LHA1297
4-86 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
6. The Device Name and Device Address are
displayed on the screen. Select the “Select”
key to make this device the active
Bluetooth姞audio player. Select the “Edit”
key to edit the details of the player, such as
Device Name. Select the “Delete” key to
delete the device.
CD CARE AND CLEANING
●Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend the
disc. Never touch the surface of the disc.
●Always place the discs in the storage case
when they are not being used.
●To clean a disc, wipe the surface from the
center to the outer edge using a clean, soft
cloth. Do not wipe the disc using a circular
motion.
●Do not use a conventional record cleaner or
alcohol intended for industrial use.
●A new disc may be rough on the inner and
outer edges. Remove the rough edges by
rubbing the inner and outer edges with the
side of a pen or pencil as illustrated.
LHA1298 LHA0049
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-87
1. Source select and Power on switch
2. Tuning switch
3. Volume control switch
1. Source select and Power on switch
2. Tuning switch
3. Volume control switch
1. Source select and Power on switch
2. Menu control switch/ENTER button
3. Volume control switch
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR
AUDIO CONTROL (if so equipped)
POWER on switch
With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON posi-
tion, push the SOURCE switch to turn the audio
system on.
Type A
LHA0752
Type B
LHA0753
Type C
LHA0754
4-88 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
SOURCE select switch
Push the source select switch to change the
mode in the following sequence:
Type A Switch:
PRESET BANK A →PRESET BANK B →PRE-
SET BANK C →CD* →AUX* →PRESET BANK
A.
* These modes are only available when compat-
ible media storage is inserted into the device.
While in one of the preset radio station banks (A,
B or C), use the tuning switch or to
select one of the preset radio stations (1 – 6).
Type B Switch:
AM →FM* →XM* (satellite radio, if so equipped)
→CD** →USB/iPod** →AUX** →AM
* When using the SOURCE switch, the audio
mode switches to the FM preset bank (FM1 or
FM2) or XM preset bank (XM1 or XM2) that was
last active. To switch between the FM1 and FM2
preset banks or the XM1 and XM2 preset banks,
use the controls on the audio system.
** These modes are only available when compat-
ible media is connected to the system.
Type C Switch:
AM →FM1 →FM2 →XM1 →XM2 →XM3
(satellite radio, if so equipped) →CD/DVD*→
Music Box** →USB/iPod姞*→Bluetooth姞Au-
dio* →AUX* →AM.
* These modes are only available when compat-
ible media storage is inserted into the device.
** This mode is only available when music has
been downloaded into the Music Box system.
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase or
decrease the volume.
Tuning (Type A and
Type B switches only)
Memory change (radio):
While in one of the preset radio station banks,
push the tuning switch or for less
than 1.5 seconds to change to the next preset
station in memory.
Seek tuning (radio):
Push the tuning switch or for more
than 1.5 seconds to seek the next or previous
radio station.
Next/Previous track (CD):
Push the tuning switch or for less
than 1.5 seconds to return to the beginning of the
present track or skip to the next track. Push
several times to skip back or skip through tracks.
Menu control
switch/ENTER button
(Type C switch only)
While the display is showing a map or audio
screen, tilt the Menu Control switch upward or
downward to select a station, track, CD or folder.
For most audio sources, tilting the switch
up/down for more than 1.5 seconds provides a
different function than a tilting up/down for less
than 1.5 seconds.
AM and FM:
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
seek up or down to the next station.
●Press the ENTER button to show the list of
preset stations.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-89
XM (if so equipped):
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the preset station.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
go to the next or previous category.
●Press the ENTER button to show the XM
Menu.
iPod姞:
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●Press the ENTER button to show the iPod
Menu.
CD:
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number (if
playing compressed audio files).
●Press the ENTER button to show the CD
Menu.
DVD:
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the title number.
●Press the ENTER button to select an item
from the DVD display.
●When the transparent operation menu ap-
pears, the switch will control the menu.
USB:
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the folder number.
●Press the ENTER button to show the USB
Menu.
Music Box:
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
●Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the album (folder)
number (if playing compressed audio files).
●Press the ENTER button to show the Music
Box Menu.
Bluetooth姞Audio:
●Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to
increase or decrease the track number.
AUX:
●Press the ENTER button to show the AUX
Menu.
ANTENNA
Window antenna
The antenna pattern is printed inside the rear
window.
CAUTION
●Do not place metalized film near the
rear window glass or attach any metal
parts to it. This may cause poor recep-
tion or noise.
●When cleaning the inside of the rear
window, be careful not to scratch or
damage the rear window antenna.
Lightly wipe along the antenna with a
dampened soft cloth.
4-90 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in
your NISSAN, be sure to observe the following
precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may
adversely affect the engine control system and
other electronic parts.
WARNING
●A cellular telephone should not be used
while driving so full attention may be
given to vehicle operation. Some juris-
dictions prohibit the use of cellular tele-
phones while driving.
●If you must make a call while your ve-
hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-
lar phone operational mode (if so
equipped) is highly recommended. Ex-
ercise extreme caution at all times so
full attention may be given to vehicle
operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
●Keep the antenna as far away as pos-
sible from the electronic control
modules.
●Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in
(20 cm) away from the electronic con-
trol system harnesses. Do not route the
antenna wire next to any harness.
●Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio
as recommended by the manufacturer.
●Connect the ground wire from the CB
radio chassis to the body.
●For details, consult a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH姞HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-91
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth姞wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-
vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting
procedure is required. Your phone is automatically
connected with the in-vehicle phone module when
the ignition switch is placed in the ON position with
the previously connected cellular phone turned on
and carried in the vehicle.
You can connect up to 5 different Bluetooth姞
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
●Set up the wireless connection between a
compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle
phone module before using the hands-free
phone system.
●
Some Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phones may
not be recognized by the in-vehicle phone mod-
ule. Please visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
for a recommended phone list and connecting
instructions.
●You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive a cellular signal; such
as in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
WHA1042
4-92 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
●When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
●Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
●While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth姞wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
●If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
●Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
●Refer to the cellular phone Owner’s Manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH威is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Visteon.
USING THE SYSTEM
The NISSAN Voice Recognition system allows
hands-free operation of the Bluetooth姞Phone
System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may
not be available so full attention may be given to
vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. If the button is
pressed before the initialization completes, the
system will announce “Hands-free phone system
not ready” and will not react to voice commands.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-93
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN
Voice Recognition system, observe the following:
●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing voice commands correctly.
●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command. Otherwise, the command will not
be received properly.
●Start speaking a command within 5 seconds
after the tone sounds.
●Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition, press
and release the button located on the
steering wheel. After the tone sounds, speak a
command.
The command given is picked up by the micro-
phone, and voice feedback is given when the
command is accepted.
●If you need to hear the available commands
for the current menu again, say “Help” and
the system will repeat them.
●If a command is not recognized, the system
announces, “Command not recognized.
Please try again.” Repeat the command in a
clear voice.
●If you want to go back to the previous com-
mand, you can say “Go back” or “Correc-
tion” any time the system is waiting for a
response.
●You can cancel a command when the sys-
tem is waiting for a response by saying,
“Cancel” or “Quit.” The system announces
“Cancel” and ends the VR session. You can
also press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for 5 seconds at any time to
end the VR session. Whenever the VR ses-
sion is cancelled, a double beep is played to
indicate you have exited the system.
●If you want to adjust the volume of the voice
feedback, press the volume control switches
(+ or -) on the steering wheel while being
provided with feedback. You can also use
the radio volume control knob.
●In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the button on the steering
wheel.
●To use the system faster, you may speak the
second level commands with the main menu
command on the main menu. For example,
press the button and after the tone
say, “Call Redial.”
NOTE:
The combined command of Call and (a
Name) cannot be used.
How to say numbers
NISSAN Voice Recognition requires a certain
way to speak numbers in voice commands. Refer
to the following rules and examples.
●Either “zero” or “oh” can be used for “0”.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight oh oh six six two six two oh
oh”, or
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two oh
oh”
●Words can be used for the first 4 digits
places only.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight hundred six six two six two oh
oh”,
4-94 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
– NOT “One eight hundred six six two sixty
two hundred,” and
– NOT “One eight oh oh six six two sixty two
hundred”
●Numbers can be spoken in small groups.
The system will prompt you to continue en-
tering digits, if desired.
Example: 1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six six two”
The system repeats the numbers and
prompts you to enter more.
– “six two zero zero”
●Say “pound” for “#”. Say “star” for “*” (avail-
able when using the “Special number” com-
mand and the “Send” command during a
call).
See “List of voice commands” and “Special
number” in this section for more information.
Example: 1-555-1212 *123
– “One five five five one two one two star
one two three”
●Say “plus” for “+” (available only when using
the “Special Dialing” command).
●Say “pause” for a 2-second pause (available
only when storing a phone book number).
NOTE:
For best results, say phone numbers as
single digits.
The voice command “Help” is available at any
time. Please use the “Help” command to get
information on how to use the system.
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth姞Hands-
Free Phone System are located on the steering
wheel.
PHONE/SEND
Press the button to initiate
a VR session or answer an incom-
ing call.
LHA0757
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-95
You can also use the button
to interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once. See
“List of voice commands” and
“During a call” in this section for
more information.
PHONE/END
While the voice recognition sys-
tem is active, press and hold
the button for 5 seconds to
quit the voice recognition system
at any time.
TUNING SWITCH
While using the voice recognition
system, tilt the tuning switch up or
down to manually control the
phone system.
GETTING STARTED
The following procedures will help you get
started using the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone
System with NISSAN Voice Recognition. For ad-
ditional command options, refer to “List of voice
commands” in this section.
Choosing a language
You can interact with the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free
Phone System using English, Spanish or French.
To change the language, perform the following.
1. Press and hold the button for more
than 5 seconds.
2. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-
ferent language.”
3. Press the button.
For information on speaker adaptation, see
“Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode”in this sec-
tion.
4. The system announces the current language
and gives you the option to change the lan-
guage to Spanish (in Spanish) or French (in
French). To select the current language,
press the PHONE/SEND ( ) button. To
select a different language, tilt the tuning
switch ( or ) up or down.
NOTE:
You must press the button within 5
seconds to change the language.
5. If you decide not to change the language, do
not press either button. After 5 seconds, the
VR session will end, and the language will
not be changed.
Connecting procedure
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be per-
formed when the vehicle is stationary. If the
vehicle starts moving during the procedure,
the procedure will be cancelled.
Main Menu
“Connect phone” 䊊
A
“Add phone” 䊊
B
Initiate from handset 䊊
C
Name phone 䊊
D
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. The system announces the available
commands.
2. Say: “Connect phone” 䊊
A. The system ac-
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
4-96 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
3. Say: “Add phone” 䊊
B. The system acknowl-
edges the command and asks you to initiate
connecting from the phone handset 䊊
C.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone model. See the cellular phone Own-
er’s Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instruc-
tions on connecting NISSAN recommended
cellular phones.
When prompted for a Passkey code, enter
“1234” from the handset. The Passkey code
“1234” has been assigned by NISSAN and
cannot be changed.
4. The system asks you to say a name for the
phone 䊊
D.
If the name is too long or too short, the
system tells you, then prompts you for a
name again.
Also, if more than one phone is connected
and the name sounds too much like a name
already used, the system tells you, then
prompts you for a name again.
Making a call by entering a phone
number
Main Menu
“Call” 䊊
A
“Phone Number” 䊊
B
Speak the digits 䊊
C
“Dial” 䊊
D
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. A tone will sound.
2. Say: “Call” 䊊
A. The system acknowledges
the command and announces the next set of
available commands.
Say: “Special Dialing” to dial more than 10
digits or any special characters.
3. Say “Phone Number” 䊊
B. The system ac-
knowledges the command and announces
the next set of available commands.
4. Say the number you wish to call starting with
the area code in single digit format 䊊
C.Ifthe
system has trouble recognizing the correct
phone number, try entering the number in
the following groups: 3-digit area code,
3-digit prefix and the last 4-digits. For ex-
ample, 555-121-3354 can be said as “five
five five” as the 1st group, then “one two
one” as the 2nd group, and “three three five
four” as the 3rd group. For dialing more than
10 digits or any special characters, say
“Special Dialing”. See “How to say num-
bers” in this section for more information.
5. When you have finished speaking the phone
number, the system repeats it back and an-
nounces the available commands.
6. Say: “Dial” 䊊
D. The system acknowledges
the command and makes the call.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” in this section.
Receiving a call
When you hear the ring tone, press the
button on the steering wheel.
Once the call has ended, press the button
on the steering wheel.
NOTE:
If you do not wish to take the call when you
hear the ring tone, press the button
on the steering wheel.
For additional command options, see “List of
voice commands” later in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-97
LIST OF VOICE COMMANDS
Main Menu
“Call”
“Phonebook”
“Recent Calls”
“Connect Phone”
When you press and release the button on
the steering wheel, you can choose from the
commands on the Main Menu. The following
pages describe these commands and the com-
mands in each sub-menu.
Remember to wait for the tone before
speaking.
After the main menu, you can say “Help” to hear
the list of commands currently available any time
the system is waiting for a response.
If you want to end an action without completing it,
you can say “Cancel” or “Quit” at any time the
system is waiting for a response. The system will
end the VR session. Whenever the VR session is
cancelled, a double beep is played to indicate
you have exited the system.
If you want to go back to the previous command,
you can say “Go back” or “Correction” any time
the system is waiting for a response.
“Call”
Main Menu
“Call”
(Speak name) 䊊
A
“Phone Number”
(Speak Digits) 䊊
B
“Special Number” 䊊
C
“Redial” 䊊
D
“Call Back” 䊊
E
(Speak name) 䊊
A
If you have stored entries in the phonebook, you
can dial a number associated with a name and
location.
See “Phonebook” in this section to learn how to
store entries.
When prompted by the system, say the name of
the phone book entry you wish to call. The system
acknowledges the name.
If there are multiple locations associated with the
name, the system asks you to choose the loca-
tion.
Once you have confirmed the name and location,
the system begins the call.
(Speak Digits) 䊊
B
When prompted by the system, say the number
you wish to call. Refer to “How to say numbers”
and “Making a call by entering a phone number”
in this section for more details.
“Special Number” 䊊
C
For dialing more than 10 digits or any special
characters, say “Special Number”. When the
system acknowledges the command, the system
will prompt you to speak the number.
“Redial” 䊊
D
Use the Redial command to call the last number
that was dialed.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
If a redial number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to redial” and
ends the VR session.
“Call Back” 䊊
E
Use the Call Back command to dial the number of
the last incoming call within the vehicle.
The system acknowledges the command, re-
peats the number and begins dialing.
4-98 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
If a call back number does not exist, the system
announces, “There is no number to call back” and
ends the VR session.
During a call
During a call there are several command options
available. Press the button on the steering
wheel to mute the receiving voice and enter com-
mands.
●“Help” — The system announces the avail-
able commands.
●“Go back/Correction” — The system an-
nounces “Go back,” ends the VR session
and returns to the call.
●“Cancel/Quit” — The system announces
“Cancel,” ends the VR session and returns
to the call.
●“Send/Enter/Call/Dial” — Use the Send
command to enter numbers, “*” or “#” during
a call. For example, if you were directed to
dial an extension by an automated system:
Say: “Send one two three four.”
The system acknowledges the command
and sends the tones associated with the
numbers. The system then ends the VR ses-
sion and returns to the call. Say “star” for “*”,
Say “pound” for “#”.
●“Transfer call” — Use the Transfer Call com-
mand to transfer the call from the Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System to the cellular
phone when privacy is desired.
The system announces, “Transfer call. Call
transferred to privacy mode.” The system
then ends the VR session.
To reconnect the call from the cellular phone
to the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free System,
press the button.
●“Mute” — Use the Mute command to mute
your voice so the other party cannot hear it.
Use the mute command again to unmute
your voice.
NOTE:
If a call is ended or the cellular phone
network connection is lost while the Mute
feature is on, the Mute feature will be reset
to “off” for the next call so the other party
can hear your voice.
“Phonebook” (phones without
automatic phonebook download
function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
A
“Delete Entry” 䊊
B
“List Names” 䊊
C
For phones that do not support automatic down-
load of the phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth姞pro-
file), the “Phonebook”command is used to manu-
ally add entries to the vehicle phonebook.
The phonebook stores up to 40 names for each
phone connected to the system.
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-99
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
A
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetooth姞communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
“Delete Entry” 䊊
B
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
“List Names” 䊊
C
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names in the phonebook.
The system recites the phonebook entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session.
“Phonebook” (phones with automatic
phonebook download function)
NOTE:
The “Transfer Entry” command is not avail-
able when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Phonebook”
“List Names” 䊊
A
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
B
“Delete Entry” 䊊
C
“Record Name” 䊊
D
For phones that support automatic download of the
phonebook (PBAP Bluetooth姞profile), the
“Phonebook” command is used to manage entries
in the vehicle phonebook. You can say the name of
an entry at this menu to initiate dialing of that entry.
The phonebook stores up to 1000 names for
each phone connected to the system.
When a phone is connected to the system, the
phonebook is automatically downloaded to the
vehicle. This feature allows you to access your
phonebook from the Bluetooth姞system and call
contacts by name. You can record a custom
voice tag for contact names that the system has
difficulty recognizing. For more information see
“Record name” in this section.
4-100 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
Each phone has its own separate phone-
book. You cannot access Phone A’s phone-
book if you are currently connected with
Phone B.
“List Names” 䊊
A
Use the List Names command to hear all the
names and locations in the phone book.
The system recites the phone book entries but
does not include the actual phone numbers.
When the playback of the list is complete, the
system goes back to the main menu.
You can stop the playback of the list at any time
by pressing the button on the steering
wheel. The system ends the VR session. See the
“Record name” command in this section for infor-
mation about recording custom voice tags for list
entries that the system has difficulty pronounc-
ing.
“Transfer Entry” 䊊
B
Use the Transfer Entry command to store a new
name in the system.
When prompted by the system, say the name you
would like to give the new entry.
For example, say: “Mary.”
If the name is too long or too short, the system
tells you, then prompts you for a name again.
Also, if the name sounds too much like a name
already stored, the system tells you, then prompts
you for a name again.
The system will ask you to transfer a phone
number stored in the cellular phone’s memory.
Enter a phone number by voice command:
For example, say: “five five five one two one two.”
See “How to say numbers” in this section for
more information.
To transfer a phone number stored in the cellular
phone’s memory:
Say “Transfer entry.” The system acknowledges
the command and asks you to initiate the transfer
from the phone handset. The new contact phone
number will be transferred from the cellular
phone via the Bluetooth姞communication link.
The transfer procedure varies according to each
cellular phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for instructions
on transferring phone numbers from NISSAN
recommended cellular phones.
The system repeats the number and prompts you
for the next command. When you have finished
entering numbers or transferring an entry, choose
“Store.”
The system confirms the name, location and
number.
“Delete Entry” 䊊
C
Use the Delete Entry command to erase one
entry from the phonebook. After the system rec-
ognizes the command, speak the name to delete
or say “List Names” to choose an entry.
“Record Name” 䊊
D
The system allows you to record custom voice
tags for contact names in the phonebook that the
vehicle has difficulty recognizing. This feature can
also be used to record voice tags to directly dial
an entry with multiple numbers. Up to 40 voice
tags can be recorded to the system.
“Recent Calls”
Main Menu
“Recent Calls”
“Outgoing” 䊊
A
“Incoming” 䊊
B
“Missed” 䊊
C
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-101
Use the Recent Calls command to access out-
going, incoming or missed calls.
“Outgoing” 䊊
A
Use the Outgoing command to list the outgoing
calls made from the vehicle.
“Incoming” 䊊
B
Use the Incoming command to list the incoming
calls made to the vehicle.
“Missed” 䊊
C
Use the Missed command to list the calls made to
the vehicle that were not answered.
“Connect Phone”
NOTE:
The Add Phone command is not available
when the vehicle is moving.
Main Menu
“Connect Phone”
“Add Phone” 䊊
A
“Select Phone” 䊊
B
“Delete Phone” 䊊
C
“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊
D
Use the Connect Phone commands to manage
the phones connecting to the vehicle or to enable
the Bluetooth姞function on the vehicle.
“Add Phone” 䊊
A
Use the Add Phone command to add a phone to
the vehicle. See “Connecting procedure” in this
section for more information.
“Select Phone” 䊊
B
Use the Select Phone command to select from a
list of phones connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
select. Only one phone can be active at a time.
“Delete Phone” 䊊
C
Use the Delete Phone command to delete a
phone that is connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem will list the names assigned to each phone
and then prompt you for the phone you wish to
delete. Deleting a phone from the vehicle will also
delete that phonebook for that phone.
“Turn Bluetooth OFF” 䊊
D
Use the Turn Bluetooth OFF command to prevent
a wireless connection to your phone.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION (SA) MODE
Speaker Adaptation allows up to two out-of-
dialect users to train the system to improve rec-
ognition accuracy. By repeating a number of
commands, the users can create a voice model of
their own voice that is stored in the system. The
system is capable of storing a different speaker
adaptation model for each connected phone.
Training procedure
The procedure for training a voice is as follows.
1. Position the vehicle in a reasonably quiet
outdoor location.
2. Sit in the driver’s seat with the engine run-
ning, the parking brake on, and the transmis-
sion in P (Park).
3. Press and hold the button for more
than 5 seconds.
4. The system announces: “Press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button for the
hands-free phone system to enter the
speaker adaptation mode or press the
PHONE/END ( ) button to select a dif-
ferent language.”
4-102 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
5. Press the button.
For information on selecting a different lan-
guage, see “Choosing a language” in this
section.
6. Voice memory A or memory B is selected
automatically. If both memory locations are
already in use, the system will prompt you to
overwrite one. Follow the instructions pro-
vided by the system.
7. When preparation is complete and you are
ready to begin, press the button.
8. The SA mode will be explained. Follow the
instructions provided by the system.
9. When training is finished, the system will tell
you an adequate number of phrases have
been recorded.
10. The system will announce that speaker ad-
aptation has been completed and the sys-
tem is ready.
The SA mode will stop if:
●The button is pressed for more than 5
seconds in SA mode.
●The vehicle begins moving during SA mode.
●The ignition switch is placed in the OFF or
LOCK position.
Training phrases
During the SA mode, the system instructs the
trainer to say the following phrases. (The system
will prompt you for each phrase.)
●phonebook transfer entry
●dial three oh four two nine
●delete call back number
●incoming
●transfer entry
●eight pause nine three two pause seven
●delete all entries
●call seven two four zero nine
●phonebook delete entry
●next entry
●dial star two one seven oh
●yes
●no
●select
●missed
●dial eight five six nine two
●Bluetooth on
●outgoing
●call three one nine oh two
●nine seven pause pause three oh eight
●cancel
●call back number
●call star two zero nine five
●delete phone
●dial eight three zero five one
●record name
●four three pause two nine pause zero
●delete redial number
●phonebook list names
●call eight oh five four one
●correction
●connect phone
●dial seven four oh one eight
●previous entry
●delete
●dial nine seven two six six
●call seven six three oh one
●go back
●call five six two eight zero
●dial six six four three seven
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-103
MANUAL CONTROL
While using the voice recognition system, it is
possible to select menu options by using the
steering wheel controls instead of speaking voice
commands. The manual control mode does not
allow dialing a phone number by digits. The user
may select an entry from the Phonebook or Re-
cent Calls lists. To re-activate voice recognition,
exit the manual control mode by pressing and
holding the PHONE/END ( ) button. At that
time, pressing the PHONE/SEND ( ) button
will start the Hands Free Phone System.
Operating tips
●To enter manual control mode, start the
voice recognition system and tilt the tuning
() switch up or down. The system will
speak ⬙Showing Manual Options⬙when
manual controls are initially activated.
●To browse the menu options, tilt the tuning
() switch up or down. The system will
always speak the current menu option. De-
pending on the audio display, it will also
show the current menu option.
●To select the current menu option, press the
PHONE/SEND ( ) button.
●To go back to the previous menu, press the
PHONE/END ( ) button. If the current
menu is the Main Menu, pressing the
PHONE/END ( ) button will exit the
Phone system.
●To exit the manual control mode, press and
hold the PHONE/END ( ) button for 5
seconds.
4-104 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, try the following solutions.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number 1, until
the problem is resolved.
Symptom Solution
System fails to interpret the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command is valid. See “List of voice commands” in this section.
2. Ensure that the command is spoken after the tone.
3. Speak clearly without pausing between words and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level in the vehicle.
4. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive (for example, windows open or defroster on). NOTE: If it is too
noisy to use the phone, it is likely that the voice commands will not be recognized.
5. If more than one command was said at a time, try saying the commands separately.
6. If the system consistently fails to recognize commands, the voice training procedure should be carried out to im-
prove the recognition response for the speaker. See “Speaker Adaptation (SA) mode” in this section.
The system consistently selects the wrong entry from the
phone book.
1. Ensure that the phone book entry name requested matches what was originally stored. This can be confirmed by
using the “List Names” command. See “Phonebook” in this section.
2. Replace one of the names being confused with a new name.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-105
WARNING
●Use a phone after stopping your vehicle
in a safe location. If you have to use a
phone while driving, exercise extreme
caution at all times so full attention may
be given to vehicle operation.
●If you are unable to devote full attention
to vehicle operation while talking on
the phone, pull off the road to a safe
location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery,
use a phone after starting the engine.
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a com-
patible Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phone, you
can set up the wireless connection between your
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module.
With Bluetooth姞wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with
your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the
in-vehicle phone module, no other phone con-
necting procedure is required. Your phone is
automatically connected with the in-vehicle
WHA1501
BLUETOOTH姞HANDS-FREE PHONE
SYSTEM WITH NAVIGATION SYSTEM
(if so equipped)
4-106 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
phone module when the ignition switch is placed
in the ON position with the connected cellular
phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
You can register up to 5 different Bluetooth姞
cellular phones to the in-vehicle phone module.
However, you can talk on only one cellular phone
at a time.
NISSAN Voice Recognition system supports the
phone commands, so dialing a phone number
using your voice is possible. For more details, see
“NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in this sec-
tion.
Before using the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone
System, refer to the following notes.
●Set up the wireless connection between a
cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone
module before using the hands-free phone
system.
●Some Bluetooth姞enabled cellular phones
may not be recognized by the in-vehicle
phone module. Please visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting.
●You will not be able to use a hands-free
phone under the following conditions:
– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular ser-
vice area.
– Your vehicle is in an area where it is
difficult to receive cellular signal; such as
in a tunnel, in an underground parking
garage, near a tall building or in a moun-
tainous area.
– Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it
from being dialed.
●When the radio wave condition is not ideal
or ambient sound is too loud, it may be
difficult to hear the other person’s voice dur-
ing a call.
●Immediately after the ignition switch is
placed in the ON position, it may be impos-
sible to receive a call for a short period of
time.
●Do not place the cellular phone in an area
surrounded by metal or far away from the
in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone
quality degradation and wireless connection
disruption.
●While a cellular phone is connected through
the Bluetooth姞wireless connection, the bat-
tery power of the cellular phone may dis-
charge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth姞
Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge
cellular phones.
●If the hands-free phone system seems to be
malfunctioning, see “Troubleshooting guide”
in this section. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth for trouble-
shooting help.
●Some cellular phones or other devices may
cause interference or a buzzing noise to
come from the audio system speakers. Stor-
ing the device in a different location may
reduce or eliminate the noise.
●Refer to the cellular phone owner’s manual
regarding the telephone charges, cellular
phone antenna and body, etc.
●The signal strength display on the monitor
will not coincide with the signal strength
display of some cellular phones.
●If reception between callers is unclear, ad-
justing the incoming or outgoing call volume
may improve the clarity. See “Call volume” in
this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-107
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with
FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only the
supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna,
modification, or attachments could damage
the transmitter and may violate FCC regula-
tions.
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference,
including interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
– Operation is subject to the following two con-
ditions: (1) this device may not cause interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any
interference, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device.
– This Class B digital apparatus meets all re-
quirements of the Canadian Interference-
Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH威is a
trademark owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.,
U.S.A. and licensed
to Clarion.
VOICE COMMANDS
You can use voice commands to operate various
Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System features
using the NISSAN Voice Recognition system. For
more details, see “NISSAN Voice Recognition
System” in this section.
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel and select the “Bluetooth” key
on the display.
LHA1236
4-108 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
2. Select the “Connect Bluetooth” key. 3. A popup box will appear on the screen,
prompting you to confirm that the connec-
tion is for the phone system. Select the “Yes”
key.
4. When a PIN code appears on the screen,
operate the Bluetooth姞cellular phone to
enter the PIN code.
The connecting procedure of the cellular
phone varies according to each cellular
phone. See the cellular phone Owner’s
Manual for details. You can also visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or call the
NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department for
instructions on connecting recommended
cellular phones.
When the connecting is complete, the
screen will return to the Bluetooth姞settings
screen.
LHA1316 LHA1317 LHA1318
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-109
VEHICLE PHONEBOOK
This vehicle has two phonebooks available for
your use. Depending on your phone, the system
may automatically download your entire cell
phone’s phonebook into the “Handset Phone-
book”. For the details on downloading your
phonebook, see “Handset phonebook” in this
section. If your phonebook does not automati-
cally download, you may set up the vehicle
phonebook for up to 40 entries. This phonebook
allows you to record a name to speak while using
voice recognition.
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key
3. Select the “Add New” key at the top of the
screen.
4. Choose the method for entering the phone-
book entry. For this example, select “Enter
Number by Keypad”.
5. Enter the digits and select the “OK” key. For
more information, see “How to use the touch
screen” in this section.
6. Select the “Voicetag” key to record a name
to speak when using the Voice Recognition
system.
7. Select the “Store” key and prepare to speak
the name after the tone.
8. When the voicetag is successfully saved
(), select the “OK” key to save the
phonebook entry.
9. After the phonebook entry is saved, it will
show a screen that is ready to call the num-
ber. Select the “Back” key to return to the
Vehicle Phonebook.
LHA1320 LHA1321 LHA1381
4-110 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
●Copy from Call History
The system will show a list of your incoming,
outgoing or missed calls that were down-
loaded from your cell phone (depending on
your phone’s compatibility). You may select
one of these entries to save in the vehicle
phonebook.
●Copy from the Handset
The system will show your cell phone’s
phonebook that was downloaded (depend-
ing on your phone’s compatibility). You may
select one of these entries to save in the
vehicle phonebook.
●Editing the Vehicle Phonebook
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
2. Select the “Vehicle Phonebook” key.
3. Select the desired entry from the displayed
list.
4. Select the “Edit” key.
5. Select the desired item to change.
The following editing items are available:
●Entry #
Changes the displayed number of the se-
lected entry.
●Name
Edit the name of the entry using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
●Number
Edit the phone number using the keypad
displayed on the screen.
●Type
Select the icon from the icon list.
LHA1382 LHA1383
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-111
●Voicetag
Confirm and store the voicetag. Voicetags
allow easy dialing using the NISSAN Voice
Recognition system. For more information,
see “NISSAN Voice Recognition System” in
this section.
To delete an entry, select the “Delete” key at step
3.
HANDSET PHONEBOOK
Many phones will support an automatic down-
load of the cellular phone’s phonebook. Since
this method allows for up to 1000 numbers to be
stored and entries are automatically assigned
voice tags by the system, this is a useful function
for easy dialing supported by the Voice Recogni-
tion system.
Transferring the handset phonebook
If your cellular phone supports automatic down-
loading, the system transfers the handset phone-
book automatically by default. To ensure that this
feature is activated, press the SETTING button
on the instrument panel and select the “Phone”
key. The “Auto Downloaded” selection should
have the amber indicator next to the word ON
activated. Select the “Auto Downloaded” key to
toggle this feature on or off.
To transfer the handset phonebook to the vehicle
manually, follow these steps:
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Phone” key.
3. Select the “Download Handset Phonebook”
key.
Once the handset phonebook is transferred to
the vehicle, it can be accessed by pressing
the button on the steering wheel, then
selecting the “Handset Phonebook” key.
Whether the handset phonebook is transferred
manually or automatically, the process can take
up to five minutes to complete, depending on the
size of the handset phonebook. See the cellular
phone’s owner’s manual for more details.
LHA1319
4-112 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MAKING A CALL
To make a call, follow the procedure below:
1. Press the button on the steering
wheel. The “Phone” screen will appear on
the display.
2. Select one of the following options to make a
call:
●Vehicle Phonebook: Select the name from
an entry stored in the vehicle phonebook.
●Handset Phonebook: Select the name from
an entry stored in the handset phonebook.
●Call History: Select the name from the in-
coming or outgoing call history.
●Dial Number: Input the phone number manu-
ally using a keypad displayed on the screen.
For information on how to use the touch-
screen, see “How to use the touch screen”
in this section.
3. For all of the methods listed in Step 2 except
“Dial Number”, dialing commences when the
listed name is selected. Dialing commences
when “OK”is selected if the number is input-
ted manually. The screen changes to the
“Call in Progress” screen.
4. After the call is over, perform one of the
following to finish the call:
a. Select the “Hang up” key on the Call in
Progress screen.
b. Press the switch on the steering
wheel.
RECEIVING A CALL
When you hear a phone ring, the display will
change to phone mode. To receive a call, follow
one of the procedures listed below.
a. Select the “Answer” key on the display.
b. Press the phone button on the steering
wheel switches.
There are some options available when receiving
a call. Select one of the following displayed on
the screen.
Answer:
Accept an incoming call to talk.
LHA1322 LHA1323
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-113
Hold Call:
Put an incoming call on hold.
Reject Call:
Reject an incoming call.
To finish the call, follow one of the procedures
listed below:
a. Select the “Reject Call” key on the display.
b. Press and hold the phone button on the
steering wheel switches.
DURING A CALL
There are some options available during a call.
Select one of the following displayed on the
screen, if necessary:
Hang up:
Finish the call.
Use Handset:
Transfer the call to the cellular phone.
Mute:
Mute your voice to the person.
Keypad:
Brings up a keypad; enter digits when needed.
For example, entering your PIN number for voice-
mail.
NOTE:
Pushing the TALK switch on the
steering wheel during a call allows num-
bers and digits to be sent using Voice Rec-
ognition.
Cancel Mute:
This will appear after the “Mute” key is selected.
Mute will be cancelled.
To adjust the person’s voice to be louder or
quieter, press the volume control switch located
on the steering wheel switches or turn the volume
control knob on the instrument panel while talking
on the phone. This adjustment is also available in
the SETTING mode.
LHA1324
4-114 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
ENDING A CALL
To finish the call, perform one of the following
procedures:
●Select the “Hang up” key on the “Call in
Progress” display.
●Push the switch on the steering
wheel.
PHONE SETTINGS
To set up the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, press the SET-
TING button on the instrument panel and select
the “Phone” key on the display.
Edit Vehicle Phonebook:
See “Vehicle Phonebook” in this section for add-
ing, editing and deleting contacts in the vehicle
phonebook.
Delete Phonebook:
Delete a phonebook stored on the system.
Download Handset Phonebook:
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for
adding, editing and deleting contacts in the
handset phonebook.
LHA1324 LHA1319
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-115
Volume & Ringtone:
Adjust the volume level of the ringtone, incoming
call sound and outgoing call sound. When the
“Automatic Hold” option is turned on, an incom-
ing call will be placed on hold automatically after
several rings. When the “Vehicle Ringtone” op-
tion is turned on, a specific ringtone that is differ-
ent from the cellular phone’s will sound when
receiving a call.
Auto Downloaded:
See “Handset Phonebook” in this section for
information about automatically downloading the
handset phonebook.
BLUETOOTH SETTINGS
To set up the Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone
System to your preferred settings, press the SET-
TING button on the instrument panel and select
the “Bluetooth” key on the display.
Bluetooth:
Turn the Bluetooth姞system on or off.
Connect Bluetooth:
See “Connecting procedure” in this section for
more information about connecting a phone.
Connected Devices:
Display a list of the Bluetooth姞devices con-
nected to the system.
Edit Bluetooth Info:
Check information about the device name, device
address and device PIN.
Replace Connected Phone:
Replace the phone currently connected to the
system. This option allows you to keep any voic-
etags that were recorded using the previous
phone.
LHA1325 LHA1316
4-116 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CALL VOLUME
Adjusting the incoming or outgoing call volume
may improve clarity if reception between callers is
unclear.
●Incoming call — adjusting this setting allows
you to hear a difference in volume.
●Outgoing call — adjusting this setting allows
the person you are talking with to hear a
difference in volume.
To access the settings, press the SETTING but-
ton, then select “Volume & Beeps”.
You can also adjust the volume of an incoming
voice during a call by pushing the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or by turning the
volume control knob on the instrument panel.
NISSAN Voice Recognition allows hands-free
operation of the systems equipped on this ve-
hicle, such as phone and vehicle information.
There are two voice recognition modes of opera-
tion available. They are:
●Standard Mode
●Alternate Command Mode
In Standard Mode (the factory default setting),
commands that are available are always shown
on the display and announced by the system. You
can complete your desired operation by simply
following the prompts given by the system. Not all
NISSAN Voice Recognition options are available
while in Standard Mode.
For advanced operation, you can change to an
Alternate Command Mode that enables the op-
eration of the display, audio, and climate control
through NISSAN Voice Recognition. When this
mode is active, an expanded list of commands
can be spoken after pushing the TALK
switch on the steering wheel, and the voice com-
mand menu prompts are turned off.
In Alternate Command Mode the recognition
success rate may be affected because the num-
ber of available commands and the ways of
speaking each command are increased. See
“NISSAN Voice Recognition Alternate Com-
mand Mode” in this section.
LHA1253
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
SYSTEM (if so equipped)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-117
To improve the recognition success rate when
Alternate Command Mode is active, try using the
Speaker Adaptation Function available in that
mode. See “Speaker Adaptation Function” in this
section. Otherwise, it is recommended that Alter-
nate Command Mode be turned off and Standard
Mode be used for the best recognition perfor-
mance.
While using the NISSAN Voice Recognition sys-
tem for certain Phone and Navigation features,
you can switch to using manual controls (touch-
screen, steering wheel controls) and the informa-
tion you have already entered by voice control will
be retained. To switch to manual controls, select
the “Manual Controls” key on the display when it
appears. The system will respond by speaking
“Changing to manual operation. Please use
manual controls to continue.”
For the voice commands for the navigation sys-
tem, refer to the Navigation System Owner’s
Manual of your vehicle.
For vehicles in the U.S., the factory default setting
is the Standard Mode. See “NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition Standard Mode” in this section. For ve-
hicles in Canada, the factory default setting is the
Alternate Command Mode. See “NISSAN Voice
Recognition Alternate Command Mode” in this
section.
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
STANDARD MODE
The Standard Mode enables control of naviga-
tion, phone and vehicle information. With this
setting active, commands that are available are
always shown on the display and announced by
the system.
Displaying user guide
If you use the NISSAN Voice Recognition system
for the first time or you do not know how to
operate it, you can display the User Guide for
confirmation.
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several
voice commands.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
NOTE:
You can skip steps 1 and 2 by pressing
the switch and saying “Help”.
3. Select the “User Guide” key.
4. Select an item.
LHA1326
4-118 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Available items:
●Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system.
●Let’s Practice
Initiates a practice session that demon-
strates how to improve voice recognition by
the system.
●Using the Address Book
Tutorial for using the Address Book
●Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for entering a destination by street
address.
●Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
●Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips of speaking for correct
command recognition by the system.
Getting started
Before using the Voice Recognition system for
the first time, you can confirm how to use com-
mands by viewing the Getting Started section of
the User Guide.
1. Select the “Getting Started” key.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen.
Tutorials on the operation of the Voice Rec-
ognition system
If you choose “Finding a Street Address”, “Using
the Address Book” or “Placing Calls”, you can
view tutorials on how to perform these operations
using Voice Recognition.
LHA1329
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-119
Let’s Practice
The system is equipped with a tutorial that allows
you to practice saying commands and receive
feedback on the volume, speed and timing of your
speech.
To initiate a practice session, access the User
Guide and select the “Let’s Practice” key. Follow
the on-screen prompts until the session is com-
plete. After the session is completed, a screen
will be displayed that shows an analysis of differ-
ent elements of your speech. Select the “Try
Again” to repeat the session if improvement is
needed. Select the “Done” key to return to the
User Guide screen.
Useful tips for correct operation
You can display useful speaking tips to help the
system recognize your voice commands cor-
rectly.
1. Select “Help on Speaking”.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen.
LHA1327 LHA1328 LHA1330
4-120 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Voice recognition settings
The available settings of the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition system are described.
1. Select “Voice Recognition”.
2. You can confirm the page by scrolling the
screen.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
the switch is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, voice commands will not be ac-
cepted. Please wait until the NISSAN Voice Rec-
ognition initialization is completed.
BEFORE STARTING
To get the best recognition performance from
Voice Recognition, observe the following:
●The interior of the vehicle should be as quiet
as possible. Close the windows to eliminate
the surrounding noises (traffic noise and vi-
bration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the
system from correctly recognizing the voice
commands.
●Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a
command.
●Speak in a natural conversational voice with-
out pausing between words.
●If the air conditioner is set to “Auto”, the fan
speed is automatically lowered so that your
commands can be recognized more easily.
GIVING VOICE COMMANDS
1. Press the switch located on the steer-
ing wheel.
LHA1331 LHA0768
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-121
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Would you like
to access Phone, Navigation, Information,
Audio or Help?”
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from to , speak
a command.
4. Continue to follow the voice menu prompts
and speak after the tone sounds until your
desired operation is completed.
Operating tips
●Say a command after the tone. Voice com-
mands cannot be accepted when the icon
is .
●
Commands that are available are always
shown on the display and spoken through
voice menu prompts. Commands other than
those that are displayed are not accepted.
Please follow the prompts given by the system.
●If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice.
●Press the switch on the steering
wheel to return to the previous screen.
●If you want to cancel the command, press
and hold the switch. The message,
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
●If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-
tem feedback, push the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or use the
audio system volume knob while the system
is making an announcement.
How to speak numbers
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to
speak numbers when giving voice commands.
Refer to the following examples.
General rule:
●Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
●
When saying the phone number 800-662-
6200, the system will accept “eight-hundred”
in addition to “eight zero zero” or “eight oh oh”.
500, 700, and 900 are also supported.
Examples:
●1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
zero zero”
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
You can improve the recognition of phone numbers
by saying the phone number in three groups of
numbers. For example, when you try to call 800-
662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and the sys-
tem will then ask you for the next three digits. Then,
say “six six two”. After recognition, the system will
then ask for the last four digits. Say, “six two zero
zero”. Using this method of phone digit entry can
improve recognition performance.
NOTE:
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
“O” is included in the house number, it will
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
“oh” instead of “zero”.
LHA1333
4-122 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Standard Mode command list
Category Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Phone Displays Phone function commands.
Navigation Displays Navigation function commands.
Information Displays Vehicle Information.
Audio Displays Audio commands.
Help Displays User Guide.
Phone Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Change Number Corrects the phone number when it is not recognized (available during phone number entry).
Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the vehicle phonebook.
Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact that is stored in the handset phonebook.
Call History Makes a call to a number in the incoming or outgoing call logs.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).
Navigation Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Address Book Searches for a location stored in the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-123
Information Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Traffic Info. Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Where am I? Displays current vehicle location.
Audio Command:
COMMAND ACTION
AM Changes the audio system mode to AM radio.
FM Changes the audio system mode to FM radio.
XM Changes the audio system mode to satellite radio.
Music Box Changes the audio system mode to Music Box.
CD Changes the audio system mode to CD.
4-124 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Voice command examples
Some basic voice command examples are de-
scribed here.
For navigation system commands, see the sepa-
rate Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Example 1 — Placing a call to the phone
number 800-662-6200:
1. Press the switch located on the steer-
ing wheel.
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-
dio or Help?”
3. Say “Phone”.
LHA0768 LHA1333
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-125
4. Say “Dial Number”. 5. Say “800”. 6. The system announces, “Please say the next
three digits or dial, or say change number.”
7. Say “662”.
LHA1334 LHA1335 LHA1336
4-126 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
8. The system announces, “Please say the last
four digits or say change number.”
9. Say “6200”.
10. The system announces, “Dial or Change
Number?”
11. Say “Dial”.
12. The system makes a call to 800-662- 6200.
NOTE:
●You can also speak “800-662-6200” (10
continuous digits) or “662-6200” (7 con-
tinuous digits), if the area code is not nec-
essary. However, the 3-3-4 digit grouping is
recommended for improved recognition.
See “How to speak numbers” in this section.
●You can only say a phone number using the
3-3-4 grouping, 7 digits, and 10 digits using
this command. Please use the “International
Call” command for all other formats, and
when special characters such as star (*),
pound (#), and plus (+) need to be entered.
●If you say “Change Number” during phone
number entry, the system will automatically
request that you repeat the number using
the 3-3-4 format. In this case please say the
area code first and then follow the prompts.
●Do not add a “1” in front of the area code
when speaking phone numbers.
●If the system does not recognize your com-
mand, please try repeating the command
using a natural voice. Speaking too slowly or
too loudly may further decrease recognition
performance.
LHA1337 LHA1338
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-127
Example 2 — Placing an international call
to the phone number 011-81-111-222-3333:
1. Press the switch located on the steer-
ing wheel.
2. The system announces, “Would you like to
access Phone, Navigation, Information, Au-
dio or Help?”
3. Say “Phone”.
4. Say “International Call”.
LHA0768 LHA1333 LHA1334
4-128 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
5. Say “011811112223333”. 6. Say “Dial”.
7. The system makes a call to 011-81-111-
222-3333.
NOTE:
Any digit input format is available in the
International Number input process, as
well as the special characters such as star
(*), pound (#), and plus (+).
NISSAN VOICE RECOGNITION
ALTERNATE COMMAND MODE
The Alternate Command Mode enables control
of the Audio, Climate Control and Display sys-
tems as well as additional commands for the
Vehicle Information, Phone and Navigation sys-
tems. With this setting active, the system does
not announce or display the available commands
at each step.
When Alternate Command Mode is activated, an
expanded list of commands can be used after
pushing the TALK switch. Under this
mode, the screen for Standard Mode commands
is not available on the display. Please review the
expanded command list, available when this
mode is active, as some Standard Mode com-
mands are replaced. Please see examples of
Alternate Command Mode screens.
Please note that in this mode the recognition
success rate may be affected as the number of
available commands and ways of speaking each
command are increased. You can turn this mode
ON or OFF. When this mode is activated, the
Voice Recognition Settings will change to show
more options.
LHA1339 LHA1340
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-129
Activating Alternate Command Mode
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel.
2. Select the “Others” key on the display.
3. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
4. Select the “Alternate Command Mode” key.
5. The confirmation message is displayed on
the screen. Select the “OK” key to activate
the Alternate Command Mode.
6. Alternate Command Mode is activated and
the setting menu is expanded to include the
Alternate Command Mode options. See
“Settings menu” in this section for an expla-
nation of the options.
Displaying the command list
If you are controlling the system by voice com-
mands for the first time or do not know the
appropriate voice command, perform the follow-
ing procedure for displaying the voice command
list (available only in Alternate Command Mode).
Press the switch, listen for the tone and
say, “Help”. The system will respond by display-
ing the command list main menu.
LHA1403 LHA1331 LHA1341
4-130 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Only manual controls such as the touchscreen
can navigate the command list menu.
As an alternative to the voice command “Help”,
you may access the command list using the fol-
lowing steps:
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
NOTE:
You can skip steps 1 and 2 if you say “Help”.
3. Select the “Command List” key.
4. Select a category. The command list for the
category selected is shown.
5. If necessary, scroll the screen to view the
entire list.
6. Select the “Back” key to return to the previ-
ous screen.
LHA1342 LHA1402 LHA1342
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-131
Alternate Command Mode command list
Phone Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Dial Number Makes a call to a spoken phone number up to 10 digits.
Vehicle Phonebook Makes a call to a contact in the vehicle phonebook.
Handset Phonebook Makes a call to a contact in the handset phonebook.
International Call Makes an international call by allowing more than 10 digits to be spoken, as well as star (*), pound (#), and plus (+).
Incoming Calls Shows the last 5 incoming phone calls.
Outgoing Calls Shows the last 5 outgoing phone calls.
Missed Calls Shows the last 5 missed phone calls.
4-132 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Navigation Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Home Sets a route to your home that is stored in the Address Book.
Address Searches for a location by the street address specified, and sets a route (for continental US and Canada only).
Places Sets a route to a facility near the current vehicle location.
Address Book Displays the first 5 entries of the Address Book.
Previous Destinations Sets a route to a previous destination.
Previous Start Point Calculates a route to your previous starting point of the last route.
Minimize Freeway Route Recalculates a route to the current destination while minimizing freeway usage.
Fastest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the fastest estimated time.
Shortest Route Recalculates a route to the current destination using the shortest distance.
Cancel Route Cancels the current route.
Delete Destination Deletes the current destination.
Birdview Map Changes the Map display to Birdview.
Planview Map Changes the Map display to a 2-dimensional view.
North Up Changes the Map display to keep north pointing up on the screen.
Heading Up Changes the Map display to keep the direction of the vehicle pointing up on the screen.
Zoom In <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a smaller number.
Zoom Out <1 to 13> Changes the map scale to a larger number.
Guidance Voice ON/OFF Turns the navigation voice guidance on or off.
Guide Voice Repeat Repeats the last navigation voice guidance.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-133
Information Command:
COMMAND ACTION
Traffic Information Turns the traffic information system on and off.
Where am I? Displays the current vehicle location.
Weather Information Displays weather information.
Weather Map Displays the current weather map.
Audio Command:
COMMAND ACTION
AM Turns to the AM band, selecting the station last played.
FM Turns to the FM band, selecting the station last played.
XM Turns to the SAT band, selecting the station last played.
Music Box Turns to the Music Box hard-disk drive audio system.
CD Starts to play a CD.
USB Turns to the USB audio input.
Bluetooth Audio Turns to the Bluetooth姞audio system.
AUX Turns to the AUX input.
4-134 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Displaying user guide
You can confirm how to use voice commands by
accessing a simplified User Guide, which con-
tains basic instructions and tutorials for several
voice commands.
1. Press the INFO button on the instrument
panel.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
3. Select the “User Guide” key.
4. Select an item.
Available items:
●Getting Started
Describes the basics of how to operate the
Voice Recognition system.
●Let’s Practice
Initiates a practice session that demon-
strates how to improve recognition by the
system.
●Using the Address Book
Tutorial for using the Address Book.
●Finding a Street Address
Tutorial for Finding a Street Address.
●Placing Calls
Tutorial for making a phone call by voice
command operation.
●Help on Speaking
Displays useful tips for how to correctly
speak commands in order for them to be
properly recognized by the system.
●Voice Recognition Settings
Describes the available Voice Recognition
settings.
●Adapting the System to Your Voice
Tutorial for adapting the system to your
voice.
USING THE SYSTEM
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON
position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initialized,
which takes a few seconds. When completed,
the system is ready to accept voice commands. If
the switch is pressed before the initializa-
tion completes, the display will show the mes-
sage: “System not ready.” or a beep sounds.
LHA1343 LHA1344
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-135
Before starting
To get the best performance from NISSAN Voice
Recognition, observe the following:
●Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as
possible. Close the windows to eliminate the
surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration
sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system
from recognizing the voice commands cor-
rectly.
●When the climate control is in the AUTO
mode, the fan speed decreases automati-
cally for easy recognition.
●Wait until a tone sounds before speaking a
command.
●Speak in a natural voice without pausing
between words.
Giving voice commands
1. Press and release the switch located
on the steering wheel.
2. A list of commands appears on the screen,
and the system announces, “Please say a
command from the displayed list or say Help
to show all commands.”
3. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from to , speak
a command.
4. Once a command is recognized, the system
will announce the recognized command and
perform the requested action.
If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice after the tone.
LHA0768 LHA1345
4-136 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Operating tips
●Say a command after the tone. Voice com-
mands cannot be accepted when the icon
is .
●If the command is not recognized, the sys-
tem repeats the announcement. Repeat the
command in a clear voice.
●Press the switch on the steering
wheel to return to the previous screen.
●If you want to cancel the command, press
and hold the switch. The message,
“Voice cancelled” will be announced.
●If you want to adjust the volume of the sys-
tem feedback, push the volume control
switch on the steering wheel or use the
audio system volume knob while the system
is making an announcement.
●To minimize the amount of prompts spoken
by the system in Alternate Command Mode,
use the Minimize Voice Feedback function.
To access the Minimize Voice Feedback
function press the SETTING button, then
select the “Others” key. Then select the
“Voice Recognition” key.
How to speak numbers
Voice Recognition requires a certain way to
speak numbers when giving voice commands.
Refer to the following examples.
General rule:
●Only single digits 0 (zero) to 9 can be used.
●When saying the phone number 800-662-
6200, the system will accept “eight-
hundred” in addition to “eight zero zero” or
“eight oh oh”. 500, 700, and 900 are also
supported.
Examples:
●1-800-662-6200
– “One eight zero zero six six two six two
zero zero”
– “One eight hundred six six two six two
zero zero”
Improving Recognition of Phone numbers:
You can improve the recognition of phone num-
bers by saying the phone number in three groups
of numbers. For example, when you try to call
800-662-6200, say “eight zero zero” first, and
the system will then ask you for the next three
digits. Then, say “six six two”. After recognition,
the system will then ask for the last four digits.
Say, “six two zero zero”. Using this method of
phone digit entry can improve recognition perfor-
mance.
NOTE:
When speaking a house number, speak the
number “0” as “zero” or “oh”. If the letter
“O” is included in the house number, it will
not be recognized as “0” even if you speak
“oh” instead of “zero”.
Settings menu
The content of the Settings Menu differs when
the system is in the Alternate Command Mode.
Command List:
Displays the command list for Alternate Com-
mand Mode.
User Guide:
The user guide provides basic instructions for
using Voice Recognition and accessing some
voice commands.
NOTE:
The user guide can also be accessed from
within the INFO menu after pressing the
INFO button.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-137
Speaker Adaptation:
Starts a system training procedure to learn the
specific sounds of your voice. See “Speaker ad-
aptation function” in this section.
Alternate Command Mode:
For advanced operation, an Alternate Command
Mode is provided. This setting enables control of
the Audio and Climate Control systems in addi-
tion to additional commands for the Phone and
Navigation systems. With this setting active, the
system does not announce or display the avail-
able commands at each step. When this mode is
activated, the Voice Recognition Settings will
change to show more options.
Minimize Voice Feedback:
Reduces the amount of the information spoken
for each voice instruction.
SPEAKER ADAPTATION FUNCTION
The Voice Recognition system has a function to
learn the user’s voice for better voice recognition
performance. The system can memorize the
voices of up to three persons.
Having the system learn the user’s
voice
1. Press the SETTING button on the instru-
ment panel, select the “Others” key on the
display.
2. Select the “Voice Recognition” key.
3. Select the “Speaker Adaptation” key.
4. Select the user whose voice is to be memo-
rized by the system.
LHA1341 LHA1346
4-138 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
5. Select a category to be learned by the sys-
tem from the following list:
●Phone
●Navigation
●Information
●Audio
●Help
The voice commands in the category are
displayed.
6. Select a voice command to train.
The Voice Recognition system starts.
7. The system requests that you repeat a com-
mand after a tone. This command is also
displayed on the screen.
8. After the tone sounds and the icon on the
screen changes from to , speak
the command that the system requested.
9. When the system has recognized the voice
command, the voice of the user is learned.
Press the switch or select the “Back” key
to return to the previous screen.
If the system has learned the command correctly,
the voice command indicator on the screen turns
on.
Speaker Adaptation function settings
Edit Name:
Edit the user name using the keypad displayed on
the screen.
Reset Result:
Resets the user’s voice that the Voice Recogni-
tion system has learned.
Continuous Learning:
When this item is turned to ON, you can have the
system learn the voice commands in succession,
without selecting commands one by one.
LHA1347 LHA1348 LHA1349
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-139
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
The system should respond correctly to all voice
commands without difficulty. If problems are en-
countered, follow the solutions given in this guide
for the appropriate error.
Where the solutions are listed by number, try
each solution in turn, starting with number one,
until the problem is resolved.
Symptom/error message Solution
Displays “COMMAND NOT RECOG-
NIZED” or the system fails to interpret
the command correctly.
1. Ensure that the command format is valid, see “Standard Mode command list” or “Alternate Command Mode command list” in this
section.
2. Speak clearly using your normal speech pattern and at a level appropriate to the ambient noise level.
3. Ensure that the ambient noise level is not excessive, for example, windows open or defrost on.
NOTE:
If it is too noisy to use the phone, it is likely that voice commands will not be recognized.
The system consistently selects the
wrong voicetag in the phonebook.
1. Ensure that the voicetag requested matches what was originally stored. See “Bluetooth姞Hands-Free Phone System with Navigation
System” in this section.
2. Replace one of the voicetags being confused with a different voicetag.
4-140 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving................5-2
Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..................5-2
Three-way catalyst..............................5-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........5-3
Avoiding collision and rollover....................5-5
Off-road recovery...............................5-6
Rapid air pressure loss ..........................5-6
Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving................5-7
Push-Button Ignition Switch ........................5-7
Push-button ignition switch positions .............5-8
Emergency engine shut off ......................5-8
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ battery discharge ........5-9
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system ..............5-9
Before starting the engine .........................5-10
Starting the engine ...............................5-10
Driving the vehicle ................................5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
(if so equipped) ...............................5-11
Manual transmission (if so equipped) ............5-17
Parking brake ....................................5-19
Cruise control....................................5-20
Precautions on cruise control ...................5-20
Cruise control operations.......................5-20
Break-in schedule ................................5-22
Increasing fuel economy...........................5-22
Parking/parking on hills............................5-23
Power steering ...................................5-24
Brake system ....................................5-24
Brake precautions .............................5-24
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS).................5-25
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .............5-26
Cold weather driving..............................5-28
Freeing a frozen door lock ......................5-28
Anti-freeze....................................5-28
Battery .......................................5-28
Draining of coolant water .......................5-28
Tire equipment ................................5-28
Special winter equipment.......................5-28
Driving on snow or ice .........................5-28
Engine block heater (if so equipped).............5-29
WARNING
●Do not leave children or adults who
would normally require the assistance
of others alone in your vehicle. Pets
should also not be left alone. They
could accidentally injure themselves or
others through inadvertent operation of
the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days,
temperatures in a closed vehicle could
quickly become high enough to cause
severe or possibly fatal injuries to
people or animals.
●Closely supervise children when they
are around cars to prevent them from
playing and becoming locked in the
trunk where they could be seriously in-
jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear
seatback and trunk lid securely latched
when not in use, and prevent children’s
access to car keys.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
●Do not breathe exhaust gases; they
contain colorless and odorless carbon
monoxide. Carbon monoxide is danger-
ous. It can cause unconsciousness or
death.
●If you suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering the vehicle, drive with all win-
dows fully open, and have the vehicle
inspected immediately.
●Do not run the engine in closed spaces
such as a garage.
●Do not park the vehicle with the engine
running for any extended length of time.
●Keep the trunk lid closed while driving,
otherwise exhaust gases could be
drawn into the passenger compart-
ment. If you must drive with the trunk lid
open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
●If electrical wiring or other cable con-
nections must pass to a trailer through
the seal on the trunk lid or the body,
follow the manufacturer’s recommen-
dation to prevent carbon monoxide en-
try into the vehicle.
●The exhaust system and body should be
inspected by a qualified mechanic
whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are
entering into the passenger
compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of
the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving
damage to the exhaust system, un-
derbody, or rear of the vehicle.
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control
device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust
gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at
high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
●The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-
tem are very hot. Keep people, animals
or flammable materials away from the
exhaust system components.
●Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING
AND DRIVING
5-2 Starting and driving
CAUTION
●Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits
from leaded gasoline will seriously re-
duce the three-way catalyst’s ability to
help reduce exhaust pollutants.
●Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-
tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or
electrical systems can cause overrich
fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,
causing it to overheat. Do not keep driv-
ing if the engine misfires, or if notice-
able loss of performance or other un-
usual operating conditions are
detected. Have the vehicle inspected
promptly by a NISSAN dealer.
●Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel
level. Running out of fuel could cause
the engine to misfire, damaging the
three-way catalyst.
●Do not race the engine while warming it
up.
●Do not push or tow your vehicle to start
the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and in-
flated to the inflation pressure recommended by
the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has
tires of a different size than the size indicated on
the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label,
you should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your tires is significantly
under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check all 4 tires as soon as possible, and inflate
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the
system is not operating properly. The TPMS mal-
function indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system detects a
malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon
subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
function exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to detect
or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,
including the installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent
the TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replac-
ing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Starting and driving 5-3
Additional information:
●The TPMS does not monitor the tire
pressure of the spare tire.
●The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle
is driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25
km/h). Also, this system may not detect a
sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a
flat tire while driving).
●The low tire pressure warning light does not
automatically turn off when the tire pressure
is adjusted. After all 4 tires are inflated to the
recommended pressure, the vehicle must be
driven at speeds above 16 MPH (25 km/h)
to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire
pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure
gauge to check the tire pressure.
●The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning ap-
pears in the vehicle information display when
the low tire pressure warning light is illumi-
nated and low tire pressure is detected. The
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning turns off
when the low tire pressure warning light
turns off.
●The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning
does not appear if the low tire pressure
warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS
malfunction.
●Tire pressure rises and falls depending on
the heat caused by the vehicle’s operation
and the outside temperature. Low outside
temperature can lower the temperature of
the air inside the tire which can cause a
lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause
the low tire pressure warning light to illumi-
nate. If the warning light illuminates in low
ambient temperature, check the tire pres-
sure for all four tires.
●The Tire and Loading Information label (also
referred to as the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label) is located in the
driver’s door opening.
For additional information, see “Low tire pressure
warning light” in the “Instruments and controls”
section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in the “In case of emergency” section.
WARNING
●If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible. (See “Flat tire” in the “In case
of emergency” section for changing a
flat tire.)
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, tire pressure will not be
indicated, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
5-4 Starting and driving
CAUTION
Do not place metalized film or any metal
parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This
may cause poor reception of the signals
from the tire pressure sensors, and the
TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily
interfere with the operation of the TPMS and
cause the low tire pressure warning light to illu-
minate.
Some examples are:
– Facilities or electric devices using similar radio
frequencies are near the vehicle.
– If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is
being used in or near the vehicle.
– If a computer (or similar equipment) or a
DC/AC converter is being used in or near the
vehicle.
FCC Notice:
For USA:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful in-
terference, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modification not ex-
pressly approved by the party respon-
sible for compliance could void the us-
er’s authority to operate the
equipment.
For Canada:
This device complies with RSS-210 of In-
dustry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interfer-
ence, include interference that may
cause undesired operation of the de-
vice.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND
ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe
and prudent manner may result in loss of
control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey
all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed,
high speed cornering, or sudden steering ma-
neuvers, because these driving practices could
cause you to lose control of your vehicle. As with
any vehicle, loss of control could result in a
collision with other vehicles or objects or
cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if
the loss of control causes the vehicle to
slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and
avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under
the influence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-
scription or over-the-counter drugs which may
cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as
outlined in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and
supplemental restraint system” section of this
manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions
and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
or improperly belted person is significantly
more likely to be injured or killed than a
person properly wearing a seat belt.
Starting and driving 5-5
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
If the right side or left side wheels leave the road
surface, maintain control of the vehicle by follow-
ing the procedure below. Please note that this
procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle
must be driven as appropriate based on the con-
ditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
4. When appropriate , slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the ve-
hicle to follow the road while vehicle speed
is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the ve-
hicle back onto the road surface until vehicle
speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the
steering wheel until both tires return to the
road surface. When all tires are on the road
surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the ap-
propriate driving lane.
●If you decide that it is not safe to return the
vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle,
road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the
vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can occur
if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to
hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss
can also be caused by driving on under-inflated
tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling
and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway
speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintain-
ing the correct air pressure and visually inspect
the tires for wear and damage. See “Wheels and
tires” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air
pressure or “blows-out” while driving, maintain
control of the vehicle by following the procedure
below. Please note that this procedure is only a
general guide. The vehicle must be driven as
appropriate based on the conditions of the ve-
hicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
The following actions can increase the
chance of losing control of the vehicle if
there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure.
Losing control of the vehicle may cause a
collision and result in personal injury.
●The vehicle generally moves or pulls in
the direction of the flat tire.
●Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
●Do not rapidly release the accelerator
pedal.
●Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not over react.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel
with both hands and try to hold a straight
course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accel-
erator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location
off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually
stop the vehicle.
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and
either contact a roadside emergency service
to change the tire or see “Changing a flat
tire” in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
5-6 Starting and driving
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND
DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol
or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream re-
duces coordination, delays reaction time
and impairs judgement. Driving after
drinking alcohol increases the likelihood
of being involved in an accident injuring
yourself and others. Additionally, if you
are injured in an accident, alcohol can
increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However,
you must choose not to drive under the influence
of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are
injured or killed in alcohol-related accidents. Al-
though the local laws vary on what is considered
to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol
affects all people differently and most people
underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix! And
that is true for drugs, too (over-the-counter, pre-
scription, and illegal drugs). Don’t drive if your
ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alco-
hol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition
switch while driving the vehicle except in
an emergency. (The engine will stop when
the ignition switch is pushed 3 consecu-
tive times in quick succession or the igni-
tion switch is pushed and held for more
than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while
the vehicle is being driven, this could lead
to a crash and serious injury.
When the ignition switch is pushed without de-
pressing the brake pedal (CVT) or the clutch
pedal (M/T), the ignition switch position will illu-
minate as follows:
Push center
●once to change to ACC.
●two times to change to ON.
●three times to return to OFF.
The ignition switch will automatically return to the
LOCK position when any door is either opened or
closed with the switch in the OFF position.
LSD2000
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
Starting and driving 5-7
The ignition lock is designed so that the ignition
switch position cannot be switched to OFF until
the shift selector is moved to the P (Park) position
(CVT) or N (Neutral) position (M/T).
When the ignition switch cannot be pushed to-
ward the OFF position, proceed as follows:
1. Move the shift selector into the P (Park)
position (CVT) or N (Neutral) position (M/T).
2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition switch
position will change to the ON position.
3. Push the ignition switch again to the OFF
position.
The shift selector can be moved from the P
(Park) position if the ignition switch is in
the ON position and the brake pedal is
depressed.
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,
the push-button ignition switch cannot be
moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are
displayed on the vehicle information display. See
“Vehicle information display” in the “Instruments
and controls” section.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position):
The ignition switch can only be locked in this
position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is
pushed to the ACC position while carrying the
Intelligent Key or with the Intelligent Key inserted
in the port.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is
opened or closed with the ignition switched off.
OFF:
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when
the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.
No lights will illuminate on the ignition switch.
ACC (Accessories):
This position activates electrical accessories,
such as the radio, when the engine is not running.
ACC has a battery saver feature that will turn the
ignition switch to the OFF position after 30 min-
utes under the following conditions:
●all doors are closed.
●shift selector is in P (Park).
The battery saver feature will be cancelled if any
of the following occur:
●any door is opened.
●shift selector is moved out of the P (Park).
●ignition switch changes position.
ON (Normal operating position):
This position turns on the ignition system and
electrical accessories.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition
switch in ACC or ON positions when the
engine is not running for an extended pe-
riod. This can discharge the battery.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving perform the following procedure:
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3
consecutive times, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.
5-8 Starting and driving
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the Intelligent Key is almost dis-
charged, the guide light 䊊
Aof the Intelligent Key
port blinks and the indicator appears on the ve-
hicle information display. See “Vehicle informa-
tion display” in the “Instruments and controls”
section.
In this case, inserting the Intelligent Key into the
port 䊊
Ballows you to start the engine. Make sure
the Intelligent Key is placed in the correct direc-
tion: The front side faces upward and the key ring
side faces downward as illustrated.
To remove the Intelligent Key from the port, push
the ignition switch to the LOCK position and pull
the Intelligent Key out of the port 䊊
C.
NOTE:
The Intelligent Key port does not charge
the Intelligent Key battery. If you see the
low battery indicator, replace the battery as
soon as possible. See “Battery replace-
ment” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section.
CAUTION
●Never place anything except the Intelli-
gent Key in the Intelligent Key port. Do-
ing so may cause damage to the
equipment.
●Make sure the Intelligent Key is in the
correct direction when inserting it to
the Intelligent Key port. The engine may
not start if it is in the wrong direction.
●Remove the Intelligent Key from the
Intelligent Key port after the ignition
switch is pushed to the LOCK position.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer system will not
allow the engine to start without the use of the
registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key
(for example, when interference is caused by
another registered key, an automated toll road
device or automatic payment device on the key
ring), restart the engine using the following pro-
cedure:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position
for approximately 5 seconds.
WSD0232 WSD0233
Starting and driving 5-9
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or
LOCK position, and wait approximately 10
seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device
(which may have caused the interference)
separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN rec-
ommends placing the registered key on a sepa-
rate key ring to avoid interference from other
devices.
●Make sure the area around the vehicle is
clear.
●Check fluid levels such as engine oil, cool-
ant, brake fluid, and windshield-washer fluid
as frequently as possible, or at least when-
ever you refuel.
●Check that all windows and lights are clean.
●Visually inspect tires for their appearance
and condition. Also check tires for proper
inflation.
●Lock all doors.
●Position seat and adjust head restraints.
●Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
●Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to
do likewise.
●Check the operation of warning lights when
the ignition switch is pushed to the ON
position. See “Warning/indicator lights and
audible reminders” in the “Instruments and
controls” section of this manual.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) model:
Move the shift selector to P (Park) or N
(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The starter is designed not to operate if
the shift selector is in any of the driving
positions.
Manual transmission (M/T) model:
Move the shift selector to N (Neutral). De-
press the clutch pedal to the floor.
The starter is designed not to operate
unless the clutch pedal is fully de-
pressed.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position.
Depress the brake pedal and the clutch
pedal (if so equipped) and push the ignition
switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and
release the ignition switch while depressing
the brake pedal with the ignition switch in
any position.
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE STARTING THE ENGINE
5-10 Starting and driving
●If the engine is very hard to start in ex-
tremely cold weather or when restarting,
depress the accelerator pedal a little (ap-
proximately 1/3 to the floor) and while
holding, crank the engine. Release the
accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
●If the engine is very hard to start because
it is flooded, depress the accelerator
pedal all the way to the floor and hold it.
Push the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion to start cranking the engine. After 5 or
6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the
ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking
the engine, release the accelerator pedal.
Crank the engine with your foot off the
accelerator pedal by depressing the
brake pedal and pushing the push-button
ignition switch to start the engine. If the
engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the
above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than
15 seconds at a time. If the engine does
not start, push the ignition switch to the
OFF position and wait 10 seconds before
cranking again, otherwise the starter
could be damaged.
4. Warm-up
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 sec-
onds after starting. Do not race the engine
while warming it up. Drive at moderate
speed for a short distance first, especially in
cold weather. In cold weather, keep the en-
gine running for a minimum of2-3minutes
before shutting it off. Starting and stopping
the engine over a short period of time may
make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, shift the shift selector to
the P (Park) position (CVT) or to N (Neutral)
and apply the parking brake (M/T) and push
the ignition switch to the OFF position.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) (if so
equipped)
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
Starting and driving 5-11
WARNING
●Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-
tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive
Sport) or (M) Manual shift mode. Al-
ways depress the brake pedal until
shifting is completed. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control and
have an accident.
●Cold engine idle speed is high, so use
caution when shifting into a forward or
reverse gear before the engine has
warmed up.
●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
●Never shift to P (Park) or R (Reverse)
while the vehicle is moving. This could
cause an accident.
CAUTION
When stopping the vehicle on an uphill
grade, do not hold the vehicle by depress-
ing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake
should be used for this purpose.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically con-
trolled to produce maximum power and smooth
operation.
The CVT can operate in two different automatic
drive modes:
●D (Drive) mode - Move the shift selector to D
(Drive), the transmission is in the normal
forward automatic driving mode. The posi-
tion indicator in the meter shows a “D”. The
D (Drive) mode does not produce a gear
change sensation like a traditional automatic
transmission.
●Ds (Drive Sport) mode - Move the shift se-
lector over from D (Drive) to the left into the
manual shift gate. The position indicator in
the meter shows a “Ds”. In Ds (Drive Sport)
mode, transmission operation changes to
⬙Sporty” driving shift operation, creating a
more aggressive acceleration feeling than
the D (Drive) mode and a gear change sen-
sation when the driver accelerates quickly.
When the driver selects M (Manual) mode
ratio with shift selector during Ds (Drive
Sport) mode operation, the driver must move
the shift selector from Ds mode to D mode
and back again to re-select Ds (Drive Sport)
mode.
●To cancel the Ds mode, return the shift se-
lector to the D (Drive) position. The trans-
mission returns to the automatic drive mode.
WSD0247
5-12 Starting and driving
The CVT can operate in a manual drive mode:
●M (Manual) mode - With the shift selector in
the manual shift gate Ds (Drive Sport) mode,
M (Manual) mode can be selected by mov-
ing the shift selector up (+) or down (–). In M
mode, the transmission will produce notice-
able upshifts and downshifts. The position
indicator in the meter shows a “M”.
Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle
performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically re-
duced to protect the CVT if the engine
speed increases quickly when driving on
slippery roads or while being tested on
some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the
foot brake pedal before moving the shift
selector out of the P (Park) position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and
move the shift selector into a driving gear.
3. Release the foot brake, then gradually start
the vehicle in motion.
4. Stop the vehicle completely before shifting
the shift selector to the P (Park) position.
The CVT is designed so the foot brake
pedal MUST be depressed before shifting
from P (Park) to any drive position while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
The shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park) and into any of the other gear posi-
tions if the ignition switch is pushed to the
LOCK position.
To move the shift selector:
Press the button while depressing the
brake pedal
Press the button to shift
Shift without pressing button
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake
pedal and move the shift selector from P (Park) to
any of the desired shift positions.
WSD0248
Starting and driving 5-13
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift selec-
tor is in any position while the engine is
not running. Failure to do so could cause
the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll
away and result in serious personal injury
or property damage.
P (Park):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift selector position when the
vehicle is parked or when starting the engine.
Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to
move the shift selector from N (Neutral) or
any drive position to P (Park). Apply the
parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the
parking brake first, then move the shift selector
into the P (Park) position.
R (Reverse):
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the
P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only when
the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make
sure the vehicle is completely stopped before
selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake
pedal must be depressed to move the shift
selector from P (Park), N (Neutral) or any
drive position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral):
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The
engine can be started in this position. You may
shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine
while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive):
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
DS (Drive Sport):
When the shift selector is shifted from the D
(Drive) position to the manual shift gate, the
transmission enters the DS (Drive Sport) mode.
Moving the shift selector to the DS (Drive Sport)
position allows you to enjoy “sporty” driving shift
operation on a winding road and feel smooth
acceleration or deceleration on a hilly road by
moving in a lower gear automatically. When can-
celing the DS mode, return the shift selector to
the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns to
the normal driving mode.
5-14 Starting and driving
Manual shift mode (if so equipped)
When the shift selector is in the Ds (Drive Sport)
position, the transmission is ready for the manual
shift mode. Shift ranges can be selected manu-
ally by moving the shift selector up (+) or down
(–). To cancel the Ds mode, return shift selector
to the D (Drive) position. The transmission returns
to automatic driving mode.
When the shift selector is shifted from D (Drive)
to the manual shift gate 䊊
Awith the vehicle
stopped or while driving, the transmission enters
the manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be se-
lected manually. In the manual shift mode, the
shift range is displayed on the position indicator
in the meter. When shifting the shift selector to
the manual shift gate, the position indicator dis-
plays 1 (first) up to 6 (sixth) depending on vehicle
speed.
Shift ranges up or down one by one as follows:
1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5⇔6
M6 (6th):
Use this position for all normal forward driving at
highway speeds.
M5 (5th):
Use this position when driving up long slopes, or
for engine braking when driving down long
slopes.
M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd):
Use for hill climbing or engine braking on downhill
grades.
M1 (1st):
Use this position when climbing steep hills slowly
or driving slowly through deep snow, sand or
mud, or for maximum engine braking on steep
downhill grades.
●Remember not to drive at high speeds for
extended periods of time in lower than 6
range. This reduces fuel economy.
When shifting up:
Move the shift selector to the + (up) side. (Shifts
to higher range.)
When shifting down:
Move the shift selector to the ⫺(down) side.
(Shifts to lower range.)
●The transmission will automatically down-
shift the gears. (For example, if you select the
3rd range, the transmission will shift down
between the 3rd and 1st gears.)
●Moving the shift selector rapidly to the same
side twice will shift the ranges in succession.
When canceling the manual shift mode:
Return the shift selector to the D (Drive) position
to return the transmission to the normal driving
mode.
●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may not shift to the selected gear.
This helps maintain driving perfor-
mance and reduces the chance of ve-
hicle damage or loss of control.
WSD0249
Starting and driving 5-15
●In the manual shift mode, the transmis-
sion may shift up automatically to a
higher range than selected if the en-
gine speed is too high. When the ve-
hicle speed decreases, the transmis-
sion automatically shifts down and
shifts to 1st gear before the vehicle
comes to a stop.
●CVT operation is limited to automatic drive
mode when CVT fluid temperature is ex-
tremely low even if manual shift mode is
selected. This is not a malfunction. When
CVT fluid warms up, manual mode can be
selected.
●When the CVT fluid temperature is high, the
shift range may upshift in lower rpm than
usual. This is not a malfunction.
Shift lock release
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the
shift selector may not be moved from the P (Park)
position even with the brake pedal depressed
and the shift selector button pushed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have your
battery charged, see “Jump starting” in the “In
case of emergency” section. Contact your
NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.
To move the shift selector, complete the following
procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a protective cloth on the tip ofa3mm
screwdriver, remove the shift lock release
cover.
●If available, a plastic trim tool can also be
used.
4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift lock
release slot and push down.
5. Move the shift selector to the N (Neutral)
position while holding down the shift lock
release.
If the shift selector cannot be moved out of P
(Park), have a NISSAN dealer check the trans-
mission as soon as possible.
WARNING
If the shift selector cannot be moved from
the P (Park) position while the engine is
running and the brake pedal is depressed,
the stop lights may not work. Malfunction-
ing stop lights could cause an accident
injuring yourself and others.
WSD0250
5-16 Starting and driving
Accelerator downshift
— in D position —
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accel-
erator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmis-
sion down into a lower gear, depending on the
vehicle speed.
High fluid temperature protection
mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature
protection mode. If the fluid temperature be-
comes too high (for example, when climbing
steep grades in high temperature with heavy
loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine
power and, under some conditions, vehicle
speed will be decreased automatically to reduce
the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle
speed can be controlled with the accelerator
pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be
limited.
Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme con-
ditions, such as excessive wheel spinning
and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe
system may be activated. The MIL may
come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is
activated, see “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” in the “Instrument and controls” sec-
tion. This will occur even if all electrical
circuits are functioning properly. In this
case, place the ignition switch in the OFF
position and wait for 10 seconds. Then
push the switch back to the ON position.
The vehicle should return to its normal op-
erating condition. If it does not return to its
normal operating condition, have a
NISSAN dealer check the transmission and
repair if necessary.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protec-
tion mode or fail-safe operation occurs,
vehicle speed may be gradually reduced.
The reduced speed may be lower than
other traffic, which could increase the
chance of a collision. Be especially care-
ful when driving. If necessary, pull to the
side of the road at a safe place and allow
the transmission to return to normal op-
eration, or have it repaired if necessary.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION (if so
equipped)
WARNING
●Do not downshift abruptly on slippery
roads. This may cause a loss of control.
●Do not over-rev the engine when shift-
ing to a lower gear. This may cause a
loss of control or engine damage.
CAUTION
●Do not rest your foot on the clutch pedal
while driving. This may cause clutch
damage.
●Fully depress the clutch pedal before
shifting to help prevent transmission
damage.
●Stop your vehicle completely before
shifting into R (Reverse).
●When the vehicle is stopped with the
engine running (for example, at a stop
light), shift to N (Neutral) and release
the clutch pedal with the foot brake
applied.
Starting and driving 5-17
Shifting
To change gears or when upshifting or down-
shifting, depress the clutch pedal fully, shift into
the appropriate gear, then release the clutch
slowly and smoothly.
To ensure smooth gear changes, fully depress
the clutch pedal before operating the shift selec-
tor. If the clutch pedal is not fully depressed
before the transmission is shifted, a gear noise
may be heard. Transmission damage may occur.
Start the vehicle in 1st gear and shift to 2nd, 3rd,
4th and 5th up to 6th gear in sequence according
to vehicle speed.
To back up, lift up on the shift selector ring 䊊
1and
then move it to the R (Reverse) position after
stopping the vehicle completely.
The shift selector ring 䊊
1returns to its original
position when the shift selector is moved to the N
(Neutral) position.
If it is difficult to move the shift selector into R
(Reverse) or 1 (1st), shift into N (Neutral), then
release the clutch pedal. Depress the clutch
pedal again and shift into R (Reverse) or 1 (1st).
Suggested up-shift speeds
The following are suggested vehicle speeds for
shifting into a higher gear. These suggestions
relate to fuel economy and vehicle performance.
Actual upshift speeds will vary according to road
conditions, the weather and individual driving
habits.
For normal acceleration in low altitude areas
(less than 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
For QR25DE:
GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)
1st to 2nd 8 (24)
2nd to 3rd 17 (27)
3rd to 4th 25 (40)
4th to 5th 36 (58)
5th to 6th 51 (82)
For VQ35DE:
GEAR CHANGE MPH (km/h)
1st to 2nd 9 (14)
2nd to 3rd 19 (30)
3rd to 4th 26 (42)
4th to 5th 31 (50)
5th to 6th 37 (59)
For acceleration in high altitude areas
(over 4,000 ft [1219 m]):
For QR25DE:
Gear change MPH (km/h)
1st to 2nd 8 (13)
2nd to 3rd 17 (27)
3rd to 4th 25 (40)
4th to 5th 36 (58)
5th to 6th 51 (82)
For VQ35DE:
Gear change MPH (km/h)
1st to 2nd 15 (24)
2nd to 3rd 25 (40)
3rd to 4th 40 (64)
4th to 5th 45 (72)
5th to 6th 50 (80)
LSD0180
5-18 Starting and driving
Suggested maximum speed in each
gear
Downshift to a lower gear if the engine is not
running smoothly, or if you need to accelerate.
Do not exceed the maximum suggested speed
(shown below) in any gear. For level road driving,
use the highest gear suggested for that speed.
Always observe posted speed limits, and drive
according to the road conditions, which will en-
sure safe operation. Do not over-rev the engine
when shifting to a lower gear as it may cause
engine damage or loss of vehicle control.
GEAR QR25DE
MPH (km/h)
VQ35DE
MPH (km/h)
1st 32 (53) 36 (58)
2nd 59 (95) 58 (93)
3rd 82 (133) 81 (131)
4th — —
5th — —
6th — —
WARNING
●Be sure the parking brake is fully re-
leased before driving. Failure to do so
can cause brake failure and lead to an
accident.
●Do not release the parking brake from
outside the vehicle.
●Do not use the shift selector in place of
the parking brake. When parking, be
sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
●Do not leave children unattended in a
vehicle. They could release the parking
brake and cause an accident.
To engage: Type A, firmly depress the parking
brake. Type B, pull the lever up 䊊
A.
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift selector in the N (Neutral)
position.
CVT models:
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) posi-
tion.
Type A
LSD0158
PARKING BRAKE
Starting and driving 5-19
3. Type A, firmly depress the parking brake
pedal and it will release. Type B, while pulling
up on the parking brake lever slightly, push
the button and lower completely 䊊
B.
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning
light goes out.
1. CANCEL switch
2. ACCEL/RES switch
3. COAST/SET switch
4. ON/OFF switch
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE
CONTROL
●If the cruise control system malfunctions, it
cancels automatically. The SET indicator
light in the instrument panel then blinks to
warn the driver.
●If the SET indicator light blinks, turn the
cruise control switch off and have the sys-
tem checked by a NISSAN dealer.
●The SET indicator light may blink when the
cruise control switch is turned ON while
pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or
CANCEL switch. To properly set the cruise
control system, use the following proce-
dures.
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving
under the following conditions:
●When it is not possible to keep the
vehicle at a set speed.
●In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in
speed.
●On winding or hilly roads.
●On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
●In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle
control and result in an accident.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed be-
tween 25 - 89 MPH (40 - 144 km/h) without
keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the
ON·OFF switch. The CRUISE indicator light in
the instrument panel comes on.
Type B
WSD0169 LSD0184
CRUISE CONTROL
5-20 Starting and driving
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to
the desired speed, push the COAST/SET switch
and release it. The SET indicator light in the
instrument panel comes on. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set
speed.
●To pass another vehicle, depress the ac-
celerator pedal. When you release the
pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously
set speed.
●The vehicle may not maintain the set speed
when going up or down steep hills. If this
happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the
following three methods.
●Push the CANCEL button; the SET indicator
light in the instrument panel goes out.
●Tap the brake pedal; the SET indicator light
goes out.
●Push the ON·OFF switch off. Both the
CRUISE indicator light and SET indicator
light in the instrument panel go out.
The cruise control is automatically canceled and
the SET light in the instrument panel goes out if:
●you depress the brake or clutch pedal while
pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST
switch. The preset speed is deleted from
memory.
●the vehicle slows down more than 8 MPH
(13 km/h) below the set speed.
●you depress the clutch pedal (manual trans-
mission), or move the shift selector to N
(Neutral) (CVT).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, push and
release the COAST/SET switch.
●Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.
When the vehicle attains the speed you de-
sire, release the switch.
●Push and release the ACCEL/RES switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed in-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one
of the following three methods.
●Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the ve-
hicle attains the desired speed, push the
COAST/SET switch and release it.
●Push and hold the COAST/SET switch. Re-
lease the switch when the vehicle slows to
the desired speed.
●Push and release the COAST/SET switch.
Each time you do this, the set speed de-
creases by about 1 MPH (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and re-
lease the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle re-
turns to the last set cruising speed when the
vehicle speed is over 25 MPH (40 km/h).
Starting and driving 5-21
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),
follow these recommendations to obtain
maximum engine performance and en-
sure the future reliability and economy of
your new vehicle. Failure to follow these
recommendations may result in short-
ened engine life and reduced engine
performance.
●Avoid driving for long periods at constant
speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the
engine over 4,000 rpm.
●Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
●Avoid quick starts.
●Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
●Do not tow a trailer for the first 500 miles
(800 km). Your engine, axle or other parts
could be damaged.
●Accelerate slowly and smoothly. Maintain
cruising speeds with a constant accelerator
position.
●Drive at moderate speeds on the highway.
Driving at high speed lowers fuel economy.
●Avoid unnecessary stopping and braking.
Maintain a safe distance behind other ve-
hicles.
●Use a proper gear range which suits road
conditions. On level roads, shift into high
gear as soon as possible.
●Avoid unnecessary engine idling.
●Keep your engine tuned up.
●Follow the recommended periodic mainte-
nance schedule.
●Keep the tires inflated to the correct pres-
sure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear
and lowers fuel economy.
●Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Im-
proper alignment increases tire wear and
lowers fuel economy.
●Air conditioner operation lowers fuel
economy. Use the air conditioner only when
necessary.
●When cruising at highway speeds, it is more
economical to use the air conditioner and
leave the windows closed to reduce drag.
●Use the recommended viscosity engine oil.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
5-22 Starting and driving
WARNING
●Do not stop or park the vehicle over
flammable materials such as dry grass,
waste paper or rags. They may ignite
and cause a fire.
●
Safe parking procedures require that
both the parking brake be set and the
transmission placed into P (Park) for CVT
models or in an appropriate gear for
manual transmission models. Failure to
do so could cause the vehicle to move
unexpectedly or roll away and result in an
accident. Make sure the shift selector
has been pushed as far forward as it can
go and cannot be moved without de-
pressing the foot brake pedal.
●Never leave the engine running while
the vehicle is unattended.
●Do not leave children unattended inside
the vehicle. They could unknowingly ac-
tivate switches or controls. Unattended
children could become involved in seri-
ous accidents.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Manual transmission models:
Place the shift selector in the R (Reverse)
position. When parking on an uphill grade,
place the shift selector in 1st gear.
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models:
Move the shift selector to the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into
traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good
practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
●HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
1
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the
vehicle forward until the curb side wheel
gently touches the curb.
●HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB: 䊊
2
Turn the wheels away from the curb and
move the vehicle back until the curb side
wheel gently touches the curb.
●HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB: 䊊
3
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road
so the vehicle will move away from the cen-
ter of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the key.
SSD0488
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
Starting and driving 5-23
The power assisted steering uses a hydraulic
pump, driven by the engine, to assist steering.
If the engine stops or the drive belt breaks, you
will still have control of the vehicle. However,
much greater steering effort is needed, especially
in sharp turns and at low speeds.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off
while driving, the power assist for the
steering will not work. Steering will be
harder to operate.
The brake system has two separate hydraulic
circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still
have braking at 2 wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine
vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the
vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However,
greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be
required to stop the vehicle and stopping dis-
tance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while
driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the
brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the
brakes from overheating, reduce speed and
downshift to a lower gear before going down a
slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may
reduce braking performance and could result in
loss of vehicle control.
WARNING
●While driving on a slippery surface, be
careful when braking, accelerating or
downshifting. Abrupt braking or accel-
erating could cause the wheels to skid
and result in an accident.
●If the engine is not running or is turned
off while driving, the power assist for
the brakes will not work. Braking will be
harder.
Parking brake break-in
Break-in the parking brake shoes whenever the
stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened
or whenever the parking brake shoes and/or
drum/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the
best brake performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service
manual and can be performed by a NISSAN
dealer.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through
water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your
braking distance will be longer and the vehicle
may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe
speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to
heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return
to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high
speeds until the brakes function correctly.
POWER STEERING BRAKE SYSTEM
5-24 Starting and driving
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM
(ABS)
WARNING
●The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) is a
sophisticated device, but it cannot pre-
vent accidents resulting from careless
or dangerous driving techniques. It can
help maintain vehicle control during
braking on slippery surfaces. Remem-
ber that stopping distances on slippery
surfaces will be longer than on normal
surfaces even with ABS. Stopping dis-
tances may also be longer on rough,
gravel or snow covered roads, or if you
are using tire chains. Always maintain a
safe distance from the vehicle in front
of you. Ultimately, the driver is respon-
sible for safety.
●Tire type and condition may also affect
braking effectiveness.
– When replacing tires, install the
specified size of tires on all four
wheels.
– When installing a spare tire, make
sure that it is the proper size and type
as specified on the Tire and Loading
Information label. See “Tire and
Loading Information label” in the
“Technical and consumer informa-
tion” section of this manual.
– For detailed information, see
“Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of
this manual.
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) controls the
brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard
braking or when braking on slippery surfaces.
The system detects the rotation speed at each
wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-
vent each wheel from locking and sliding. By
preventing each wheel from locking, the system
helps the driver maintain steering control and
helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slip-
pery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. De-
press the brake pedal with firm steady pressure,
but do not pump the brakes. The ABS will oper-
ate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer
the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so
may result in increased stopping
distances.
Self-test feature
The ABS includes electronic sensors, electric
pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The
computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that
tests the system each time you start the engine
and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or
reverse. When the self-test occurs, you may hear
a “clunk”noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunc-
tion, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the
ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The
brake system then operates normally, but without
anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the
self-test or while driving, have the vehicle
checked by a NISSAN dealer.
Starting and driving 5-25
Normal operation
The ABS operates at speeds above3-6MPH(5
- 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road
conditions.
When the ABS senses that 1 or more wheels are
close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies
and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is
similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You
may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a
noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from
the actuator when it is operating. This is normal
and indicates that the ABS is operating properly.
However, the pulsation may indicate that road
conditions are hazardous and extra care is re-
quired while driving.
The Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system uses
various sensors to monitor driver inputs and ve-
hicle motion. Under certain driving conditions,
the VDC System helps to perform the following
functions:
●Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel
slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is
transferred to a non slipping drive wheel on
the same axle.
●Controls brake pressure and engine output
to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle
speed (traction control function).
●Controls brake pressure at individual wheels
and engine output to help the driver maintain
control of the vehicle in the following condi-
tions:
– understeer (vehicle tends to not follow
the steered path despite increased steer-
ing input)
– oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to
certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain
control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of
vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the indi-
cator in the instrument panel flashes so note the
following:
●The road may be slippery or the system may
determine some action is required to help
keep the vehicle on the steered path.
●You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal
and hear a noise or vibration from under the
hood. This is normal and indicates that the
VDC system is working properly.
●Adjust your speed and driving to the road
conditions.
See “Slip indicator light” and ”Vehicle Dynamic
Control (VDC) off indicator light” in the ”Instru-
ments and controls” section.
If a malfunction occurs in the system, the
and indicator lights come on in the instru-
ment panel. The VDC system automatically turns
off when these indicator lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC
system. The indicator illuminates to indi-
cate the VDC system is off.
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)
SYSTEM
5-26 Starting and driving
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent
one drive wheel from slipping by transferring
power to a non slipping drive wheel. The
indicator flashes if this occurs. All other VDC
functions are off and the indicator will not
flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to on
when the ignition switch is placed in the off
position then back to the on position.
The computer has a built in diagnostic feature
that tests the system each time you start the
engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse
at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you
may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in
the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an
indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
●The VDC system is designed to help the
driver maintain stability but does not
prevent accidents due to abrupt steer-
ing operation at high speeds or by care-
less or dangerous driving techniques.
Reduce vehicle speed and be especially
careful when driving and cornering on
slippery surfaces and always drive
carefully.
●Do not modify the vehicle’s suspension.
If suspension parts such as shock ab-
sorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars,
bushings and wheels are not NISSAN
recommended for your vehicle or are
extremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly. This could
adversely affect vehicle handling per-
formance, and the indicator may
flash or both the and indi-
cator lights may illuminate.
●If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, the VDC system may not
operate properly and both the
and the indicator lights may
illuminate.
●If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are extremely
deteriorated, both the and
indicator lights may illuminate.
●When driving on extremely inclined sur-
faces such as higher banked corners,
the VDC system may not operate prop-
erly and the indicator may flash or
both the and indicator
lights may illuminate. Do not drive on
these types of roads.
●When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the indicator may flash or
both the and indicator
lights may illuminate. This is not a mal-
function. Restart the engine after driv-
ing onto a stable surface.
●If wheels or tires other than the NISSAN
recommended ones are used, the VDC
system may not operate properly and
the indicator may flash or both
the and indicator lights may
illuminate.
●The VDC system is not a substitute for
winter tires or tire chains on a snow
covered road.
Starting and driving 5-27
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-
icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes
frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key
hole or use the remote keyless entry function on
the Intelligent Key.
ANTI-FREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the tem-
perature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the
anti-freeze to assure proper winter protection.
For details, see “Engine cooling system” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely
cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may
freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maxi-
mum efficiency, the battery should be checked
regularly. For details, see “Battery” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without anti-
freeze, drain the cooling system, including the
engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle.
For details, see “Changing engine coolant” in the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to
provide superior performance on dry pave-
ment. However, the performance of these
tires will be substantially reduced in snowy
and icy conditions. If you operate your ve-
hicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recom-
mends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL
SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. Please
consult a NISSAN dealer for the tire type,
size, speed rating and availability informa-
tion.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded
tires may be used. However, some U.S.
states and Canadian provinces prohibit their
use. Check local, state and provincial laws
before installing studded tires.
Skid and traction capabilities of studded
snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
3. Tire chains may be used. For details see
“Tire chains” in the “Maintenance and do-it-
yourself” section of this manual.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be
carried in the vehicle during winter:
●A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove
ice and snow from the windows and wiper
blades.
●A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the
jack to give it firm support.
●A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
●Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
●Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),
very cold snow or ice can be slick and
very hard to drive on. The vehicle will
have much less traction or “grip” under
these conditions. Try to avoid driving on
wet ice until the road is salted or
sanded.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
5-28 Starting and driving
●Whatever the condition, drive with cau-
tion. Accelerate and slow down with
care. If accelerating or downshifting too
fast, the drive wheels will lose even
more traction.
●Allow more stopping distance under
these conditions. Braking should be
started sooner than on dry pavement.
●Allow greater following distances on
slippery roads.
●Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).
These may appear on an otherwise
clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of
ice is seen ahead, brake before reach-
ing it. Try not to brake while on the ice,
and avoid any sudden steering
maneuvers.
●Do not use the cruise control on slip-
pery roads.
●Snow can trap dangerous exhaust
gases under your vehicle. Keep snow
clear of the exhaust pipe and from
around your vehicle.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so
equipped)
WARNING
●Do not use your engine block heater
with an ungrounded electrical system
or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be se-
riously injured by an electrical shock if
you use an ungrounded connection.
●Disconnect and properly store the en-
gine block heater cord before starting
the engine. Damage to the cord could
result in an electrical shock and can
cause serious injury.
●Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged ex-
tension cord rated for at least 10 A. Plug
the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded
110-VAC outlet. Failure to use the
proper extension cord or a grounded
outlet can result in a fire or electrical
shock and cause serious personal
injury.
Engine block heaters are available through
NISSAN dealers to assist in cold temperature
starting. The engine block heater should be used
when the outside temperature is 20° F (-7° C) or
lower.
To use the engine block heater:
1. Turn the engine off.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine block
heater cord.
3. Plug the engine block heater cord into a
grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged extension
cord.
4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground Fault
Interrupt (GFI) protected, grounded 110-
volt AC (VAC) outlet.
5. The engine block heater must be plugged in
for at least2-4hours, depending on outside
temperatures, to properly warm the engine
coolant. Use an appropriate timer to turn the
engine block heater on.
6. Before starting the engine, unplug and prop-
erly store the cord to keep it away from
moving parts.
Starting and driving 5-29
MEMO
5-30 Starting and driving
6 In case of emergency
Emergency engine shut off .........................6-2
Flat tire ...........................................6-2
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..........6-2
Changing a flat tire .............................6-3
Jump starting .....................................6-8
Push starting.....................................6-10
If your vehicle overheats ...........................6-10
Towing your vehicle ...............................6-11
Towing recommended by NISSAN ..............6-12
Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle) .........6-14
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation
while driving perform the following procedure:
– Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch 3
consecutive times, or
– Push and hold the push-button ignition switch
for more than 2 seconds.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pres-
sure of all tires except the spare. When the low
tire pressure warning light is lit, and the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE warning appears in the vehicle
information display, one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being
driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will acti-
vate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure
warning light. This system will activate only when
the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). For more details, refer to
“Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders”
in the “Instruments and controls” section, and
“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the
“Starting and driving” section.
WARNING
●If the low tire pressure warning light
illuminates while driving, avoid sudden
steering maneuvers or abrupt braking,
reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road
to a safe location and stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Driving with under-
inflated tires may permanently damage
the tires and increase the likelihood of
tire failure. Serious vehicle damage
could occur and may lead to an acci-
dent and could result in serious per-
sonal injury. Check the tire pressure for
all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to
the recommended COLD tire pressure
shown on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label to turn the low tire pressure
warning light OFF. If you have a flat tire,
replace it with a spare tire as soon as
possible.
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS will not function
and the low tire pressure warning light
will flash for approximately 1 minute.
The light will remain on after 1 minute.
Contact your NISSAN dealer as soon as
possible for tire replacement and/or
system resetting.
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE
6-2 In case of emergency
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS.
●Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol
tire sealant into the tires, as this may
cause a malfunction of the tire pressure
sensors.
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions be-
low:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and
away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking
brake. Shift the manual transmission into R
(Reverse), or the CVT into P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to
signal professional road assistance person-
nel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle
and stand in a safe place, away from traffic
and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
●Make sure the parking brake is securely
applied and the manual transmission is
shifted into R (Reverse), or the CVT is
shifted into P (Park).
●Never change tires when the vehicle is
on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is
hazardous.
●Never change tires if oncoming traffic is
close to your vehicle. Wait for profes-
sional road assistance.
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks 䊊
1at both the front and
back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire
䊊
2to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is
jacked up.
WARNING
Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle
may move and result in personal injury.
WCE0044
In case of emergency 6-3
Getting the spare tire and tools
Open the trunk. Lift the trunk floor carpeting and
spare tire cover. Remove the jack 䊊
1and wheel
nut wrench 䊊
2from the tool box.
Sedan
LCE0137
Coupe
WCE0200
Sedan
WCE0193
6-4 In case of emergency
Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire. Remove
the spare tire.
Removing the bolt-on wheel cover (if
so equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel
caps or wheel covers. Doing so could re-
sult in personal injury.
The wheel covers are held on by the wheel nuts.
The wheel cover will be removed along with the
wheel when the nuts are removed.
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod 䊊
B
as illustrated.
Apply cloth 䊊
Abetween the wheel and jack rod to
prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or
wheel surface.
Coupe
WCE0201 LCE0183
In case of emergency 6-5
Jacking up vehicle and removing the
damaged tire
WARNING
●Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by the jack. If it is nec-
essary to work under the vehicle, sup-
port it with safety stands.
●Use only the jack provided with your
vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the
jack provided with your vehicle on other
vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting
only your vehicle during a tire change.
●Use the correct jack-up points. Never
use any other part of the vehicle for jack
support.
●Never jack up the vehicle more than
necessary.
●Never use blocks on or under the jack.
●Do not start or run the engine while
vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the
vehicle to move. This is especially true
for vehicles with limited slip
differentials.
●Do not allow passengers to stay in the
vehicle while it is on the jack.
●Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off
the ground. It may cause the vehicle to
move.
Jack-up point coupe
WCE0147
Jack-up point sedan
WCE0160
6-6 In case of emergency
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the
correct placement and jack-up points for your
specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to
the jack body and the following instruc-
tions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two turns by
turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut
wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts
until the tire is off the ground.
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up
point as illustrated so the top of the jack
contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point.
Align the jack head between the two
notches in the front or the rear as shown.
Also fit the groove of the jack head between
the notches as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and
level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever
and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the
vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Re-
move the wheel nuts, and then remove the
tire.
Installing the spare tire
The spare tire is designed for emergency
use. See specific instructions under the
heading “Wheels and tires” in the “Mainte-
nance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface be-
tween the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten
the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel
nuts alternately and evenly as illustrated until
they are tight.
LCE0020 WCE0056
In case of emergency 6-7
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire
touches the ground. Then, with the wheel
nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely
in the sequence illustrated (䊊
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D,
䊊
E). Lower the vehicle completely.
WARNING
●Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly
tightened wheel nuts can cause the
wheel to become loose or come off.
This could cause an accident.
●Do not use oil or grease on the wheel
studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts
to become loose.
●Retighten the wheel nuts when the ve-
hicle has been driven for 600 miles
(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,
etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts
to the specified torque with a torque
wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to
specification at all times. It is recom-
mended that wheel nuts be tightened to
specifications at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been
parked for three hours or more or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the tire
and loading information label affixed to the
driver side center pillar.
5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking equip-
ment in the vehicle.
6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk floor
carpeting over the damaged tire.
7. Close the trunk.
WARNING
●Always make sure that the spare tire
and jacking equipment are properly se-
cured after use. Such items can become
dangerous projectiles in an accident or
sudden stop.
●The spare tire is designed for emer-
gency use. See specific instructions un-
der the heading “Wheels and tires” in
the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself”
section of this manual.
To start your engine with a booster battery, the
instructions and precautions below must be fol-
lowed.
WARNING
●If done incorrectly, jump starting can
lead to a battery explosion, resulting in
severe injury or death. It could also
damage your vehicle.
●Explosive hydrogen gas is always pres-
ent in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all
sparks and flames away from the
battery.
●Do not allow battery fluid to come into
contact with eyes, skin, clothing or
painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a cor-
rosive sulfuric acid solution which can
cause severe burns. If the fluid should
come into contact with anything, imme-
diately flush the contacted area with
water.
●Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
●The booster battery must be rated at 12
volts. Use of an improperly rated battery
can damage your vehicle.
JUMP STARTING
6-8 In case of emergency
●Whenever working on or near a battery,
always wear suitable eye protectors (for
example, goggles or industrial safety
spectacles) and remove rings, metal
bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean
over the battery when jump starting.
●Do not attempt to jump start a frozen
battery. It could explode and cause se-
rious injury.
●Your vehicle has an automatic engine
cooling fan. It could come on at any
time. Keep hands and other objects
away from it.
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below.
Failure to do so could result in damage to
the charging system and cause personal
injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle,
position the two vehicles to bring their bat-
teries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift se-
lector to N (Neutral) (manual transmission)
or to P (Park) (Continuously Variable Trans-
mission). Switch off all unnecessary electri-
cal systems (lights, heater, air conditioner,
etc.).
3. Remove vent caps on the battery (if so
equipped). Cover the battery with an old
cloth to reduce explosion hazard.
4. Connect jumper cables in the sequence il-
lustrated (䊊
A,䊊
B,䊊
C,䊊
D).
WCE0054
In case of emergency 6-9
CAUTION
●Always connect positive (⫹) to positive
(⫹) and negative (⫺) to body ground (for
example, strut mounting bolt, engine
lift bracket, etc.) — not to the battery.
●Make sure the jumper cables do not
touch moving parts in the engine com-
partment and that the cable clamps do
not contact any other metal.
5. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and
let it run for a few minutes.
6. Keep the engine speed of the booster ve-
hicle at about 2,000 rpm, and start the en-
gine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for
more than 10 seconds. If the engine does
not start right away, turn the key off and
wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
7. After starting the engine, carefully discon-
nect the negative cable and then the positive
cable.
8. Replace the vent caps (if so equipped). Be
sure to dispose of the cloth used to cover
the vent holes as it may be contaminated
with corrosive acid.
CAUTION
●Do not push start this vehicle. The
three-way catalyst may be damaged.
●Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) models cannot be push-started or
tow-started. Attempting to do so may
cause transmission damage.
●For manual transmission (M/T) models,
never try to start the vehicle by towing
it. When the engine starts, the forward
surge could cause the vehicle to collide
with the tow vehicle.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by an
extremely high temperature gauge reading), or if
you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal
noise, etc., take the following steps.
WARNING
●Do not continue to drive if your vehicle
overheats. Doing so could cause engine
damage or a vehicle fire.
●To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never remove the radiator cap while the
engine is still hot. When the radiator
cap is removed, pressurized hot water
will spurt out, possibly causing serious
injury.
●Do not open the hood if steam is com-
ing out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply
the parking brake and move the shift selector
to N (Neutral) (manual transmission) or to P
(Park) (CVT).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the
windows, move the heater or air conditioner
temperature control to maximum hot and fan
control to high speed.
PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
6-10 In case of emergency
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for
steam or coolant escaping from the radiator
before opening the hood. (If steam or cool-
ant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not
open the hood further until no steam or
coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the en-
gine, stand clear to prevent getting
burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or
looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is
running. The radiator hoses and radiator
should not leak water. If coolant is leaking,
the water pump belt is missing or loose, or
the cooling fan does not run, stop the en-
gine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,
jewelry or clothing to come into contact
with, or get caught in, engine belts or the
engine cooling fan. The engine cooling
fan can start at any time.
6. After the engine cools down, check the cool-
ant level in the engine coolant reservoir tank
with the engine running. Add coolant to the
engine coolant reservoir tank, if necessary.
Have your vehicle repaired at a NISSAN
dealer.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in
Canada) and local regulations for towing must be
followed. Incorrect towing equipment could dam-
age your vehicle. Towing instructions are avail-
able from a NISSAN dealer. Local service opera-
tors are generally familiar with the applicable laws
and procedures for towing. To assure proper
towing and to prevent accidental damage to your
vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service
operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have
the service operator carefully read the following
precautions:
WARNING
●Never ride in a vehicle that is being
towed.
●Never get under your vehicle after it has
been lifted by a tow truck.
CAUTION
●When towing, make sure that the trans-
mission, axles, steering system and
powertrain are in working condition. If
any of these conditions apply, dollies or
a flatbed tow truck must be used.
●Always attach safety chains before
towing.
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
In case of emergency 6-11
For information about towing your vehicle behind
a recreational vehicle (RV), refer to “Flat towing”
in the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY
NISSAN
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed
with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or
place the vehicle on a flat bed truck as illustrated.
䊊
A(CVT)
䊊
B(M/T)
WCE0194
6-12 In case of emergency
CAUTION
●Never tow Continuously Variable Trans-
mission (CVT) models with the front
wheels on the ground or four wheels on
the ground (forward or backward), as
this may cause serious and expensive
damage to the transmission. If it is nec-
essary to tow the vehicle with the rear
wheels raised always use towing dollies
under the front wheels.
●When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) models with the
front wheels on towing dollies, or when
towing manual transmission (M/T)
models with the front wheels on the
ground:
– Place the ignition switch in the OFF
position, and secure the steering
wheel in a straight-ahead position
with a rope or similar device.
– Move the shift selector to the N (Neu-
tral) position.
●When towing Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) or manual trans-
mission models (M/T) with the rear
wheels on the ground (if you do not use
towing dollies): Always release the
parking brake.
●Observe the following restricted towing
speeds and distances for manual trans-
missions (M/T) only:
– Speed: Below 50 MPH (80 km/h)
– Distance: Less than 50 miles (80 km)
䊊
A(CVT)
䊊
B(M/T)
WCE0195
In case of emergency 6-13
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck
vehicle)
Pulling a stuck vehicle
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-
sonal injury or death when recovering a
stuck vehicle:
●Contact a professional towing service
to recover the vehicle if you have any
questions regarding the recovery
procedure.
●Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow
or free a stuck vehicle.
●Only use devices specifically designed
for vehicle recovery and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions.
●Always pull the recovery device straight
out from the front of the vehicle. Never
pull at an angle.
●Route recovery devices so they do not
touch any part of the vehicle except the
attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use
a tow strap or other device designed specifically
for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufactur-
er’s instructions for the recovery device.
Do not use the tie-down hooks for towing or
vehicle recovery.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
●Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
●Do not spin your tires at high speed.
This could cause them to explode and
result in serious injury. Parts of your
vehicle could also overheat and be
damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc.,
use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control Sys-
tem.
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the
vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear
an area around the front tires.
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and back-
ward.
●Shift back and forth between R (Reverse)
and D (Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low)
and R (Reverse) (M/T models).
●Apply the accelerator as little as possible
to maintain the rocking motion.
●Release the accelerator pedal before
shifting between R (Reverse) and D
(Drive) (CVT models) or 1st (Low) and R
(Reverse) (M/T models).
●Do not spin the tires above 35 mph (55
km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few
tries, contact a professional towing service
to remove the vehicle.
LCE0138
6-14 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior ..................................7-2
Washing ......................................7-2
Waxing ........................................7-2
Removing spots ................................7-3
Underbody ....................................7-3
Glass .........................................7-3
Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) ...........7-3
Chrome parts ..................................7-4
Tire dressings ..................................7-4
Cleaning interior...................................7-4
Air fresheners ..................................7-5
Floor mats .....................................7-5
Seat belts .....................................7-6
Corrosion protection ...............................7-6
Most common factors contributing to vehicle
corrosion ......................................7-6
Environmental factors influence the rate of
corrosion ......................................7-6
To protect your vehicle from corrosion ............7-6
In order to maintain the appearance of your ve-
hicle, it is important to take proper care of it.
To protect the paint surfaces, please wash your
vehicle as soon as you can:
●after a rainfall to prevent possible damage
from acid rain.
●after driving on coastal roads.
●when contaminants such as soot, bird drop-
pings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get
on the paint surface.
●when dust or mud builds up on the surface.
Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle
inside a garage or in a covered area.
When it is necessary to park outside, park in a
shady area or protect the vehicle with a body
cover.
Be careful not to scratch the paint surface
when putting on or removing the body
cover.
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of
water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild
soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose
dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm
(never hot) water.
CAUTION
●Do not use car washes that use acid in
the detergent. Some car washes, espe-
cially brushless ones, use some acid for
cleaning. The acid may react with some
plastic vehicle components, causing
them to crack. This could affect their
appearance, and also could cause them
not to function properly. Always check
with your car wash to confirm that acid
is not used.
●Do not wash the vehicle with strong
household soap, strong chemical deter-
gents, gasoline or solvents.
●Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-
light or while the vehicle body is hot, as
the surface may become water-spotted.
●Avoid using tight-napped or rough
cloths, such as washing mitts. Care
must be taken when removing
caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-
stances so the paint surface is not
scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean
water.
Inside flanges, seams and folds on the doors,
hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to
the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas
must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the
drain holes in the lower edge of the door are
open. Spray water under the body and in the
wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away
road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to
avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and
helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is
recommended to remove built-up wax residue
and to avoid a weathered appearance before
re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the
proper product.
●Wax your vehicle only after a thorough wash-
ing. Follow the instructions supplied with the
wax.
●Do not use a wax containing any abrasives,
cutting compounds or cleaners that may
damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing
on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the
finish or leave swirl marks.
CLEANING EXTERIOR
7-2 Appearance and care
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects,
and tree sap as quickly as possible from the
surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or
staining. Special cleaning products are available
at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory
store.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is
necessary to clean the underbody regularly in
order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and
causing the acceleration of corrosion on the un-
derbody and suspension. Before the winter pe-
riod and again in the spring, the underseal must
be checked and, if necessary, retreated. GLASS
When cleaning the rear window, it may be easier
to clean if the high-mounted stop light (if so
equipped) is removed first.
Be careful when removing the high-mounted
stop light to reduce the risk of damaging the
high-mounted stop light wires.
To remove the high-mounted stop light:
䊊
1Push toward rear of vehicle.
䊊
2Lift to remove.
The high-mounted stop light must be properly
reinstalled before driving your vehicle.
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film
from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to
become coated with a film after the vehicle is
parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft
cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows,
do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive
cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant
cleaners. They could damage the electri-
cal conductors, radio antenna elements or
rear window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so
equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge damp-
ened in a mild soap solution, especially during
winter months in areas where road salt is used. If
not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid
staining or discoloring the wheels:
●Do not use a cleaner that uses strong
acid or alkali contents to clean the
wheels.
WAI0005
Appearance and care 7-3
●Do not apply wheel cleaners to the
wheels when they are hot. The wheel
temperature should be the same as am-
bient temperature.
●Rinse the wheel to completely remove
the cleaner within 15 minutes after the
cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-
abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire
dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to
the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rub-
ber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may
react with the coating and form a compound. This
compound may come off the tire while driving and
stain the vehicle paint.
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the
following precautions:
●Use a water-based tire dressing. The coat-
ing on the tire dissolves more easily than
with an oil-based tire dressing.
●Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help
prevent it from entering the tire
tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to
remove).
●Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry
towel. Make sure the tire dressing is com-
pletely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
●Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-
mended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior
trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum
cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and
leather surfaces with a clean, soft cloth damp-
ened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a
dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to
maintain the appearance of the leather.
Before using any fabric protector, read the manu-
facturer’s recommendations. Some fabric pro-
tectors contain chemicals that may stain or
bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean
the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot
steam cleaners) on the seat. This can
damage the seat or occupant classifica-
tion sensor. This can also affect the opera-
tion of the air bag system and result in
serious personal injury.
CLEANING INTERIOR
7-4 Appearance and care
CAUTION
●Never use benzine, thinner or any simi-
lar material.
●Small dirt particles can be abrasive and
damaging to leather surfaces and
should be removed promptly. Do not
use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes,
oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents or ammonia-based cleaners as
they may damage the leather’s natural
finish.
●Never use fabric protectors unless rec-
ommended by the manufacturer.
●Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on
meter or gauge lens covers. It may dam-
age the lens cover.
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect
the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener,
take the following precautions:
●Hanging-type air fresheners can cause per-
manent discoloration when they contact ve-
hicle interior surfaces. Place the air fresh-
ener in a location that allows it to hang free
and not contact an interior surface.
●Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on
the vents. These products can cause imme-
diate damage and discoloration when
spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions before using the air fresheners.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that
may result in a collision or injury:
●NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-
other floor mat in the driver front
position.
●Use only genuine NISSAN floor mats
specifically designed for use in your ve-
hicle model. See your NISSAN dealer
for more information.
●Properly position the mats in the floor-
well using the floor mat positioning aid.
See ⴖFloor mat positioning aidⴖin this
section.
The use of genuine NISSAN floor mats can ex-
tend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it
easier to clean the interior. Mats should be main-
tained with regular cleaning and replaced if they
become excessively worn.
Floor mat positioning aid
This vehicle includes a front floor mat bracket to
act as a floor mat positioning aid. Genuine
NISSAN floor mats have been specially designed
for your vehicle model. The driver’s and passen-
ger’s side floor mats have a grommet hole incor-
porated in them. Position the mat by placing the
floor mat bracket hook through the floor mat
grommet hole while centering the mat in the
floorwell.
Periodically check to make certain the mats are
properly positioned.
LPD0477
Appearance and care 7-5
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them
with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution.
Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade
before using them. See “Seat belt maintenance”
in the “Safety – Seats, seat belts and supplemen-
tal restraint system” section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the
retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or
chemical solvents to clean the seat belts,
since these materials may severely
weaken the seat belt webbing.
MOST COMMON FACTORS
CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE
CORROSION
●The accumulation of moisture-retaining dirt
and debris in body panel sections, cavities,
and other areas.
●Damage to paint and other protective coat-
ings caused by gravel and stone chips or
minor traffic accidents.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS
INFLUENCE THE RATE OF
CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the ve-
hicle body underside can accelerate corrosion.
Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside
the vehicle and should be removed for drying to
avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high
relative humidity, especially those areas where
the temperatures stay above freezing and where
atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is
used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corro-
sion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air
in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use acceler-
ates the corrosion process. Road salt also accel-
erates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
TO PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE
FROM CORROSION
●Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the
vehicle clean.
●Always check for minor damage to the paint
and repair it as soon as possible.
●Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors
open to avoid water accumulation.
●Check the underbody for accumulation of
sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water
as soon as possible.
CORROSION PROTECTION
7-6 Appearance and care
CAUTION
●NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-
bris from the passenger compartment
by washing it out with a hose. Remove
dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
●Never allow water or other liquids to
come in contact with electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as this may
damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are
extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion
and deterioration of underbody components
such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines,
brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned
periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corro-
sion, which may be required in some areas, con-
sult a NISSAN dealer.
Appearance and care 7-7
8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Maintenance requirements..........................8-2
General maintenance ..............................8-2
Explanation of general maintenance items .........8-2
Maintenance precautions . . .........................8-5
Engine compartment check locations ................8-6
Engine cooling system .............................8-8
Checking engine coolant level ...................8-9
Changing engine coolant ........................8-9
Engine oil........................................8-10
Checking engine oil level .......................8-10
Changing engine oil ...........................8-11
Changing engine oil filter .......................8-12
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
(if so equipped) ..................................8-13
Power steering fluid...............................8-14
Brake and clutch (if so equipped) fluid ..............8-14
Brake fluid ....................................8-15
Clutch fluid (if so equipped) ....................8-15
Windshield-washer fluid...........................8-15
Windshield-washer fluid reservoir ...............8-15
Battery ..........................................8-16
Jump starting .................................8-17
Variable voltage control system.....................8-18
Drive belt ........................................8-18
Spark plugs. .....................................8-19
Replacing spark plugs .........................8-19
Air cleaner .......................................8-20
In-cabin microfilter.............................8-21
Windshield wiper blades ..........................8-21
Cleaning .....................................8-21
Replacing ....................................8-21
Brakes ..........................................8-22
Self-adjusting brakes ..........................8-22
Brake pad wear indicators ......................8-22
Fuses ...........................................8-23
Engine compartment...........................8-24
Passenger compartment .......................8-25
Battery replacement ..............................8-27
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ .......................8-27
Lights ...........................................8-28
Headlights....................................8-28
Front park/turn/sidemarker light .................8-29
Exterior and interior lights.......................8-30
Upper tether anchor/key cylinder covers ............8-36
Removing covers from rear parcel shelf ..........8-37
Installing covers to rear parcel shelf..............8-37
Wheels and tires .................................8-38
Tire pressure..................................8-38
Tire labeling...................................8-42
Types of tires..................................8-45
Tire chains....................................8-46
Changing wheels and tires .....................8-47
Your NISSAN has been designed to have mini-
mum maintenance requirements with long ser-
vice intervals to save you both time and money.
However, some day-to-day and regular mainte-
nance is essential to maintain your NISSAN’s
good mechanical condition, as well as its emis-
sions and engine performance.
It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that
the scheduled maintenance, as well as general
maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who
can ensure that your vehicle receives proper
maintenance. You are a vital link in the mainte-
nance chain.
Scheduled maintenance
For your convenience, both required and optional
scheduled maintenance items are described and
listed in your “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide”. You must refer to that guide to ensure
that necessary maintenance is performed on your
NISSAN at regular intervals.
General maintenance
General maintenance includes those items which
should be checked during normal day-to-day op-
eration. They are essential for proper vehicle op-
eration. It is your responsibility to perform these
maintenance procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires
minimal mechanical skill and only a few general
automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by you,
a qualified technician, or, if you prefer, a NISSAN
dealer.
Where to go for service
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle
appears to malfunction, have the systems
checked and corrected by a NISSAN dealer.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists
who are kept up-to-date with the latest service
information through technical bulletins, service
tips, and in-dealership training programs. They
are completely qualified to work on NISSAN ve-
hicles before they work on your vehicle, rather
than after they have worked on it.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer’s
service department performs the best job to meet
the maintenance requirements on your vehicle —
in a reliable and economical way.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the
vehicle, general maintenance should be per-
formed regularly as prescribed in this section. If
you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or
smells, be sure to check for the cause or have a
NISSAN dealer do it promptly. In addition, you
should notify a NISSAN dealer if you think that
repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance
work, closely observe the “Maintenance precau-
tions” later in this section.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL
MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following
items with“*”isfound later in this section.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
performed from time to time, unless otherwise
specified.
Doors and engine hood Check that the doors
and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure
that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges,
latches, latch pins, rollers and links as necessary.
Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the
hood from opening when the primary latch is
released.
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE
8-2 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
When driving in areas using road salt or other
corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights* Clean the headlights on a regular basis.
Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail
lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all
operating properly and installed securely. Also
check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)* When checking
the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing,
and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if
necessary.
Tire rotation* Tires should be rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km).
Tires* Check the pressure with a gauge often
and always prior to long distance trips. If neces-
sary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the
spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully
for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
transmitter components Replace the TPMS
transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap
when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance If the vehicle
should pull to either side while driving on a
straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or
abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel
alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at
normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be
needed.
●For additional information regarding tires,
refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”
(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in
the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield Clean the windshield on a regular
basis. Check the windshield at least every six
months for cracks or other damage. Have a dam-
aged windshield repaired by a qualified repair
facility.
Windshield wiper blades* Check for cracks or
wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked on a regular basis, such as when per-
forming periodic maintenance, cleaning the ve-
hicle, etc.
Additional information on the following
items with an “*” is found later in this sec-
tion.
Accelerator pedal Check the pedal for smooth
operation and make sure the pedal does not bind
or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away
from the pedal.
Brake pedal Check the pedal for smooth opera-
tion. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down fur-
ther than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the
vehicle seems to take longer to stop, see a
NISSAN dealer immediately. Keep the floor mat
away from the pedal.
Brakes Check that the brakes do not pull the
vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
P (Park) position mechanism On a fairly
steep hill, check that the vehicle is held securely
with the shift selector in the P (Park) position
without applying any brakes.
Parking brake Check the parking brake opera-
tion regularly. The vehicle should be securely held
on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake
applied. If the parking brake needs adjustment,
see a NISSAN dealer.
Seats Check seat position controls such as seat
adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they
operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in
every position. Check that the head restraints
move up and down smoothly and the lock knobs
(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched posi-
tions.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-3
Seat belts Check that all parts of the seat belt
system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters
and retractors) operate properly and smoothly,
and are installed securely. Check the belt web-
bing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel Check for changes in the steer-
ing system, such as excessive freeplay, hard
steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes Make sure all
warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield wiper and washer* Check that
the wipers and washer operate properly and that
the wipers do not streak.
Windshield defroster Check that the air
comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in
sufficient quantity when operating the heater or
air conditioner.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be
checked periodically (for example, each time you
check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery* Check the fluid level in each cell. It
should be between the MAX and MIN lines. Ve-
hicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
Brake and clutch fluid levels* Make sure that
the brake and clutch fluid level is between the
MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level* Check the coolant level
when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belts* Make sure the drive belts
are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level* Check the level after parking
the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off.
Wait more than 10 minutes for the oil to drain
back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system Make sure there are no loose
supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the
exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of
exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust
system inspected by a NISSAN dealer. See “Ex-
haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the “Starting
and driving” section of this manual.
Fluid leaks Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil,
water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has
been parked for a while. Water dripping from the
air conditioner after use is normal. If you should
notice any leaks or if gasoline fumes are evident,
check for the cause and have it corrected imme-
diately.
Power steering fluid level* and lines Check
the level when the fluid is cold, with the engine
off. Check the lines for proper attachment, leaks,
cracks, etc.
Radiator and hoses Check the front of the
radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves,
etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the
hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose
connections.
Underbody The underbody is frequently ex-
posed to corrosive substances such as those
used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very
important to remove these substances from the
underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor
pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the
end of winter, the underbody should be thor-
oughly flushed with plain water, in those areas
where mud and dirt may have accumulated. See
the “Appearance and care” section of this
manual.
Windshield–washer fluid* Check that there is
adequate fluid in the reservoir.
8-4 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
When performing any inspection or maintenance
work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent
serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to
the vehicle. The following are general precau-
tions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
●Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-
ply the parking brake securely and
block the wheels to prevent the vehicle
from moving. For manual transmission
models, move the shift selector to N
(Neutral). For CVT models, move the
shift selector to P (Park).
●Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF
or LOCK position when performing any
parts replacement or repairs.
●If you must work with the engine run-
ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair
and tools away from moving fans, belts
and any other moving parts.
●It is advisable to secure or remove any
loose clothing and remove any jewelry,
such as rings, watches, etc. before
working on your vehicle.
●Always wear eye protection whenever
you work on your vehicle.
●If you must run the engine in an en-
closed space such as a garage, be sure
there is proper ventilation for exhaust
gases to escape.
●Never get under the vehicle while it is
supported only by a jack. If it is neces-
sary to work under the vehicle, support
it with safety stands.
●Keep smoking materials, flame and
sparks away from the fuel tank and
battery.
●On gasoline engine models, the fuel
filter or fuel lines should be serviced by
a NISSAN dealer because the fuel lines
are under high pressure even when the
engine is off.
CAUTION
●Do not work under the hood while the
engine is hot. Turn the engine off and
wait until it cools down.
●Avoid contact with used engine oil and
coolant. Improperly disposed engine
oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle
fluids can damage the environment. Al-
ways conform to local regulations for
disposal of vehicle fluid.
●Never leave the engine or the CVT re-
lated component harness connector
disconnected while the ignition switch
is in the ON position.
●Never connect or disconnect the battery
or any transistorized component while
the ignition switch is in the ON position.
●Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-
matic engine cooling fan. It may come
on at any time without warning, even if
the ignition key is in the OFF position
and the engine is not running. To avoid
injury, always disconnect the negative
battery cable before working near the
fan.
This “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
gives instructions regarding only those items
which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A genuine NISSAN service manual is also avail-
able. See “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual or-
der information” in the “Technical and consumer
information” section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper
servicing may result in operating difficulties or
excessive emissions, and could affect warranty
coverage. If in doubt about any servicing,
have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-5
QR25DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model)
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse block
6. Battery
7. Fuse/Fusible link box
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Drive belt location
11. Engine coolant reservoir
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
LDI0553
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK
LOCATIONS
8-6 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
VQ35DE engine
1. Power steering fluid reservoir
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir/Clutch fluid
reservoir (M/T model)
4. Air cleaner
5. Fuse block
6. Battery
7. Fuse/Fusible link box
8. Engine oil dipstick
9. Radiator cap
10. Drive belt location
11. Engine coolant reservoir
12. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
LDI0552
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-7
The engine cooling system is filled at the factory
with a pre-diluted mixture of 50% Genuine
NISSAN Engine Coolant (blue) and 50% water
to provide year-round anti-freeze and coolant
protection. The anti-freeze solution contains rust
and corrosion inhibitors. Additional engine cool-
ing system additives are not necessary.
WARNING
●Never remove the radiator or coolant
reservoir cap when the engine is hot.
Wait until the engine and radiator cool
down. Serious burns could be caused
by high pressure fluid escaping from
the radiator. See precautions in “If your
vehicle overheats” found in the “In case
of emergency” section of this manual.
●The radiator is equipped with a pres-
sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-
gine damage, use only a genuine
NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
●When adding or replacing coolant, be
sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or
equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-diluted
to provide antifreeze protection to -34°
F (-37° C). If additional freeze protec-
tion is needed due to weather where
you operate your vehicle, add Genuine
NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant
(blue) concentrate following the direc-
tions on the container. If an equivalent
coolant other than Genuine NISSAN
Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is
used, follow the coolant manufacturer’s
instructions to maintain minimum anti-
freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The
use of other types of coolant solutions
other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
may damage the engine cooling
system.
●The life expectancy of the factory-fill
coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or
7 years. Mixing any other type of cool-
ant other than Genuine NISSAN Long
Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), includ-
ing Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use
of non-distilled water will reduce the
life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-
ant. Refer to the Nissan Service and
Maintenance Guide for more details.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
8-8 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT
LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when
the engine is cold. If the coolant level is below
the MIN level 䊊
B, add coolant to the MAX level
䊊
A. If the reservoir is empty, check the coolant
level in the radiator when the engine is cold. If
there is insufficient coolant in the radiator, fill the
radiator with coolant up to the filler opening and
also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX level 䊊
A.
This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life expectancy of
the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000
km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant or
the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life
expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. Refer to the
NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide for
more details.
If the cooling system frequently requires
coolant, have it checked by a NISSAN
dealer.
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant.
The service procedure can be found in the
NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced
heater performance and engine overheat-
ing.
WARNING
●To avoid the danger of being scalded,
never change the coolant when the en-
gine is hot.
●Never remove the radiator cap when the
engine is hot. Serious burns could be
caused by high pressure fluid escaping
from the radiator.
●Avoid direct skin contact with used
coolant. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
●Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-
dren and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
LDI0554
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-9
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature.
3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than 10
minutes for the oil to drain back into
the oil pan.
4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean. Re-
insert it all the way.
5. Remove the dipstick again and check the oil
level. It should be between the H (High) and
L (Low) marks 䊊
B. This is the normal oper-
ating oil level range. If the oil level is below
the L (Low) mark 䊊
A, remove the oil filler cap
and pour recommended oil through the
opening. Do not overfill 䊊
C.
6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.
It is normal to add some oil between oil
maintenance intervals or during the
break-in period, depending on the severity
of operating conditions.
QR25DE engine
LDI0555
VQ35DE engine
LDI0556 WDI0214
ENGINE OIL
8-10 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Op-
erating the engine with an insufficient
amount of oil can damage the engine, and
such damage is not covered by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches
operating temperature, then turn it off.
3. Remove the oil filler 䊊
Acap by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain plug
䊊
B.
5. Remove the drain plug 䊊
Bwith a wrench by
turning it counterclockwise and completely
drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and
replace it at this time. See “Changing engine
oil filter” in this section.
●Waste oil must be disposed of prop-
erly.
●Check your local regulations.
QR25DE
WDI0492
VQ35DE
WDI0493
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-11
WARNING
●Prolonged and repeated contact with
used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
●Try to avoid direct skin contact with
used oil. If skin contact is made, wash
thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner
as soon as possible.
●Keep used engine oil out of reach of
children.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug and a new
washer. Securely tighten the drain plug with
a wrench. Do not use excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque:
22 - 29 ft-lb (29 - 39 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through
the oil filler opening, then install the oil filler
cap securely.
See “Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and con-
sumer information” section of this manual for
drain and refill capacity.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the
oil temperature and drain time. Use these
specifications for reference only. Always use
the dipstick to determine when the proper
amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage around
the drain plug and oil filter. Correct as re-
quired.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick.
Add engine oil if necessary.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply
the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil filter 䊊
A.
4. Loosen the oil filter 䊊
Awith an oil filter
wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then
remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
QR25DE
WDI0494
8-12 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine
oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with
a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material
remaining on the sealing surface of the
engine. Failure to do so could lead to
engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean
engine oil.
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance
is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
8. Start the engine and check for leakage
around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10
minutes. Check the oil level. Add engine oil if
necessary.
CAUTION
●Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid
NS-2. Do not mix with other fluids.
●Using transmission fluid other than
Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will
damage the CVT, which is not covered
by the warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is
required, we recommend your NISSAN dealer for
servicing.
VQ35DE
WDI0495
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE
TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID (if so
equipped)
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-13
The fluid level should be checked using the HOT
MAX range on the power steering fluid reservoir
at fluid temperatures of 122° - 176°F (50° -
80°C) or using the COLD MAX range on the
power steering fluid reservoir at fluid tempera-
tures of 32° - 86°F (0° - 30°C).
If the fluid is at or below the MIN line, add Genu-
ine NISSAN PSF to HOT MAX or COLD MAX
depending on system fluid temperature. Remove
the cap and fill through the opening.
CAUTION
●DO NOT OVERFILL.
●Recommended fluid is Genuine
NISSAN PSF or equivalent.
For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
WARNING
●Use only new fluid from a sealed con-
tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated
fluid may damage the brake and clutch
systems. The use of improper fluids can
damage the brake and clutch system
and affect the vehicle’s stopping ability.
●Clean the filler cap before removing.
●Brake and clutch fluid is poisonous and
should be stored carefully in marked
containers out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-
faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is
spilled, immediately wash the surface
with water.
LDI0557
POWER STEERING FLUID BRAKE AND CLUTCH (if so equipped)
FLUID
8-14 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
BRAKE FLUID
Check the brake fluid level in the reservoir. If the
fluid level is below the MIN line or the brake
warning light comes on, add Genuine NISSAN
Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT
3fluid up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added
frequently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
CLUTCH FLUID (if so equipped)
Check the clutch fluid level in the reservoir
(manual transmissions only). If the fluid level is
below the MIN line, add Genuine NISSAN Super
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid or equivalent DOT 3 fluid
up to the MAX line. If fluid must be added fre-
quently, the system should be checked by a
NISSAN dealer.
For further brake and clutch fluid specification
information, refer to “Capacities and recom-
mended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section of this manual.
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodi-
cally. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low
windshield-washer fluid warning light comes on.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift
the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-
washer fluid into the reservoir opening.
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better
cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield
washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer’s in-
structions for the mixture ratio.
LDI0558 LDI0558 LDI0579
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-15
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving
conditions require an increased amount of
windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Wind-
shield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Anti-
freeze or equivalent.
CAUTION
●Do not substitute engine anti-freeze
coolant for windshield-washer fluid.
This may result in damage to the paint.
●Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid
reservoir with washer fluid concen-
trates at full strength. Some methyl al-
cohol based washer fluid concentrates
may permanently stain the grille if
spilled while filling the windshield-
washer fluid reservoir.
●Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with
water to the manufacturer’s recom-
mended levels before pouring the fluid
into the windshield-washer fluid reser-
voir. Do not use the windshield-washer
fluid reservoir to mix the washer fluid
concentrate and water.
●Keep the battery surface clean and dry.
Clean the battery with a solution of baking
soda and water.
●Make certain the terminal connections are
clean and securely tightened.
●If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or
longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery
terminal cable to prevent discharge.
WARNING
●Do not expose the battery to flames, an
electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydro-
gen gas generated by the battery is ex-
plosive. Explosive gases can cause
blindness or injury. Do not allow battery
fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics
or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or injury. After touch-
ing a battery or battery cap, do not
touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly
wash your hands. If the acid contacts
your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes
and seek medical attention.
●Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid in
the battery is low. Low battery fluid can
cause a higher load on the battery
which can generate heat, reduce bat-
tery life, and in some cases lead to an
explosion.
●When working on or near a battery, al-
ways wear suitable eye protection and
remove all jewelry.
●Battery posts, terminals and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
●Keep battery out of the reach of
children.
●Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent
caps tight and the battery level.
BATTERY
8-16 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
1. Remove the vent caps with a screwdriver as
shown. Use a cloth to protect the battery
case.
2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is
necessary to add fluid, add only distilled
water to bring the level up to the bottom of
the filler opening. Do not overfill. Reinstall
the vent caps.
Vehicles operated in high temperatures or under
severe conditions require frequent checks of the
battery fluid level.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, see “Jump starting”
in the “In case of emergency” section of this
manual. If the engine does not start by jump
starting, the battery may have to be replaced.
Contact a NISSAN dealer.
WDI0224
WDI0529
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-17
CAUTION
●Do not ground accessories directly to
the battery terminal. Doing so will by-
pass the variable voltage control sys-
tem and the vehicle battery may not
charge completely.
●Use electrical accessories with the en-
gine running to avoid discharging the
vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage
control system. This system measures the
amount of electrical discharge from the battery
and controls voltage generated by the generator.
The current sensor 䊊
Ais located near the battery
along the negative battery cable. If you add elec-
trical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to
ground them to a suitable body ground such as
the frame or engine block area.
1. Power steering fluid pump pulley
2. Water pump pulley
3. Generator
4. Air conditioner
5. Crankshaft pulley
6. Drive belt Automatic tensioner
WARNING
Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the
OFF or LOCK position before servicing
drive belt. The engine could rotate
unexpectedly.
LDI0694
QR25DE engine
WDI0673
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL
SYSTEM
DRIVE BELT
8-18 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual
wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If the belt is
in poor condition or is loose, have it replaced
or adjusted by a NISSAN dealer.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condi-
tion and tension in accordance with the
maintenance schedule found in the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide”.
1. Power steering fluid pump pulley
2. Idler pulley
3. Generator
4. Air conditioner
5. Idler pulley
6. Crankshaft pulley
7. Drive belt Automatic tensioner
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Platinum-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace platinum-tipped 䊊
A
spark plugs as frequently as conventional type
spark plugs because they last much longer. Fol-
low the maintenance log shown in the “NISSAN
Service and Maintenance Guide”. Do not service
platinum-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or re-
gapping.
●Always replace spark plugs with rec-
ommended or equivalent ones.
VQ35DE engine
WDI0721 SDI1895
SPARK PLUGS
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-19
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are
off and that the parking brake is engaged
securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to re-
move the spark plugs. An incorrect socket
can damage the spark plugs.
NOTE:
The air cleaner filter should not be cleaned
and reused.
Replace the air cleaner filter according to the
maintenance log shown in the “Warranty Informa-
tion and Maintenance Booklet.”
To remove the air cleaner filter:
䊊
1Unlatch the clips and move the air cleaner
cover upward.
䊊
2Remove the air cleaner filter.
䊊
3Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter hous-
ing and the cover with a damp cloth.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner, make
sure the air cleaner cover is seated in the
housing and latch the clips.
QR25DE
LDI0563
VQ35DE
LDI0562
AIR CLEANER
8-20 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
WARNING
●Operating the engine with the air
cleaner removed can cause you or oth-
ers to be burned. The air cleaner not
only cleans the air, it stops the flame if
the engine backfires. If it isn’t there, and
the engine backfires, you could be
burned. Do not drive with the air cleaner
removed, and be careful when working
on the engine with the air cleaner
removed.
●Never pour fuel into the throttle body or
attempt to start the engine with the air
cleaner removed. Doing so could result
in serious injury.
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of air-
borne dust and pollen particles and reduces
some objectionable outside odors. The filter is
located behind the glove box. Refer to the
“NISSAN Service and Maintenance Guide” for
change intervals.
If replacement is required, see your NISSAN
dealer.
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the
windshield washer or if a wiper blade chatters
when running, wax or other material may be on
the blade or windshield.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer
fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean
if beads do not form when rinsing with clear
water.
Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked
in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse
the blades with clear water. If your windshield is
still not clear after cleaning the blades and using
the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION
Worn windshield wiper blades can dam-
age the windshield and impair driver
vision.
REPLACING
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
䊊
2Push the release tab, then move the wiper
blade down the wiper arm to remove.
䊊
3Remove the wiper blade.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper
arm until it clicks into place.
5. Rotate wiper blade so the dimple is in the
groove.
WDI0594
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-21
6. Return the wiper to its original position and
release it until it has made contact with the
windshield.
CAUTION
●After wiper blade replacement, return
the wiper arm to its original position;
otherwise it may be damaged when the
hood is opened.
●Make sure the wiper blades contact the
glass; otherwise the arms may be dam-
aged from wind pressure.
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not
to let wax get into the windshield washer nozzle
䊊
A. This may cause clogging or improper wind-
shield washer operation. If wax gets into the
nozzle, remove it with a needle or small pin 䊊
B.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the
brakes checked by a NISSAN dealer.
SELF-ADJUSTING BRAKES
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting
brakes.
The front and rear disc-type brakes self-adjust
every time the brake pedal is applied.
WARNING
See a NISSAN dealer for a brake system
check if the brake pedal height does not
return to normal.
BRAKE PAD WEAR INDICATORS
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible
wear indicators. When a brake pad requires re-
placement, a high pitched scraping or screech-
ing sound will be heard when the vehicle is in
motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the
brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes
checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator
sound is heard.
Under some driving or climate conditions, occa-
sional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may
be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to
moderate stops is normal and does not affect the
function or performance of the brake system.
WDI0570
BRAKES
8-22 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Proper brake inspection intervals should
be followed. For more information regarding
brake inspections, see the appropriate mainte-
nance schedule information in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
Two types of fuses are used. Type 䊊
Ais used in
the fuse boxes in the engine compartment. Type
䊊
Bis used in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses are provided as spare fuses. They
are stored in the passenger compartment fuse
box.
Type A fuses can be installed in the engine com-
partment and passenger compartment fuse
boxes.
If a type A fuse is used to replace a type B fuse,
the type A fuse will not be level with the fuse
pocket as shown in the illustration. This will not
affect the performance of the fuse. Make sure the
fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
Type B fuses cannot be installed in the under-
hood fuse boxes. Only use type A fuses in the
underhood fuse boxes.
LDI0455 LDI0457
FUSES
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-23
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not come on,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the
tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The
fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse
block in the passenger compartment.
5. If the fuse is open 䊊
A, replace it with a new
fuse 䊊
B.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
Fusible links
If the electrical equipment does not operate and
fuses are in good condition, check the fusible
links. If any of these fusible links are melted,
replace with only Genuine NISSAN parts.
LDI0560 WDI0452
8-24 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower
amperage rating than specified on the
fuse box cover. This could damage the
electrical system or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight
switch are OFF.
2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.
3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.
4. If the fuse is open 䊊
A, replace it with an
equivalent good fuse 䊊
B.
5. Push the fuse box cover to install.
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical
system checked and repaired by a NISSAN
dealer.
WDI0402
Type A
WDI0452
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-25
Extended storage switch (if so
equipped)
If any electrical equipment does not operate,
remove the extended storage switch and check
for an open fuse.
NOTE:
The extended storage switch is used for
long term vehicle storage. Even if the ex-
tended storage switch is broken it is not
necessary to replace it. Replace only the
open fuse in the switch with a new fuse.
How to replace the extended storage switch:
1. To remove the extended storage switch, be
sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or
LOCK position.
2. Be sure the headlight switch is in the OFF
position.
3. Remove the fuse box cover.
4. Pinch the locking tabs 䊊
1found on each
side of the storage switch.
5. Pull the storage switch straight out from the
fuse box 䊊
2.
Type B
LDI0456 LDI2035
8-26 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
CAUTION
Be careful not to allow children to swallow
the battery or removed parts.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY™
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as fol-
lows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelli-
gent Key.
2. Insert a small screwdriver 䊊
Ainto the slit 䊊
B
of the corner and twist it to separate the
upper part from the lower part. Use a cloth to
protect the casing.
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equiva-
lent.
●Do not touch the internal circuit and elec-
tric terminals as doing so could cause a
malfunction.
●Hold the battery by the edges. Holding
the battery across the contact points will
seriously deplete the storage capacity.
●Make sure that the + side faces the bot-
tom of the case.
LDI2001
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-27
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated 䊊
C䊊
D.
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
See a NISSAN dealer if you need assistance for
replacement.
FCC Notice:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to op-
erate the equipment.
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules and RSS-210 of Industry
Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation of the device.
HEADLIGHTS
Replacing the xenon headlight bulb (if
so equipped)
WARNING
ᏘHIGH VOLTAGE
When xenon headlights are on, they pro-
duce a high voltage. To prevent an electric
shock, never attempt to modify or disas-
semble. Always have your xenon head-
lights replaced at a NISSAN dealer. For
additional information, see “Headlight
and turn signal switch” in the “Instru-
ments and controls” section.
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb
(if so equipped)
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which
uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. Be-
cause the headlight assembly must be removed
from the vehicle for bulb replacement, see your
NISSAN dealer.
WDI0568
LIGHTS
8-28 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
CAUTION
●Aiming is not necessary after replacing
the bulb. When aiming adjustment is
necessary, contact a NISSAN dealer.
●Do not leave the headlight assembly
open without a bulb installed for a long
period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke,
etc. entering the headlight body may
affect bulb performance. Remove the
bulb from the headlight assembly just
before a replacement bulb is installed.
●Only touch the base when handling the
bulb. Never touch the glass envelope.
Touching the glass could significantly
affect bulb life and/or headlight
performance.
●High pressure halogen gas is sealed
inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may
break if the glass envelope is scratched
or the bulb is dropped.
●Use the same number and wattage as
shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the
exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A
temperature difference between the inside and
the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not
a malfunction. If large drops of water collect
inside the lens, contact a NISSAN dealer.
FRONT PARK/TURN/SIDEMARKER
LIGHT
Bulb replacement requires the removal of the
headlight assembly. If replacement is required,
see your NISSAN dealer.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-29
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*
1
Headlight assembly *
2
Low (Halogen) 55 H11
Low (Xenon) 35 D2R
High 65 H9
Park 5 WY5W
Park/Turn 28/8 3457NAK
Sidemarker
Sedan 5 WY5W
Coupe 5 W5W
Front fog light (if so equipped) *
2
55 H11
Step light 3.8 194
Rear combination light
Tail/Stop 27/8 3157K
Turn 27 3156
Backup (reversing)
Sedan 16 921LF
Coupe 13 912
License plate light *
2
5 W5W
High-mounted stop light *
2
Inside (coupe) — LED
Inside (sedan) 18 921
Spoiler (if so equipped) — LED
Front map light 8 U89
Rear personal light 8 U88
Trunk light 3.4 158
Vanity mirror light — HTU–14v
Glove box light *
2
——
Console light *
2
——
*
1
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
*
2
See a NISSAN dealer for assistance.
8-30 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Coupe
1. Mirror-mounted turn signal light
(if so equipped)
2. Interior light
3. Map light
4. Headlamp assembly
5. Fog light (if so equipped)
6. Step light
7. High-mount stoplight
8. Trunk light
9. License plate light
10. Rear combination light
WDI0626
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-31
Sedan
1. Rear map light
2. Front map light
3. Step light
4. Headlamp assembly
5. Fog light (if so equipped)
6. High-mount stoplight (if so equipped)
7. Trunk light
8. Spoiler mounted stoplight
(if so equipped)
9. Rear combination light
10. License plate light
11. Mirror-mounted turn signal light
(if so equipped)
WDI0680
8-32 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When
replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, light
and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal
Indicates bulb installation
Use a cloth 䊊
1to protect the housing.
WDI0306
Step light
LDI0341
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-33
Use a cloth to protect the housing. Use a cloth 䊊
1to protect the housing. Use a cloth 䊊
1to protect the housing.
Map light
WDI0723
Personal light (if so equipped)
WDI0670
Interior light
WDI0632
8-34 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Rear combination light
To access the bulbs in the rear combination light:
䊊
1Remove the fasteners. Carefully push back
the carpet.
䊊
2Remove the 2 nuts and pull out the rear
combination light.
䊊
3Rotate the bulb(s) counterclockwise and
pull out to remove:
䊊
ATurn signal light
䊊
BSidemarker light
䊊
CTail/stop light
䊊
DBackup light
WDI0635
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-35
CAUTION
Never force the covers into place because
the hinge pins can be damaged. Follow
the removal and installation instructions
to prevent inoperability of the covers.
Trunk light
WDI0343
High-mounted stoplight (rear window)
WDI0320
UPPER TETHER ANCHOR/KEY
CYLINDER COVERS
8-36 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
REMOVING COVERS FROM REAR
PARCEL SHELF
Remove the top tether anchor cover or key cylin-
der cover as follows:
1. Lift the cover to the full open position.
2. Rotate the cover in the direction shown,
disengaging the hinge at 䊊
1and slide the
second pin from the hinge 䊊
2and remove
the cover.
INSTALLING COVERS TO REAR
PARCEL SHELF
CAUTION
Make sure that the hinge is completely
aligned with the pin. If the pin is forced
into position, it may break.
Install the top tether anchor cover or key cylinder
cover as follows:
1. With the pin on one end kept free of its hinge
䊊
1, align the pin of the other end and slide it
into the hinge 䊊
2.
LDI2009 LDI2010 LDI2011
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-37
2. With the first pin in position 䊊
2, align the
second pin with its hinge slot 䊊
1and push
down on the cover to completely engage it.
A snap sound will be heard.
3. Close the cover.
If you have a flat tire, see “Flat tire” in the
“In case of emergency” section of this
manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It
monitors tire pressure of all tires except
the spare. When the low tire pressure
warning light is lit and the CHECK TIRE
PRESSURE warning appears in the ve-
hicle information display, one or more of
your tires is significantly under-inflated.
The TPMS will activate only when the
vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 MPH
(25 km/h). Also, this system may not de-
tect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for
example a flat tire while driving).
For more details, refer to “Low tire pres-
sure warning light”in the “Instruments and
controls” section, “Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and
driving” section, and “Flat tire” in the “In
case of emergency” section.
LDI2012 LDI2013
WHEELS AND TIRES
8-38 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the
spare) often and always prior to long dis-
tance trips. The recommended tire pres-
sure specifications are shown on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label
or the Tire and Loading Information label
under the “Cold Tire Pressure” heading.
The Tire and Loading Information label is
affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire
pressures should be checked regularly
because:
●Most tires naturally lose air over time.
●Tires can lose air suddenly when
driven over potholes or other objects
or if the vehicle strikes a curb while
parking.
The tire pressures should be checked
when the tires are cold. The tires are
considered COLD after the vehicle has
been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate
speeds.
Incorrect tire pressure, including un-
der inflation, may adversely affect
tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
●Improperly inflated tires can fail
suddenly and cause an accident.
●The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR) is located on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-
tion label. The vehicle weight ca-
pacity is indicated on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do
not load your vehicle beyond this
capacity. Overloading your ve-
hicle may result in reduced tire
life, unsafe operating conditions
due to premature tire failure, or
unfavorable handling character-
istics and could also lead to a
serious accident. Loading be-
yond the specified capacity may
also result in failure of other ve-
hicle components.
●Before taking a long trip, or
whenever you heavily load your
vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge
to ensure that the tire pressures
are at the specified level.
●For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-39
Tire and loading information label
䊊
1Seating capacity: The maximum num-
ber of occupants that can be seated
in the vehicle.
䊊
2Vehicle load limit: See “Vehicle load-
ing information” in the “Technical and
consumer information” section.
䊊
3Original tire size: The size of the tires
originally installed on the vehicle at
the factory.
䊊
4Cold tire pressure: Inflate the tires to
this pressure when the tires are cold.
Tires are considered COLD after the
vehicle has been parked for 3 or more
hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
km) at moderate speeds. The recom-
mended cold tire inflation is set by the
manufacturer to provide the best bal-
ance of tire wear, vehicle handling,
driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the
vehicle’s GVWR.
䊊
5Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” later
in this section.
䊊
6Spare tire size.
WDI0730
8-40 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
Checking tire pressure
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the
tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely
onto the valve stem. Do not press too
hard or force the valve stem side-
ways, or air will escape. If the hissing
sound of air escaping from the tire is
heard while checking the pressure,
reposition the gauge to eliminate this
leakage.
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge
stem and compare to the specifica-
tion shown on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too
much air is added, press the core of
the valve stem briefly with the tip of
the gauge stem to release pressure.
Recheck the pressure and add or
release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires,
including the spare.
LDI0393
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-41
Size Cold Tire Inflation Pres-
sure
Front Original Tire P215/60R16 220 kPa, 32 PSI
P215/55R17 230 kPa, 33 PSI
P235/45R18
Rear Original Tire P215/60R16 220 kPa, 32 PSI
P215/55R17 230 kPa, 33 PSI
P235/45R18
Spare Tire T135/90R16 420 kPa, 60 PSI
TIRE LABELING
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to
place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information iden-
tifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also pro-
vides the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The TIN
can be used to identify the tire in case of a
recall.
Example
WDI0394
8-42 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
䊊
1Tire size (example: P215/65R15 95H)
1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-
signed for passenger vehicles (not all
tires have this information).
2. Three-digit number (215): This num-
ber gives the width in millimeters of
the tire from sidewall edge to side-
wall edge.
3. Two-digit number (65): This number,
known as the aspect ratio, gives the
tire’s ratio of height to width.
4. R: The “R” stands for radial.
5. Two-digit number (15): This number
is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This
number is the tire’s load index. It is a
measurement of how much weight
each tire can support. You may not
find this information on all tires be-
cause it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not
drive the vehicle faster than the tire
speed rating.
Example
WDI0395
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-43
䊊
2TIN (Tire Identification Number) for a
new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX
XXXX)
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “Depart-
ment Of Transportation”. The symbol
can be placed above, below or to the
left or right of the Tire Identification
Number.
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code
(Optional).
5. Three-digit code: Date of Manufac-
ture.
6. Four numbers represent the week
and year the tire was built. For ex-
ample, the numbers 3103 means the
31st week of 2003. If these numbers
are missing, then look on the other
sidewall of the tire.
䊊
3Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-
coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufactur-
ers also must indicate the materials in the
tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
䊊
4Maximum permissible inflation pres-
sure
This number is the greatest amount of air
pressure that should be put in the tire. Do
not exceed the maximum permissible in-
flation pressure.
䊊
5Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load
in kilograms and pounds that can be car-
ried by the tire. When replacing the tires
on the vehicle, always use a tire that has
the same load rating as the factory in-
stalled tire.
䊊
6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”
Indicates whether the tire requires an in-
ner tube (“tube type”) or not (“tubeless”).
Example
WDI0396
8-44 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
䊊
7The word “radial”
The word “radial” is shown if the tire has
radial structure.
䊊
8Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are
defined throughout this section, Intended
Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that
contains a whitewall, bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same molding on the
other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the out-
ward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical
tire that has a particular side that must
always face outward when mounted on a
vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
●When changing or replacing tires, be
sure all four tires are of the same type
(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and
construction. A NISSAN dealer may be
able to help you with information about
tire type, size, speed rating and
availability.
●Replacement tires may have a lower
speed rating than the factory equipped
tires, and may not match the potential
maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed
the maximum speed rating of the tire.
●For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some mod-
els to provide good performance all year, includ-
ing snowy and icy road conditions. All Season
tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S
on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow
traction than All Season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models
to provide superior performance on dry roads.
Summer tire performance is substantially re-
duced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have
the tire traction rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy
conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of
SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four
wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select
tires equivalent in size and load rating to the
original equipment tires. If you do not, it can
adversely affect the safety and handling of your
vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings
than factory equipped tires and may not match
the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never ex-
ceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same
size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all
four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires
may be used. However, some U.S. states and
Canadian provinces prohibit their use. Check
local, state and provincial laws before installing
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-45
studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of
studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be
poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
CAUTION
Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can
be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong
Class “S” chains on this vehicle will cause
damage to the vehicle. If you plan to use
tire chains/cables, you should use a tire
chain that meets the minimum clearances
for your vehicle.
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to
location. Check the local laws before installing
tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure
they are the proper size for the tires on your
vehicle and are installed according to the chain
manufacturer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain that
is designed to provide the specified space 䊊
A
between the installed tire chain 䊊
1and where the
tire meets the rim 䊊
2as shown on the chart.
Wheel size Minimum space required
16 in .7 in (17 mm)
17 in .2 in (4 mm)
18 in .2 in (4 mm)
A tire chain that provides the specified amount of
space will provide the necessary clearance be-
tween the tire and the closest vehicle suspension
or body component. The minimum clearances are
determined using the factory-equipped tires.
Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain
tensioners when recommended by the tire chain
manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links
of the tire chain must be secured or removed to
prevent the possibility of whipping action dam-
age to the fenders or underbody. If possible,
avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire
chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed.
Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or
vehicle handling and performance may be ad-
versely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the
front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with
tire chains in such conditions can cause damage
to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to
some overstress.
LDI0574
8-46 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km).
See “Flat tire” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual for tire re-
placing procedures.
As soon as possible, tighten the
wheel nuts to the specified torque
with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tight-
ened to specifications at all times. It
is recommended that wheel nuts be
tightened to specification at each
tire rotation interval.
WARNING
●After rotating the tires, check and
adjust the tire pressure.
●Retighten the wheel nuts when
the vehicle has been driven for
600 miles (1,000 km) (also in
cases of a flat tire, etc.).
●Do not include the spare tire in
the tire rotation.
●For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
1. Wear indicator
2. Location mark
Tire wear and damage
WARNING
●Tires should be periodically in-
spected for wear, cracking, bulg-
ing or objects caught in the tread.
If excessive wear, cracks, bulging
or deep cuts are found, the tire(s)
should be replaced.
WDI0258 WDI0259
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-47
●The original tires have built-in
tread wear indicators. When the
wear indicators are visible, the
tire(s) should be replaced.
●Tires degrade with age and use.
Have tires, including the spare,
over 6 years old checked by a
qualified technician because
some tire damage may not be ob-
vious. Replace the tires as neces-
sary to prevent tire failure and
possible personal injury.
●Improper service of the spare tire
may result in serious personal in-
jury. If it is necessary to repair the
spare tire, contact a NISSAN
dealer.
●For additional information re-
garding tires, refer to “Important
Tire Safety Information” (US) or
“Tire Safety Information”
(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread
design, speed rating and load carrying capacity
as originally equipped. Recommended types and
sizes are shown in “Wheels and tires” in the
“Technical and consumer information” section of
this manual.
WARNING
●The use of tires other than those recom-
mended or the mixed use of tires of
different brands, construction (bias,
bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns
can adversely affect the ride, braking,
handling, VDC system (if so equipped),
ground clearance, body-to-tire clear-
ance, tire chain clearance, speedom-
eter calibration, headlight aim and
bumper height. Some of these effects
may lead to accidents and could result
in serious personal injury.
●If your vehicle was originally equipped
with 4 tires that were the same size and
you are only replacing 2 of the 4 tires ,
install the new tires on the rear axle.
Placing new tires on the front axle may
cause loss of vehicle control in some
driving conditions and cause an acci-
dent and personal injury.
●If the wheels are changed for any rea-
son, always replace with wheels which
have the same off-set dimension.
Wheels of a different off-set could
cause premature tire wear, degrade ve-
hicle handling characteristics, affect
the VDC system (if so equipped) and/or
interference with the brake
discs/drums. Such interference can
lead to decreased braking efficiency
and/or early brake pad/shoe wear. Re-
fer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Techni-
cal and consumer information” section
of this manual for wheel off-set
dimensions.
●When a spare tire is mounted or a wheel
is replaced, the TPMS (if so equipped)
will not function and the low tire pres-
sure warning light will flash for approxi-
mately 1 minute. The light will remain
on after 1 minute. Contact your NISSAN
dealer as soon as possible for tire re-
placement and/or system resetting.
●Replacing tires with those not originally
specified by NISSAN could affect the
proper operation of the TPMS (if so
equipped).
8-48 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
●Do not install a damaged or deformed
wheel or tire even if it has been re-
paired. Such wheels or tires could have
structural damage and could fail with-
out warning.
●The use of retread tires is not
recommended.
●For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety In-
formation” (US) or “Tire Safety Informa-
tion” (Canada) in the Warranty Informa-
tion Booklet.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling
and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get
out of balance. Therefore, they should be bal-
anced as required.
Wheel balance service should be per-
formed with the wheels off the vehicle.
Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle
could lead to mechanical damage.
●For additional information regarding
tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety
Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-
mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-
formation Booklet.
Care of wheels
●Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle
to maintain their appearance.
●Clean the inner side of the wheels when the
wheel is changed or the underside of the
vehicle is washed.
●Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing
the wheels.
●Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or
corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of
pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
●NISSAN recommends waxing the road
wheels to protect against road salt in areas
where it is used during winter.
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire)
Observe the following precautions if the TEM-
PORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used.
Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or
involved in an accident:
WARNING
●The spare tire should be used for emer-
gency use only. It should be replaced
with the standard tire at the first oppor-
tunity to avoid possible tire or differen-
tial damage.
●Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY
USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid
sharp turns and abrupt braking while
driving.
●Periodically check spare tire inflation
pressure. Always keep the pressure of
the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire
at 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 bar).
●With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare
tire installed do not drive the vehicle at
speeds faster than 50 MPH (80 km/h).
●When driving on roads covered with
snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire should be used on the
rear wheels and the original tire used
on the front wheels (drive wheels). Use
tire chains only on the front (original)
tires.
Maintenance and do-it-yourself 8-49
●Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE
ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate
than the standard tire. Replace the
spare tire as soon as the tread wear
indicators appear.
●Do not use the spare tire on other
vehicles.
●Do not use more than one spare tire at
the same time.
●Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
●Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-
RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains
will not fit properly and may cause dam-
age to the vehicle.
●Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY
spare tire is smaller than the original
tire, ground clearance is reduced. To
avoid damage to the vehicle, do not
drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive
the vehicle through an automatic car
wash since it may get caught.
8-50 Maintenance and do-it-yourself
9 Technical and consumer information
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants .........9-2
Fuel recommendation . . .........................9-3
Engine oil and oil filter recommendations ..........9-5
Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil
recommendations ..............................9-6
Specifications.....................................9-7
Engine ........................................9-7
Wheels and tires ...............................9-8
Dimensions and weights ........................9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle in
another country ...................................9-9
Vehicle identification ...............................9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate ..........9-9
Vehicle identification number
(chassis number) ...............................9-9
Engine serial number...........................9-10
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-10
Emission control information label ...............9-11
Tire and loading information label................9-11
Air conditioner specification label................9-12
Installing front license plate ........................9-12
Vehicle loading information ........................9-13
Terms ........................................9-13
Vehicle load capacity ..........................9-13
Loading tips ..................................9-15
Measurement of weights .......................9-15
Towing a trailer ...................................9-16
Maximum load limits ...........................9-16
Towing load/specification.......................9-19
Towing safety .................................9-19
Flat towing....................................9-23
Uniform tire quality grading ........................9-24
Emission control system warranty ..................9-25
Reporting safety defects ..........................9-25
Readiness for inspection/maintenance (I/M) test .....9-26
Event Data Recorders (EDR).......................9-26
Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order information . . .9-27
In the event of a collision .......................9-27
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure
described in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Capacity (Approximate) Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
US measure Imp measure Liter
Fuel 20 gal 16-5/8 gal 75.6 See “Fuel recommendation” later in this section.
Engine oil *8
Drain and Refill
With oil filter change QR25DE 4-7/8 qt 4 qt 4.6
• Engine oil with API Certification Mark *1, *2
• Viscosity SAE 5W-30 *1, *2
VQ35DE 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt 4.8
Without oil filter
change QR25DE 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt 4.3
VQ35DE 4-3/4 qt 4 qt 4.5
Cooling system With reservoir QR25DE 2 gal 1-3/4 gal 7.7 Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent
VQ35DE 2-3/8 gal 2 gal 9.0
Manual transmission gear oil — — — Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) HQ Multi 75W-85 or
equivalent *3
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 *4
Power steering fluid (PSF) — — — Genuine NISSAN PSF or equivalent.*5
Brake and clutch fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid *6 or equivalent DOT 3
Multi-purpose grease — — — NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)
Air conditioning system refrigerant — — — HFC-134a (R-134a) *7
Air conditioning system oil — — — Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S or equivalent *7
Windshield-washer fluid — — — Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze fluid or
equivalent
*1: For further details, see “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in this section.
*2: NISSAN recommends for the VQ35DE engine, Genuine NISSAN Ester Engine Oil available at a NISSAN dealer.
*3: If Genuine NISSAN Manual Transmission Fluid (MTF) Multi 75W-85 is hard to obtain , API GL-4, Viscosity SAE 75W-85 may be used as a temporary replacement. However, use
Genuine NISSAN gear oil as soon as it is available.
*4 Use only Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2. Using transmission fluid other than Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-2 will damage the CVT, which is not covered by
the NISSAN new vehicle limited warranty.
*5 DEXRON™ VI type ATF may also be used.
*6 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer.
*7 For further details, see “Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.
*8: For further details, see “Engine Oil” in the “Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section of this manual.
CAPACITIES AND RECOMMENDED
FUEL/LUBRICANTS
9-2 Technical and consumer information
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
●Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
●Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets
the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifi-
cations where it is available. Many of the automo-
bile manufacturers developed this specification
to improve emission control system and vehicle
performance. Ask your service station manager if
the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformu-
lated gasolines. These gasolines are specially
designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN
supports efforts towards cleaner air and sug-
gests that you use reformulated gasoline when
available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxy-
genates such as ethanol, MTBE and methanol
with or without advertising their presence.
NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of
which the oxygenate content and the fuel com-
patibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily de-
termined. If in doubt, ask your service station
manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take
the following precautions as the usage of such
fuels may cause vehicle performance problems
and/or fuel system damage.
●The fuel should be unleaded and have
an octane rating no lower than that
recommended for unleaded gasoline.
●If an oxygenate-blend other than
methanol blend is used, it should con-
tain no more than 10% oxygenate.
(MTBE may, however, be added up to
15%.)
●If a methanol blend is used, it should
contain no more than 5% methanol
(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It
should also contain a suitable amount
of appropriate cosolvents and corro-
sion inhibitors. If not properly formu-
lated with appropriate cosolvents and
corrosion inhibitors, such methanol
blends may cause fuel system damage
and/or vehicle performance problems.
At this time, sufficient data is not avail-
able to ensure that all methanol blends
are suitable for use in NISSAN ve-
hicles.
If any driveability problems such as engine stall-
ing and difficult hot-starting are experienced after
using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately
change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a
low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refu-
eling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can
cause paint damage.
Technical and consumer information 9-3
E–85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can
only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do
not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government
regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing
pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange
and black label with the common abbreviation or
the appropriate percentage for that region.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any
aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injec-
tor cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit
removers, etc.) which are sold commercially.
Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish
or deposit removal may contain active solvents or
similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel
system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane
rating lower than recommended can cause
persistent, heavy “spark knock.” (“Spark
knock” is a metallic rapping noise.) If se-
vere, this can lead to engine damage. If you
detect a persistent heavy spark knock even
when using gasoline of the stated octane
rating, or if you hear steady spark knock
while holding a steady speed on level
roads, have a NISSAN dealer correct the
condition. Failure to correct the condition
is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN
is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark
knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may
cause excessive fuel consumption or engine
damage. If any of the above symptoms are en-
countered, have your vehicle checked at a
NISSAN dealer.
However, now and then you may notice
light spark knock for a short time while
accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a
cause for concern, because you get the
greatest fuel benefit when there is light
spark knock for a short time under heavy
engine load.
CAUTION
●Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel in a vehicle
not specifically designed for E-85 fuel
can damage fuel system components
and is not covered by the NISSAN new
vehicle limited warranty.
●E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85%
fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded
gasoline.
●U.S. government regulations require
ethanol dispensing pumps to be identi-
fied by a small, square, orange and
black label with the common abbrevia-
tion or the appropriate percentage for
that region.
9-4 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER
RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality
and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory
engine life and performance. See “Capacities
and recommended fuel/lubricants” earlier in this
section. NISSAN recommends the use of an
energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel
economy.
Select only engine oils that meet the American
Petroleum Institute (API) certification or Interna-
tional Lubricant Standardization and Approval
Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE vis-
cosity standard. These oils have the API certifica-
tion mark on the front of the container. Oils which
do not have the specified quality label should not
be used as they could cause engine damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil
additives. The use of an oil additive is not neces-
sary when the proper oil type is used and main-
tenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been
previously used should not be used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes
with temperature. Because of this, it is important
to select the engine oil viscosity based on the
temperatures at which the vehicle will be oper-
ated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil
viscosity other than that recommended could
cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a
high-quality genuine NISSAN oil filter. When re-
placing, use a genuine NISSAN oil filter or its
equivalent for the reason described in “Change
intervals.”
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your
engine are based on the use of the specified
quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters
that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding
recommended oil and filter change intervals
could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine
caused by improper maintenance or use of incor-
rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle limited war-
ranty.
WTI0183
Technical and consumer information 9-5
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine
oil when it was built. You do not have to change
the oil before the first recommended change
interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend
upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may
require more frequent oil and filter changes:
●repeated short distance driving at cold out-
side temperatures
●driving in dusty conditions
●extensive idling
●towing a trailer
●stop and go commuting
Refer to the “NISSAN Service and Maintenance
Guide” for the maintenance schedule.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT AND OIL
RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN
vehicle must be charged with the refriger-
ant HFC-134a (R-134a) and NISSAN A/C
system oil Type S or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will
cause severe damage to the air condition-
ing system and will require the replace-
ment of all air conditioner system
components.
The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your
NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s ozone
layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the
earth’s atmosphere, certain government regula-
tions require the recovery and recycling of any
refrigerant during automotive air conditioner sys-
tem service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained
technicians and equipment needed to recover
and recycle your air conditioner system refriger-
ant.
Contact a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air
conditioner system.
9-6 Technical and consumer information
ENGINE
Model QR25DE VQ35DE
Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°
Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.5 x 3.9 (89.0 x 100.0) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)
Displacement cu in (cm
3
) 151.82 (2,488) 213.45 (3,498)
Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–2–3–4–5–6
Idle speed
M/T
CVT (in “N” position) No adjustment is necessary.
Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle
speed)
CO % at idle
Spark plug DILKAR6A-11 FXE22HR-11
Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)
Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
SPECIFICATIONS
Technical and consumer information 9-7
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type Size Offset in (mm)
Aluminum/Steel 16 x 7JJ 1.77 (45)
Aluminum 17 x 7 1/2JJ 1.77 (45)
Aluminum 18 x 8.0JJ 1.77 (45)
T type (Spare) 16 x 4T 1.57 (40)
Tire size P215/60R16
P215/55R17
P235/45R18
Spare tire Alloy T135/90D16
Steel T135/70D16
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Coupe Sedan
Overall length in (mm) 180.9 (4,595) 190.7 (4,844)
Overall width in (mm) 70.7 (1,795) 70.7 (1,795)
Overall height in (mm) 56.0 (1,423) 58.0 (1,473)
Front track in (mm) 61.0 (1,550) 61.0 (1,550)
Rear track in (mm) 61.2 (1,554) 61.1 (1,551)
Wheelbase in (mm) 105.3 (2,675) 109.3 (2,775)
Gross vehicle weight
rating lb (kg)
See the “F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification la-
bel” on the center pillar between the driver’s side
front and rear doors.
Gross axle weight rating
Front lb (kg)
Rear lb (kg)
9-8 Technical and consumer information
When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-
hicle in another country, you should first find
out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehi-
cle’s engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low
may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles
must be operated with unleaded gasoline. There-
fore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where
appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your
vehicle to another country, state, province
or district, it may be necessary to modify the
vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emis-
sion control and safety standards vary according
to the country, state, province or district; there-
fore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into an-
other country, state, province or district
and registered, its modifications, transpor-
tation, and registration are the responsibil-
ity of the user. NISSAN is not responsible
for any inconvenience that may result.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(VIN) PLATE
The vehicle identification number (VIN) plate is
attached as shown. This number is the identifica-
tion for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle
registration.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
(chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is located as
shown.
LTI0025 WTI0037
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING
YOUR VEHICLE IN ANOTHER
COUNTRY
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
Technical and consumer information 9-9
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification la-
bel is affixed as shown. This label contains valu-
able vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle
Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture,
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review
it carefully.
QR25DE
WTI0096
VQ35DE
WTI0049 LTI0197
9-10 Technical and consumer information
EMISSION CONTROL
INFORMATION LABEL
The emission control information label is at-
tached to the underside of the hood as shown.
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION
LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and
Loading Information label. The label is located as
shown.
WTI0189
Sedan
LTI0224
Coupe
LTI0225
Technical and consumer information 9-11
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION
LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed to
the underside of the hood as shown.
Use the following steps to mount the front license
plate:
䊊
1Make a shallow hole in each plastic finisher
at the location mark (small dimple) using a
0.39 in (10 mm) drill. To avoid damaging the
threads behind the finisher, apply only light
pressure to the drill.
䊊
2Mount the license plate bracket using two 10
mm slotted Phillip head screws.
WTI0178
WTI0179
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
9-12 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
●It is extremely dangerous to ride
in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In
a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
●
Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not
equipped with seats and seat belts.
●Be sure everyone in your vehicle
is in a seat and using a seat belt
properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the
following terms before loading your vehicle:
●Curb Weight (actual weight of your
vehicle) - vehicle weight including:
standard and optional equipment, flu-
ids, emergency tools, and spare tire
assembly. This weight does not in-
clude passengers and cargo.
●GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb
weight plus the combined weight of
passengers and cargo.
●GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-
ing) - maximum total combined
weight of the unloaded vehicle, pas-
sengers, luggage, hitch, trailer
tongue load and any other optional
equipment. This information is lo-
cated on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
●
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -
maximum weight (load) limit specified
for the front or rear axle. This information
is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
●GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
rating) - The maximum total weight
rating of the vehicle, passengers,
cargo, and trailer.
●
Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit,
Total load capacity - maximum total
weight limit specified of the load (pas-
sengers and cargo) for the vehicle.
This is the maximum combined weight
of occupants and cargo that can be
loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is
used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue
weight must be included as part of the
cargo load. This information is located
on the Tire and Loading Information
label (if so equipped).
●Cargo capacity - permissible weight
of cargo, the subtracted weight of
occupants from the load limit.
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY
Do not exceed the load limit of your ve-
hicle shown as “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo” on the Tire and
Loading Information label. Do not exceed
the number of occupants shown as
“Seating Capacity” on the Tire and Load-
ing Information label.
To get “the combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo”, add the weight of all
occupants, then add the total luggage
weight. Examples are shown in the follow-
ing illustration.
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 9-13
Steps for determining correct load
limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if the
XXX amount equals 1400 lbs. and
there will be five 150 lb. passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of avail-
able cargo and luggage load capac-
ity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5 X 150)
= 650 lbs) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =
300 kg.)
Example
LTI0152
9-14 Technical and consumer information
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo and
luggage load capacity calculated in
Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be trans-
ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this re-
duces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm
that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle.
See “Measurement of weights” later in
this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pres-
sures. See the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion label.
LOADING TIPS
●The GVW must not exceed GVWR
or GAWR as specified on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label.
●Do not load the front and rear axle to
the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the
GVWR.
WARNING
●Properly secure all cargo with
ropes or straps to help prevent it
from sliding or shifting. Do not
place cargo higher than the seat-
backs. In a sudden stop or colli-
sion, unsecured cargo could
cause personal injury.
●Do not load your vehicle any
heavier than the GVWR or the
maximum front and rear GAWRs.
If you do, parts of your vehicle
can break, tire damage could oc-
cur, or it can change the way your
vehicle handles. This could result
in loss of control and cause per-
sonal injury.
●Overloading not only can shorten
the life of your vehicle and the
tire, but can also cause unsafe
vehicle handling and longer brak-
ing distances. This may cause a
premature tire failure which
could result in a serious accident
and personal injury. Failures
caused by overloading are not
covered by the vehicle’s
warranty.
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight
shifts that could affect the balance of your
vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive
to a scale and weigh the front and the rear
wheels separately to determine axle
loads. Individual axle loads should not ex-
ceed either of the gross axle weight rat-
ings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads
should not exceed the gross vehicle
weight rating (GVWR). These ratings are
given on the vehicle certification label. If
weight ratings are exceeded, move or re-
move items to bring all weights below the
ratings.
Technical and consumer information 9-15
WARNING
Overloading or improper loading of a
trailer and its cargo can adversely affect
vehicle handling, braking and perfor-
mance and may lead to accidents.
CAUTION
●Do not tow a trailer or haul a heavy load
for the first 500 miles (800 km). Your
engine, axle or other parts could be
damaged.
●For the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, do not drive over 50 mph
(80 km/h) and do not make starts at full
throttle. This helps the engine and other
parts of your vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
Your new vehicle was designed to be used pri-
marily to carry passengers and cargo. Remember
that towing a trailer places additional loads on
your vehicle’s engine, drive train, steering, brak-
ing and other systems.
A NISSAN Towing Guide (U.S. only) is available
on the website at www.nissanusa.com. This
guide includes information on trailer towing ca-
pability and the special equipment required for
proper towing.
MAXIMUM LOAD LIMITS
Maximum trailer loads
Never allow the total trailer load to exceed the
value specified in the “Towing
Load/Specification” chart found later in this sec-
tion. The total trailer load equals trailer weight
plus its cargo weight.
●When towing a trailer load of 1,000 lbs.
(454 kg) or more, trailers with a brake
system must be used.
The Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR)
equals the combined weight of the towing vehicle
(including passengers and cargo) plus the total
trailer load. Towing loads greater than these or
using improper towing equipment could ad-
versely affect vehicle handling, braking and per-
formance.
The ability of your vehicle to tow a trailer is not
only related to the maximum trailer loads, but also
the places you plan to tow. Tow weights appro-
priate for level highway driving may have to be
reduced for low traction situations (for example,
on slippery boat ramps).
LTI0164
TOWING A TRAILER
9-16 Technical and consumer information
Temperature conditions can also affect towing.
For example, towing a heavy trailer in high outside
temperatures on graded roads can affect engine
performance and cause overheating. The engine
protection mode, which helps reduce the chance
of engine damage, could activate and automati-
cally decrease engine power. Vehicle speed may
decrease under high load. Plan your trip carefully
to account for trailer and vehicle load, weather
and road conditions.
WARNING
Overheating can result in reduced engine
power and vehicle speed. The reduced
speed may be lower than other traffic,
which could increase the chance of a col-
lision. Be especially careful when driving.
If the vehicle cannot maintain a safe driv-
ing speed, pull to the side of the road in a
safe area. Allow the engine to cool and
return to normal operation. See “If your
vehicle overheats” in the “In case of emer-
gency” section of this manual.
CAUTION
Vehicle damage resulting from improper
towing procedures is not covered by
NISSAN warranties.
Tongue load
Keep the tongue load between 10 - 15 percent of
the total trailer load or use the trailer tongue load
specified by the trailer manufacturer. The tongue
load must be within the maximum tongue load
limits shown in the following “Towing
Load/Specification” chart. If the tongue load be-
comes excessive, rearrange cargo to allow for
proper tongue load.
Maximum Gross Vehicle Weight
(GVW)/Maximum Gross Axle Weight
(GAW)
The GVW of the towing vehicle must not exceed
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification
label. The GVW equals the combined weight of
the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage,
hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional
equipment. In addition, front or rear GAW must
not exceed the Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR) shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.
certification label.
WTI0160 TI1012M
Technical and consumer information 9-17
Towing capacities are calculated assuming a
base vehicle with driver and any options required
to achieve the rating. Additional passengers,
cargo and/or optional equipment, such as the
trailer hitch, will add weight to the vehicle and
reduce your vehicle’s maximum towing capacity
and trailer tongue load.
The vehicle and trailer need to be weighed to
confirm the vehicle is within the GVWR, Front
GAWR, Rear GAWR, Gross Combined Weight
Rating (GCWR) and Towing capacity.
All vehicle and trailer weights can be measured
using platform type scales commonly found at
truck stops, highway weigh stations, building
supply centers or salvage yards.
To determine the available payload capacity for
tongue load, use the following procedure.
1. Locate the GVWR on the
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
2. Weigh your vehicle on the scale with all of
the passengers and cargo that are normally
in the vehicle when towing a trailer.
3. Subtract the actual vehicle weight from the
GVWR. The remaining amount is the avail-
able maximum tongue load.
To determine the Gross Trailer Weight, weigh
your trailer on a scale with all equipment and
cargo, that are normally in the trailer when it is
towed. Make sure the Gross Trailer Weight is not
more than the Gross Trailer Weight Rating shown
on the trailer and is not more than the calculated
available maximum towing capacity.
Also weigh the front and rear axles on the scale to
make sure the Front Gross Axle Weight and Rear
Gross Axle Weight are not more than Front
Gross Axle Weight and Rear Gross Axle Weight
on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label.
The cargo in the trailer and vehicle may need to
be moved or removed to meet the specified rat-
ings.
Example:
●Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) as weighed
on a scale - including passengers, cargo and
hitch - 4,103 lb. (1861 kg).
●Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) from
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label -
4,203 lb. (1906 kg).
●Maximum Towing Load from “Towing
Load/Specification⬙chart - 1,000 lb. (454
kg).
4,203 lb. (1906 kg) GVWR
– 4,103 lb. (1861 kg) GVW
= 100 lb. (45 kg) Available for tongue
weight
1,000 lb. (454 kg) Capacity available for
towing
100 lb. (45 kg) Available tongue weight
/ 1,000 lb. (454 kg) Available capacity
= 10 % tongue weight
The available towing capacity may be less than
the maximum towing capacity due to the passen-
ger and cargo load in the vehicle.
Remember to keep trailer tongue weight be-
tween 10 - 15% of the trailer weight or within the
trailer tongue load specification recommended
by the trailer manufacturer. If the tongue load
becomes excessive, rearrange the cargo to ob-
tain the proper tongue load. Do not exceed the
maximum tongue weight specification shown in
the “Towing load/specification” chart even if the
calculated available tongue weight is greater
than 15%. If the calculated tongue weight is less
than 10% , reduce the total trailer weight to
match the available tongue weight.
Always verify that available capacities are within
the required ratings.
9-18 Technical and consumer information
TOWING LOAD/SPECIFICATION
TOWING LOAD / SPECIFICATION
UNIT: lb (kg)
MAXIMUM TOWING
LOAD 1,000 (454)
MAXIMUM TONGUE
LOAD 100 (45)
TOWING SAFETY
Trailer hitch
Choose a proper hitch for your vehicle and trailer.
Make sure the trailer hitch is securely attached to
the vehicle, to help avoid personal injury or prop-
erty damage due to sway caused by crosswinds,
rough road surfaces or passing trucks.
WARNING
Trailer hitch components have specific
weight ratings. Your vehicle may be ca-
pable of towing a trailer heavier than the
weight rating of the hitch components.
Never exceed the weight rating of the
hitch components. Doing so can cause
serious personal injury or property
damage.
Hitch ball
Choose a hitch ball of the proper size and weight
rating for your trailer:
●The required hitch ball size is stamped on
most trailer couplers. Most hitch balls also
have the size printed on the top of the ball.
●Choose the proper class hitch ball based on
the trailer weight.
●The diameter of the threaded shank of the
hitch ball must be matched to the ball mount
hole diameter. The hitch ball shank should
be no more than 1/16” smaller than the hole
in the ball mount.
●The threaded shank of the hitch ball must be
long enough to be properly secured to the
ball mount. There should be at least 2
threads showing beyond the lock washer
and nut.
Ball mount
The hitch ball is attached to the ball mount and
the ball mount is inserted into the hitch receiver.
Choose a proper class ball mount based on the
trailer weight. Additionally, the ball mount should
be chosen to keep the trailer tongue level with the
ground.
Sway control device
Sudden maneuvers, wind gusts, and buffeting
caused by other vehicles can affect trailer han-
dling. Sway control devices may be used to help
control these affects. If you choose to use one,
contact a reputable trailer hitch supplier to make
sure the sway control device will work with the
vehicle, hitch, trailer and the trailer’s brake sys-
tem. Follow the instructions provided by the
manufacturer for installing and using the sway
control device.
Class I hitch
Class I trailer hitch equipment (receiver, ball
mount and hitch ball) can be used to tow trailers
of a maximum weight of 2,000 lb (909 kg).
You may add Class I trailer hitch equipment that
has a 2,000 lb (909 kg) maximum weight rating to
the vehicle, but your vehicle is only capable of
towing the maximum trailer weights shown in the
Towing Load/Specification chart earlier in this
section.
Technical and consumer information 9-19
CAUTION
●Do not use axle-mounted hitches.
●The hitch should not be attached to or
affect the operation of the impact-
absorbing bumper.
●Do not modify the vehicle exhaust sys-
tem, brake system, etc. to install a
trailer hitch.
●To reduce the possibility of additional
damage if your vehicle is struck from
the rear, where practical, remove the
receiver when not in use.
●After the hitch is removed, seal the bolt
holes to prevent exhaust fumes, water
or dust from entering the passenger
compartment.
●Regularly check that all trailer hitch
mounting bolts are securely mounted.
Tire pressures
●When towing a trailer, inflate the ve-
hicle tires to the recommended cold
tire pressure indicated on the Tire
and Loading Information label.
●Trailer tire condition, size, load rating
and proper inflation pressure should
be in accordance with the trailer and
tire manufacturer’s specifications.
Safety chains
Always use suitable safety chains between your
vehicle and the trailer. The safety chains should
be crossed and should be attached to the hitch,
not to the vehicle bumper or axle. Be sure to leave
enough slack in the chains to permit turning
corners.
Trailer lights
CAUTION
When splicing into the vehicle electrical
system, a commercially available power-
type module/converter must be used to
provide power for all trailer lighting. This
unit uses the vehicle battery as a direct
power source for all trailer lights while
using the vehicle tail light, stoplight and
turn signal circuits as a signal source. The
module/converter must draw no more
that 15 milliamps from the stop and tail
lamp circuits. Using a module/converter
that exceeds these power requirements
may damage the vehicle’s electrical sys-
tem. See a reputable trailer dealer to ob-
tain the proper equipment and to have it
installed.
Trailer lights should comply with federal and/or
local regulations. For assistance in hooking up
trailer lights, contact a NISSAN dealer or repu-
table trailer dealer.
Trailer brakes
If your trailer is equipped with a braking system,
make sure it conforms to federal and/or local
regulations and that it is properly installed.
9-20 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
Never connect a trailer brake system di-
rectly to the vehicle brake system.
Pre-towing tips
●Be certain your vehicle maintains a level
position when a loaded and/or unloaded
trailer is hitched. Do not drive the vehicle if it
has an abnormal nose-up or nose-down
condition; check for improper tongue load,
overload, worn suspension or other possible
causes of either condition.
●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
●Keep the cargo load as low as possible in
the trailer to keep the trailer center of gravity
low.
●Load the trailer so approximately 60% of the
trailer load is in the front half and 40% is in
the back half. Also make sure the load is
balanced side to side.
●Check your hitch, trailer tire pressure, ve-
hicle tire pressure, trailer light operation, and
trailer wheel lug nuts every time you attach a
trailer to the vehicle.
●Be certain your rearview mirrors conform to
all federal, state or local regulations. If not,
install any mirrors required for towing before
driving the vehicle.
●Determine the overall height of the vehicle
and trailer so the required clearance is
known.
Trailer towing tips
In order to gain skill and an understanding of the
vehicle’s behavior, you should practice turning,
stopping and backing up in an area which is free
from traffic. Steering stability and braking perfor-
mance will be somewhat different than under
normal driving conditions.
●Always secure items in the trailer to prevent
load shift while driving.
●Lock the trailer hitch coupler with a pin or
lock to prevent the coupler from inadver-
tently becoming unlatched.
●Avoid abrupt starts, acceleration or stops.
●Avoid sharp turns or lane changes.
●Always drive your vehicle at a moderate
speed.
●When backing up, hold the bottom of the
steering wheel with one hand. Move your
hand in the direction in which you want the
trailer to go. Make small corrections and
back up slowly. If possible, have someone
guide you when you are backing up.
Always block the wheels on both vehicle and
trailer when parking. Parking on a slope is not
recommended; however, if you must do so:
CAUTION
If you move the shift selector to the P
(Park) position before blocking the
wheels and applying the parking brake,
transmission damage could occur.
1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
2. Have someone place blocks on the downhill
side of the vehicle and trailer wheels.
3. After the wheel blocks are in place, slowly
release the brake pedal until the blocks ab-
sorb the vehicle load.
4. Apply the parking brake.
5. Shift the transmission into P (Park).
6. Turn off the engine.
Technical and consumer information 9-21
To drive away:
1. Start the vehicle.
2. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the transmission into gear.
4. Release the parking brake.
5. Drive slowly until the vehicle and trailer are
clear from the blocks.
6. Apply and hold the brake pedal.
7. Have someone retrieve and store the blocks.
●While going downhill, the weight of the
trailer pushing on the tow vehicle may dete-
riorate overall handling characteristics.
Therefore, to maintain adequate control, re-
duce your speed and shift to a lower gear.
Avoid long or repeated use of the brakes
when descending a hill, as this reduces their
effectiveness and could cause overheating.
Shifting to a lower gear instead provides
“engine braking” and reduces the need to
brake as frequently.
●If the engine coolant temperature rises to a
high temperature, refer to “If your vehicle
overheats” in the “In case of emergency”
section of this owner’s manual.
●Trailer towing requires more fuel than normal
circumstances.
●Avoid towing a trailer for your vehicle’s first
500 miles (805 km).
●For the first 500 miles (805 km) that you do
tow, do not drive over 50 MPH (80 km/h).
●Have your vehicle serviced more often than
at intervals specified in the recommended
Maintenance Schedule in the “NISSAN Ser-
vice and Maintenance Guide”.
●When making a turn, your trailer wheels will
be closer to the inside of the turn than your
vehicle wheels. To compensate for this,
make a larger than normal turning radius
during the turn.
●Crosswinds and rough roads will adversely
affect vehicle/trailer handling, possibly caus-
ing vehicle sway. When being passed by
larger vehicles, be prepared for possible
changes in crosswinds that could affect ve-
hicle handling.
Do the following if the trailer begins to sway:
1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal to
allow the vehicle to coast and steer as
straight ahead as the road conditions allow.
This combination will help stabilize the ve-
hicle
– Do not correct trailer sway by steering or
applying the brakes.
2. When the trailer sway stops, gently apply the
brakes and pull to the side of the road in a
safe area.
3. Try to rearrange the trailer load so it is bal-
anced as described earlier in this section.
●Be careful when passing other vehicles.
Passing while towing a trailer requires con-
siderably more distance than normal pass-
ing. Remember, the length of the trailer must
also pass the other vehicle before you can
safely change lanes.
●Use the Tow Mode or downshift the trans-
mission to a lower gear for engine braking
when driving down steep or long hills. This
will help slow the vehicle without applying
the brakes.
●Avoid holding the brake pedal down too long
or too frequently. This could cause the
brakes to overheat, resulting in reduced
braking efficiency.
●Increase your following distance to allow for
greater stopping distances while towing a
trailer. Anticipate stops and brake gradually.
●NISSAN recommends that the cruise con-
trol not be used while towing a trailer.
9-22 Technical and consumer information
●Some states or provinces have specific
regulations and speed limits for vehicles that
are towing trailers. Obey the local speed
limits.
●Check your hitch, trailer wiring harness con-
nections, and trailer wheel lug nuts after 50
miles (80 km) of travel and at every break.
●When launching a boat, don’t allow the wa-
ter level to go over the exhaust tail pipe or
rear bumper.
●Make sure you disconnect the trailer lights
before backing the trailer into the water or
the trailer lights may burn out.
When towing a trailer, final drive gear oil
should be replaced and transmission
oil/fluid should be changed more fre-
quently. For additional information, see the
“Maintenance and do-it-yourself” section
earlier in this manual.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the
ground is sometimes called flat towing. This
method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle
behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor
home.
CAUTION
●Failure to follow these guidelines can
result in severe transmission damage.
●Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-
ways tow forward, never backward.
●DO NOT tow any continuously variable
transmission vehicle with all four
wheels on the ground (flat towing). Do-
ing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmis-
sion parts due to lack of transmission
lubrication.
●For emergency towing procedures refer
to “Towing recommended by NISSAN”
in the “In case of emergency” section of
this manual.
Manual Transmission (if so equipped)
●Always tow with the manual transmission in
Neutral.
●After towing 500 miles (805 km), start and
idle the engine with the transmission in Neu-
tral for two minutes. Failure to idle the engine
after every 500 miles (805 km) of towing
may cause damage to internal transmission
parts.
Continuously Variable Transmission (if
so equipped)
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously
variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle
dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle’s
drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufac-
turer’s recommendations when using their prod-
uct.
Technical and consumer information 9-23
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality
Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and
maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified gov-
ernment test course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times
as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however,
and may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the
tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as mea-
sured under controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction
performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained
high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and exces-
sive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
The grade C corresponds to a level of perfor-
mance which all passenger car tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of
performance on the laboratory test wheel than
the minimum required by law.
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is es-
tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, ei-
ther separately or in combination, can
cause heat build-up and possible tire
failure.
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
9-24 Technical and consumer information
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following
emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
●Nissan North America, Inc.
Consumer Affairs Department
P.O. Box 685003
Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other
vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information
Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle.
If you did not receive a Warranty Information
Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replace-
ment by writing to:
●Nissan Canada Inc.
5290 Orbitor Drive
Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
For USA
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying NISSAN.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot be-
come involved in individual problems be-
tween you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Ve-
hicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-
327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go
to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh
Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our
Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at
1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a de-
fect which could cause a crash or could
cause injury or death, you should immedi-
ately inform Transport Canada in addition
to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may request that NISSAN con-
duct a recall campaign. However, Trans-
port Canada cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or NISSAN.
You may contact Transport Canada’s De-
fect Investigations and Recalls Division
toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may
also report safety defects online at:
https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-
Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/Index.aspx.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Technical and consumer information 9-25
Additional information concerning motor
vehicle safety may be obtained from
Transport Canada’s Road Safety Informa-
tion Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online
at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety.
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns
please contact our Consumer Information
Centre toll free at 1-800-387-0122.
Due to legal requirements in some states and
Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may be re-
quired to be in what is called the “ready condi-
tion” for an Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of
the emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the “ready condition” when it
is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually,
the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary
usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the
battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to
a “not ready” condition. Before taking the I/M test,
check the vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test
readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the
ON position without starting the engine. If the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady
for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the
I/M test condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not
blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is
“ready”. Contact a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready
condition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Re-
corder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist in understand-
ing how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR
is designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this
vehicle is designed to record such data as:
●How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
●Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
●How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
●How fast the vehicle was traveling.
●Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understand-
ing of the circumstances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by
your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under
normal driving conditions and no personal data
(e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are
recorded. However, other parties, such as law
enforcement, could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying data routinely
acquired during a crash investigation.
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/
MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
9-26 Technical and consumer information
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required and access to the vehicle or the
EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manu-
facturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special equip-
ment, can read the information if they have ac-
cess to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only
be accessed with the consent of the vehicle
owner or lessee or as otherwise required or per-
mitted by law.
A genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best
source of service and repair information for your
vehicle. Filled with wiring diagrams, illustrations
and step-by-step diagnostic and adjustment pro-
cedures, this manual is the same one used by the
factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN
dealerships. Also available are genuine NISSAN
Owner’s Manuals, and genuine NISSAN Service
and Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 2000 model
year and later contact:
1-800-450-9491
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Service Manuals for the 1999 model
year and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321
For current pricing and availability of genuine
NISSAN Owner’s Manuals for this model year
and prior, see a NISSAN dealer, or contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a genuine NISSAN Ser-
vice Manual or Owner’s Manual please contact
your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone num-
ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area
call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-
387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representa-
tive will assist you.
Also available are genuine NISSAN Service and
Owner’s Manuals for older NISSAN models.
IN THE EVENT OF A COLLISION
Unfortunately, accidents do occur. In this unlikely
event, there is some important information you
should know.
Many insurance companies routinely authorize
the use of non-genuine collision parts in order to
cut costs, among other reasons.
OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE
MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
Technical and consumer information 9-27
Insist on the use of genuine NISSAN
collision parts!
If you want your vehicle to be restored using parts
made to NISSAN’s original exacting specifica-
tions – if you want to help it to last and hold its
resale value, the solution is simple. Tell your
insurance agent and your repair shop to
only use Genuine NISSAN Collision Parts.
NISSAN does not warrant non-NISSAN parts,
nor does NISSAN’s warranty apply to damage
caused by a non-genuine part.
Using Genuine NISSAN Parts can help protect
your personal safety, preserve your warranty pro-
tection and maintain the resale value of your
vehicle. And if your vehicle was leased, using
Genuine NISSAN Parts may prevent or limit un-
necessary excess wear and tear expenses at the
end of your lease.
NISSAN designs its hoods with crumple zones to
minimize the risk that the hood will penetrate the
windshield of your vehicle in an accident. Non-
genuine (imitation) parts may not provide such
built-in safeguards. Also, non-genuine parts of-
ten show premature wear, rust and corrosion.
Why should you take a chance?
In over 40 states, the law says you must be
advised if non-genuine parts are used to repair
your vehicle. And some states have enacted laws
that restrict insurance companies from authoriz-
ing the use of non-genuine collision parts during
the new vehicle warranty. These laws help pro-
tect you, so you can take action to protect your-
self.
It’s your right!
If you should need further information visit us at:
www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or
www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers).
9-28 Technical and consumer information
10 Index
A
Air bag (See supplemental restraint
system) .....................1-41
Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact
air bag system) ...............1-50
Air bag warning light...........1-57, 2-14
Air cleaner housing filter ............8-20
Air conditioner
Air conditioner operation ..........4-21
Air conditioner service ...........4-28
Air conditioner specification label .....9-12
Air conditioner system refrigerant and
oil recommendations .............9-6
Heater and air conditioner
controls................4-19, 4-26
Servicing air conditioner ..........4-28
Air flow charts..................4-22
Alarm system
(See vehicle security system) .........2-26
Anchor point locations .............1-27
Antenna .....................4-90
Anti-lock brake warning light..........2-11
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)........5-25
Armrests .....................1-9
Audible reminders ...............2-16
Audio system ..................4-29
Bluetooth姞audio ..............4-84
Compact disc (CD)
player ..........4-46, 4-52, 4-58, 4-64
FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)
player ....................4-44
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player. .4-54
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player .................4-48
Audio System
iPod姞Player .............4-72, 4-74
Music Box姞hard-disk drive audio
system ....................4-77
Audio system
Radio ....................4-29
Audio System
Settings ...................4-55
Audio system
USB interface ............4-66, 4-68
Autolight switch.................2-31
Automatic
Automatic power window switch .....2-45
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror .......3-30
Automatic door locks ..............3-5
AUX jack .................4-47, 4-53
B
Battery......................8-16
Charge warning light ............2-11
Before starting the engine ...........5-10
Belt (See drive belt) ..............8-18
Block heater
Engine ....................5-29
Bluetooth姞audio ................4-84
Bluetooth姞hands-free phone
system .................4-91, 4-106
Booster seats ..................1-38
Brake
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)......5-25
Brake fluid ..................8-14
Brake light (See stop light).........8-30
Brake system ................5-24
Brake warning light .............2-11
Brake wear indicators ........2-16, 8-22
Parking brake operation ..........5-19
Self-adjusting brakes ............8-22
Brakes ......................8-22
Break-in schedule ...............5-22
Brightness/contrast button...........4-12
Brightness control
Instrument panel ..............2-33
Bulb check/instrument panel..........2-10
Bulb replacement ................8-30
C
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants...................9-2
Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . .9-13
Car phone or CB radio .............4-91
CD care and cleaning .............4-87
CD player
(See audio system) . . . .4-46, 4-52, 4-58, 4-64
Check tire pressure...............2-25
Child restraints.......1-21, 1-22, 1-23, 1-25
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-23, 1-29, 1-34, 1-38
Top tether strap anchor point locations . .1-27
Child safety rear door lock ............3-6
Chimes, audible reminders ...........2-16
Cleaning exterior and interior ...........7-2
Clock ...................4-45, 4-50
(models with navigation system) .......4-8
(models without navigation system) . . . .4-45
Clock set ..................4-8, 4-45
Clutch
Clutch fluid ..................8-15
C.M.V.S.S. certification label ..........9-10
Cold weather driving ..............5-28
Compact disc (CD)
player ............4-46, 4-52, 4-58, 4-64
Compass display .................2-6
Console box ...................2-41
Console light ...................2-50
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT). . .5-11
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ..................8-13
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) .............5-11
Transmission shift selector lock release . .5-16
Control panel buttons ...............4-2
Brightness/contrast button .........4-12
Enter button ..................4-2
Setting button .................4-6
Controls
Heater and air conditioner
controls ................4-19, 4-26
Coolant
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Changing engine coolant ...........8-9
Checking engine coolant level ........8-9
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5
Corrosion protection ...............7-6
Cruise control ..................5-20
Cup holders ...................2-40
D
Daytime running light system (Canada only) . .2-32
Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.....................2-29
Digital Versatile Disc (DVD) player .......4-63
Dimensions and weights .............9-8
Dimmer switch for instrument panel ......2-33
Display controls (see control panel buttons) . .4-2
Door locks .....................3-4
Drive belt .....................8-18
Driving
Cold weather driving ............5-28
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) .............5-11
Driving with manual transmission ......5-17
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
E
Economy - fuel ..................5-22
Emission control information label .......9-11
Emission control system warranty .......9-25
Engine
Before starting the engine..........5-10
Block heater .................5-29
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Changing engine coolant ...........8-9
Changing engine oil .............8-11
Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12
Checking engine coolant level ........8-9
Checking engine oil level ..........8-10
Engine compartment check locations . . . .8-6
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5
Engine cooling system ............8-8
Engine oil ...................8-10
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-12
Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5
Engine serial number ............9-10
Engine specifications .............9-7
Starting the engine .............5-10
Enter button ....................4-2
Event data recorders ..............9-26
Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide) .........5-2
Extended storage switch ............8-26
Eyeglass case ..................2-38
F
Flashers
(See hazard warning flasher switch) ......2-34
Flat tire .......................6-2
Floor mat positioning aid .............7-5
Fluid
Brake fluid ..................8-14
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Clutch fluid ..................8-15
10-2
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ..................8-13
Engine coolant.................8-8
Engine oil ...................8-10
Power steering fluid .............8-14
F.M.V.S.S. certification label...........9-10
Fog light switch .................2-34
Front air bag system
(See supplemental restraint system) ......1-50
Front seats .....................1-2
Fuel
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Fuel economy ................5-22
Fuel-filler door and cap ...........3-25
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-25
Fuel gauge ...................2-6
Fuel octane rating ...............9-4
Fuel recommendation .............9-3
Loose fuel cap warning........2-25, 3-25
Fuses .......................8-23
Fusible links ...................8-24
G
Garage door opener, HomeLink姞Universal
Transceiver ....................2-51
Gascap .....................3-25
Gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5
Fuel gauge ...................2-6
Odometer ...................2-4
Speedometer .................2-4
Tachometer ..................2-5
Trip odometer .................2-4
General maintenance ...............8-2
Glove box.....................2-41
Glove box lock ..................2-41
Grocery hooks ..................2-42
H
Hands-free phone system,
Bluetooth姞................4-91, 4-106
Hazard warning flasher switch .........2-34
Headlight and turn signal switch ........2-29
Headlight control switch ............2-31
Headlights ....................8-28
Heated seats ...................2-35
Heater
Heater and air conditioner
controls ................4-19, 4-26
Heater operation ...........4-20, 4-27
HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver........2-51
Hood release...................3-23
Horn .......................2-35
I
Ignition Switch
Push-Button Ignition Switch .........5-7
Immobilizer system ..........2-27, 3-3, 5-9
Important vehicle information label .......9-10
In-cabin microfilter ................8-21
Increasing fuel economy.............5-22
Indicator lights and audible reminders
(See warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders) ....................2-10
Inside automatic anti-glare mirror ........3-30
Inside mirror ...................3-29
Instrument brightness control ..........2-33
Instrument panel ...............0-8, 2-2
Instrument panel dimmer switch ........2-33
Intelligent Key system
Key operating range ..........3-8, 3-18
Key operation .................3-9
Mechanical key ................3-3
Remote keyless entry operation . . .3-12, 3-18
Troubleshooting guide ........3-16, 3-22
Warning signals ............3-16, 3-22
Interior light....................2-49
Interior trunk lid release .............3-24
iPod姞Player................4-72, 4-74
ISOFIX child restraints .............1-25
J
Jump starting ...................6-8
K
Keyfob battery replacement ...........8-27
Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system
(See Intelligent Key system) .....3-12, 3-18
Keys, For Intelligent Key system .........3-2
L
Labels
Air conditioner specification label .....9-12
C.M.V.S.S. certification label ........9-10
10-3
Emission control information label .....9-11
Engine serial number ............9-10
F.M.V.S.S. certification label.........9-10
Tire and Loading Information label .....9-11
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . .9-9
Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-56
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren)
System ......................1-25
License plate
Installing the license plate ..........9-12
Light
Air bag warning light .........1-57, 2-14
Brake light (See stop light) .........8-30
Bulb check/instrument panel ........2-10
Bulb replacement ..............8-30
Charge warning light ............2-11
Console light .................2-50
Fog light switch ...............2-34
Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-29
Headlight control switch ..........2-31
Headlights ..................8-28
Interior light..................2-49
Light bulbs ..................8-28
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light ......................2-24
Passenger air bag and status light .....1-51
Personal lights ................2-50
Security indicator light............2-16
Spotlights (See map light) .........2-50
Trunk light ..................2-51
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders...................2-10
Lights
Map lights ..................2-50
Lock
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6
Door locks ...................3-4
Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ......3-25
Glove box lock ................2-41
Power door locks ...............3-5
Trunk lid lock opener lever..........3-23
Loose fuel cap warning..........2-25, 3-25
Low fuel warning light ..........2-13, 2-24
Low tire pressure warning light .........2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light. . .2-24
Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . .9-13
M
Maintenance
General maintenance .............8-2
Inside the vehicle ...............8-3
Maintenance precautions ...........8-5
Outside the vehicle ..............8-2
Seat belt maintenance............1-20
Under the hood and vehicle .........8-4
Malfunction indicator light ............2-15
Manual front seat adjustment...........1-2
Map lights ....................2-50
Map pocket....................2-37
Meters and gauges ................2-3
Instrument brightness control ........2-33
Mirror
Automatic anti-glare inside mirror......3-30
Inside mirror .................3-29
Outside mirrors ...............3-31
Vanity mirror .................3-29
Moonroof .....................2-46
Music Box姞hard-disk drive audio system . . .4-77
N
NISSAN Intelligent Key™ ............3-17
NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system .................2-27, 3-3, 5-9
NISSAN voice recognition system ......4-117
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating)......9-4
Odometer .....................2-4
Oil
Capacities and recommended
fuel/lubricants .................9-2
Changing engine oil .............8-11
Changing engine oil filter ..........8-12
Checking engine oil level ..........8-10
Engine oil ...................8-10
Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . .9-5
Engine oil viscosity ..............9-5
Outside mirrors .................3-31
Overheat
If your vehicle overheats...........6-10
Owner’s manual order form ...........9-27
Owner’s manual/service manual order
information ....................9-27
P
Parking
Parking brake operation ...........5-19
Parking/parking on hills ...........5-23
Personal lights ..................2-50
10-4
Phone, Bluetooth姞hands-free
system ..................4-91, 4-106
Power
Power door locks ...............3-5
Power outlet .................2-36
Power rear windows.............2-45
Power steering fluid .............8-14
Power steering system ...........5-24
Power windows ...............2-43
Rear power windows ............2-45
Precautions
Maintenance precautions ...........8-5
Precautions on child
restraints.........1-23, 1-29, 1-34, 1-38
Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-14
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-41
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Programmable features ..............4-6
Push starting ...................6-10
R
Radio
Car phone or CB radio ...........4-91
FM-AM radio with compact disc
(CD) player ..................4-44
FM/AM/SAT radio with CD/DVD player . .4-54
FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc
(CD) player ..................4-48
Readiness for inspection maintenance
(I/M) test .....................9-26
Rear parcel shelf
Refitting covers ...............8-37
Removing covers...............8-37
Rear power windows ..............2-45
Rear seat......................1-8
RearView Monitor ................4-13
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.......................2-29
Recorders
Event data ..................9-26
Refrigerant recommendation ...........9-6
Registering your vehicle in another country . . .9-9
Reporting safety defects (US only) .......9-25
S
Safety
Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6
Child seat belts .....1-23, 1-29, 1-34, 1-38
Reporting safety defects (US only) .....9-25
Seat adjustment
Front manual seat adjustment ........1-2
Front power seat adjustment .........1-4
Rear seat adjustment .............1-8
Seatback pockets ................2-37
Seat belt
Child safety..................1-21
Infants and small children ..........1-22
Injured Person ................1-17
Larger children ................1-22
Precautions on seat belt usage .......1-14
Pregnant women...............1-17
Seat belt extenders .............1-20
Seat belt maintenance............1-20
Seat belts...................1-14
Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-19
Three-point type with retractor .......1-17
Seat belt warning light..............2-14
Seats
Adjustment...................1-2
Front seats ...................1-2
Heated seats .................2-35
Manual front seat adjustment.........1-2
Rear seat....................1-8
Security indicator light..............2-16
Security system (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer
system), engine start .........2-27, 3-3, 5-9
Self-adjusting brakes ..............8-22
Service manual order form ...........9-27
Servicing air conditioner.............4-28
Setting button ...................4-6
Shifting
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) .....................5-13
Manual transmission .............5-18
Shift lock release.................5-16
Shoulder belt height adjustment ........1-19
Spark plug replacement .............8-19
Speedometer ...................2-4
Spotlights (See map light) ...........2-50
SRS warning label ................1-56
Starting
Before starting the engine..........5-10
Jump starting .................6-8
Precautions when starting and driving . . . .5-2
Push starting .................6-10
Starting the engine .............5-10
Steering
Power steering fluid .............8-14
Power steering system ...........5-24
Stop light .....................8-30
Storage ......................2-37
Sunglasses case.................2-38
Sunglasses holder ................2-38
10-5
Sunroof ......................2-46
Sunroof (see Moonroof) .............2-46
Sun visors ....................3-28
Supplemental air bag warning light . . .1-57, 2-14
Supplemental front impact air bag system . . .1-50
Supplemental restraint system
Information and warning labels .......1-56
Precautions on supplemental restraint
system ....................1-41
Supplemental restraint system
(Supplemental air bag system) .........1-41
Switch
Autolight switch ...............2-31
Automatic power window switch ......2-45
Fog light switch ...............2-34
Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-34
Headlight and turn signal switch ......2-29
Headlight control switch ..........2-31
Power door lock switch ............3-5
Rear window and outside mirror defroster
switch.....................2-29
Turn signal switch ..............2-33
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off
switch.....................2-36
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28
T
Tachometer ....................2-5
Temperature gauge
Engine coolant temperature gauge .....2-5
Theft (NISSAN vehicle immobilizer system),
engine start ..............2-27, 3-3, 5-9
Three-way catalyst ................5-2
Tire
Flat tire .....................6-2
Spare tire ................6-4, 8-49
Tire and Loading Information label .....9-11
Tire chains ..................8-46
Tire placard..................9-11
Tire pressure .................8-38
Tire rotation..................8-47
Types of tires .................8-45
Uniform tire quality grading .........9-24
Wheels and tires...............8-38
Wheel/tire size.................9-8
Tire pressure
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . .5-3
Towing
Flat towing ..................9-23
Towing load/specification ..........9-19
Tow truck towing...............6-11
Trailer towing .................9-16
Transceiver
HomeLink姞Universal Transceiver......2-51
Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission
(CVT) fluid ..................8-13
Driving with Continuously Variable
Transmission (CVT) .............5-11
Driving with manual transmission ......5-17
Shift selector lock release..........5-16
Travel (See registering your vehicle in another
country) ......................9-9
Trip odometer ...................2-4
Trunk access through the rear seat .......1-8
Trunk lid lock opener lever............3-23
Trunk light ....................2-51
Turn signal switch ................2-33
U
Uniform tire quality grading ...........9-24
USB interface
Audio file operation ..........4-67, 4-69
Video file operation .............4-70
V
Vanity mirror ...................3-29
Variable voltage control system .........8-18
Vehicle dimensions and weights .........9-8
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) off switch . . .2-36
Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system.....5-26
Vehicle identification ...............9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
(Chassis number) .................9-9
Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . .9-9
Vehicle loading information ...........9-13
Vehicle recovery .................6-14
Vehicle security system .............2-26
Vehicle security system (NISSAN vehicle immobi-
lizer system), engine start ......2-27, 3-3, 5-9
Ventilators ....................4-18
Visors .......................3-28
Voice recognition system ...........4-117
W
Warning
Air bag warning light .........1-57, 2-14
Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-11
Battery charge warning light ........2-11
Brake warning light .............2-11
10-6
Engine oil pressure warning light ......2-12
Hazard warning flasher switch .......2-34
Low fuel warning light ........2-13, 2-24
Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12
Low windshield-washer fluid warning
light ......................2-24
Passenger air bag and status light .....1-51
Seat belt warning light............2-14
Vehicle security system ...........2-26
Warning/indicator lights and audible
reminders...................2-10
Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-56
Warning lights ..................2-10
Washer switch
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28
Weights (See dimensions and weights) .....9-8
Wheels and tires.................8-38
Wheel/tire size...................9-8
When traveling or registering your vehicle
in another country .................9-9
Windows
Locking passengers’ windows .......2-45
Power rear windows.............2-45
Power windows ...............2-43
Rear power windows ............2-45
Windshield-washer fluid.............8-15
Windshield wiper and washer switch .....2-28
Wiper
Windshield wiper and washer switch . . .2-28
Wiper blades.................8-21
10-7
RECOMMENDED FUEL:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane
rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) num-
ber (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
●Using a fuel other than that specified
could adversely affect the emission
control system, and may also affect the
warranty coverage.
●Under no circumstances should a
leaded gasoline be used, because this
will damage the three-way catalyst.
●Do not use E-85 fuel in your vehicle.
Your vehicle is not designed to run on
E-85 fuel. Using E-85 fuel can damage
the fuel system components and is not
covered by the NISSAN new vehicle lim-
ited warranty.
For additional information, see “Capacities and
recommended fuel/lubricants” in the “Technical
and consumer information” section.
RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
●Engine oil with API Certification Mark
●Viscosity SAE 5W-30
See “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations” in
the “Technical and consumer information” sec-
tion of this manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
See Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side
center pillar or on the driver’s door. For additional
information, see “Wheels and tires” in the “Main-
tenance and do-it-yourself” section of this
manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE
BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle
use, follow the recommendations outlined in the
“Break-in schedule” information found in the
“Starting and driving” section of this manual. Fol-
low these recommendations for the future reli-
ability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure
to follow these recommendations may result in
vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
GAS STATION INFORMATION
®
2011 ALTIMA
OWNER’S MANUAL
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
2011 NISSAN ALTIMA L32-D
L32-D
Printing : November 2010 (16)
Publication No.: OM0E 0L32U2
Printed in U.S.A.
OM1E 0L32U1
